TSC1 Asset Surveyor

Operation Manual
Pathfndr.bk Page 2 Thursday, June 17, 1999 11:02 AM
TSC1 Asset Surveyor
Operation Manual

Version 5.20
Part Number 34182-20-ENG

Revision A
March 2001
Corporate Office The following limited warranties give you specific
legal rights. You may have others, which vary
Trimble Navigation Limited from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.
Mapping & GIS Systems
645 North Mary Avenue Hardware Limited Warranty
P.O. Box 3642
Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642 Trimble warrants that this Trimble hardware
U.S.A. product (the “Product”) shall substantially
Phone: +1-408-481-8940, 1-800-545-7762 conform to Trimble’s applicable published
Fax: +1-408-481-7744 specifications for the Product for a period of one
www.trimble.com (1) year, starting from the date of delivery. The
warranty set forth in this paragraph shall not apply
Copyright to software products.
© 1999–2001, Trimble Navigation Limited. All Software and Firmware Limited Warranty
rights reserved. No part of this manual may be
copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or Trimble warrants that this Trimble software
reduced to any electronic medium or machine- product (the “Software”) shall substantially
readable form for any use other than with the conform to Trimble’s applicable published
Asset Surveyor™ product without prior written specifications for the Software for a period of
consent from Trimble Navigation Limited. ninety (90) days, starting from the date of
delivery.
Printed in the United States of America. Printed
on recycled paper. Warranty Remedies

Trademarks Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy

under the warranties set forth above shall be, at
GPS Pathfinder and the Sextant logo with Trimble Trimble’s option, to repair or replace any Product
are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited or Software that fails to conform to such warranty
registered in the United States Patent and (“Nonconforming Product”) or refund the
Trademark Office. purchase price paid by you for any such
Nonconforming Product, upon your return of any
The Globe & Triangle logo with Trimble, 4600LS, Nonconforming Product to Trimble.
ASPEN, Asset Surveyor, Centurion, GeoExplorer,
GPS Pathfinder Basic, GPS Pathfinder Basic Plus,
GPS Pathfinder Pro XL, GPS Pathfinder Pro XR,
GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS, GPS Pathfinder
Professional, GPS ProLite, GPS Total Station
4700, GPS Total Station 4800, Over and Up,
Pathlog, Series 4000 GPS, Site Surveyor 4400,
Supertrak, Survey Controller, TDC1, TDC2,
Trimble Reference Station (TRS), Trimble
Support Module (TSM), Trimpack III, and TSC1
are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited.
All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.

Release Notice

This is the March 2001 release (Revision A) of the

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual, part
number 34182-20-ENG. It applies to version 5.20
of the Asset Surveyor™ software.
Warranty Exclusions Limitation of Liability
These warranties shall be applied only in the event TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
and to the extent that: (i) the Products and APPLICABLE LAW, TRIMBLE SHALL NOT BE
Software are properly and correctly installed, LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
configured, interfaced, stored, maintained and OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
operated in accordance with Trimble's relevant OR UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL
operator's manual and specifications, and; (ii) the THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE
Products and Software are not modified or PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE, REGARDLESS
misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for, any THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND
claim of warranty infringement is based on (i) REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING
defects or performance problems that arise from WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED
the combination or utilization of the Product or BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME
Software with products, information, systems or STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
devices not made, supplied or specified by THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
Software under any specification other than, or in DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
addition to, Trimble's standard specifications for APPLY TO YOU.
its products; (iii) the unauthorized modification or
use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage IN ANY CASE, TRIMBLE'S SOLE LIABILITY,
caused by lightning, other electrical discharge, or AND YOUR SOLE REMEDY UNDER OR FOR
fresh or salt water immersion or spray; or (v) BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT, WILL BE
normal wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., LIMITED TO THE REFUND OF THE PURCHASE
batteries). PRICE OR LICENSE FEE PAID FOR THE
PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE.
THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S
ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS
AND SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT, TRIMBLE
FURNISHES THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE
AS-IS, WITH NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, AND THERE IS EXPRESSLY
EXCLUDED THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE STATED EXPRESS
WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL
OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART
OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF, OR IN
CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR
SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS
ON DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
 Contents
About This Manual

1 Quick Setup
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Before Leaving the Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
In the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Back in the Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rover Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Data Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Base Station Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Base Station Data Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
GPS Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The GPS Pathfinder Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
What is the TSC1? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Turning the TSC1 Datalogger On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Alternate Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual v

Contents

Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Next Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Help Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Disconnecting from the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Choosing a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Warm Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cold Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Data Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Battery Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Low Battery Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recharging the TSC1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Alternative Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

4 Before Leaving the Office

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Updating the Almanac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Data Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

vi TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Contents

Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Importing Data from a GIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Connecting the TSC1 Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Transferring Files to the TSC1 Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Configuring the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Critical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Non-critical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
GPS Hardware Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Getting Base Station Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

5 In the Field
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Starting the Asset Surveyor Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Activating GPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Controlling GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
An Accurate Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Logging Data to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Creating a New Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Collecting New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Entering Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Saving a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Entering a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Exiting Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Updating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Opening an Existing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reviewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Updating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Collecting New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual vii

Contents

Deleting and Undeleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Exiting Data Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using the Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Navigating Using the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Navigating with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Target and Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Heading Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Navigation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Direction Dial Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Road Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Info Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Managing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Deleting Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Renaming Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Copying Files to and from the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Moving Files to and from the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

6 Back in the Office

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Transferring Data to the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Transferring Data from the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Transferring Data From the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Postprocessed Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Starting Differential Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Displaying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Exporting Data to a GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Batch Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

vi ii TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Contents

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Why Use This Feature? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Collecting Sufficient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
What Is a Block of Data?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Recording Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
In the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Opening a Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Starting to Log Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Starting a Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Logging Carrier Phase Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Back In the Office. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Centimeter Processing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

8 RTK Mapping
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Introduction to RTK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Real-Time Kinematic Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Satellite Signals and GPS Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
RTK Correction Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Accuracy Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Data Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Setting Up a Base Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Equipment Setup and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual ix

Contents

Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Setting Up a Base Station with the Asset Surveyor Software . . 208
Setting up a Rover with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . 219
In the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Starting the Rover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
RTK Status in the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Recording Less Accurate Positions if the RTK Radio Link Fails225
Recording Non-RTK Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Using RTK and Non-RTK Rovers with the Same Base Station . 226
Back in the Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
RTK Positions in the GPS Pathfinder Office Software . . . . . 227
Exporting RTK Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Exporting RTK Precision Estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

A Pro XRS System

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 233
Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS . . . . . 233
< 50 cm Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
RTCM Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
RTCM Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
PPRT Positions (Postprocessed Real-Time) . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Activating Satellite Differential (DGPS) Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Activating the OmniSTAR Satellite DGPS Service . . . . . . . 239
Activating the Racal-LandStar Satellite DGPS Service . . . . . 241

x TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Contents

B Pro XR System
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 245
Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Pathfinder Pro XR. . . . . . 245
<50 cm Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
RTCM Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
RTCM Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
PPRT Positions (Postprocessed Real-Time) . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

C Pro XL System
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 252
Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Pathfinder Pro XL. . . . . . 253
Submeter Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
RTCM Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
RTCM Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual xi

Contents

D Series 4000
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 261
Operational Aspects Specific to Series 4000 GPS Receivers. . . . . . 264
Real-Time Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Real-Time Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Base Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
2D Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Other Configuration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Receiver Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Almanacs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

E Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 272
Operational Aspects Specific to the Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver . . . 273
Submeter Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Real-Time Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Real-Time Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

xi i TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Contents

Base Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

External Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

F 4600LS Surveyor
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 280
Operational Aspects Specific to the 4600LS Surveyor . . . . . . . . . 281
Submeter Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
RTCM Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Base Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
External Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

G GPS Total Station 4700

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 291
Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Total Station 4700. . . . . . 291
Submeter Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Real-Time Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Real-Time Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual xi ii

Contents

Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Base Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
External Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

H GPS Total Station 4800

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Switches and Indicator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Turning the Receiver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Turning the Receiver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software . 301
Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Total Station 4800. . . . . . 302
Submeter Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Real-Time Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Real-Time Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Overdetermined Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Carrier Phase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Receiver Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Base Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
External Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

I Laser Rangefinders
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Laser Technology Criterion 300 and 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . 310

xi v TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Contents

Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . 314

Using the Criterion with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . 321
Collecting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Laser Atlanta ProSurvey 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . 330
Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . 334
Using the ProSurvey 1000 with the Asset Surveyor Software. . 336
Collecting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Laser Atlanta Advantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . 346
Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . 350
Using the Advantage with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . 351
Collecting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
LEDHA-GEO Laser Binoculars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . 361
Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . 365
Using the LEDHA-GEO with the Asset Surveyor Software. . . 366
Collecting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
MDL LaserAce 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . 375
Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . 379
Using the LaserAce 300 with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . 380
Collecting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
LaserCraft Contour XLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . . . . 389

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual xv

Contents

Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . . 393

Using the Contour XLR with the Asset Surveyor Software . . . 394
Collecting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

J External Sensors
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Criterion Laser Rangefinder (used for Measuring Heights) . . . . . . 404
Data Dictionary Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Asset Surveyor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Using the Criterion to Record Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Switching between Recording Laser Offsets and Heights . . . . 410
Digital Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Echo Sounders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

K NMEA Output Messages

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Common Message Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Latitude and Longitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
ALM: GPS Week, SV Health, and Almanac for One SV . . . . 424
GGA: Time, Position, and Fix Related Data . . . . . . . . . . . 425
GLL: Position Fix, Time of Position Fix, and Status . . . . . . 426
GSA: GPS Receiver Operating Mode, SVs used for
Navigation, and DOP Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
GSV: Number of Visible SVs, PRN Numbers, Elevation,
Azimuth, and SNR Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
RMC: Recommended Minimum Specific GPS/TRANSIT Data 427
VTG: Actual Track Made Good and Speed Over Ground . . . . 428
ZDA: UTC Day, Month, Year, and Local Time Zone Offset . . 429

Index

xv i TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

About This Manual
Welcome to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual. This manual
describes how to operate the Asset Surveyor™ software, in
conjunction with a range of Trimble GPS receivers for GIS data
collection and update. The Asset Surveyor software provides all the
functionality you need to efficiently collect GIS/GPS data.
Even if you have used other Global Positioning System (GPS)
products before, we recommend that you spend some time reading this
manual to learn about the special features of this product.
If you are not familiar with GPS, visit our web site for an interactive
look at Trimble and GPS at:
• www.trimble.com

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual x vii

About This Manual

Related Information
Other manuals in this set include:
• TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide
This manual describes how to install, set up, and use the Asset
Surveyor software.
• Mapping Systems General Reference
The Mapping Systems General Reference explains general GPS
and GIS concepts, as well as the Trimble Survey and Mapping
Bulletin Board.
• GPS Pathfinder Office Documentation
The GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started Guide contains a
tutorial chapter that shows you how to use many features that
are common to the GPS Pathfinder Office software and the
Asset Surveyor software.
As well as being supplied in hardcopy, these manuals are also
available in portable document format (PDF). These are available
from the Asset Surveyor installation CD-ROM.
• Readme.txt file – a Readme.txt file contains information added
after the documentation was completed. To read this file,
double-click it or use a text editor to open it.
• Release notes – the release notes describe new features of the
product, information not included in the manuals, and any
changes to the manuals.
• Update notes – there is a warranty activation sheet with this
product. Send it in to automatically receive update notes
containing important information about software and hardware
changes. Contact your local Trimble Dealer for more
information about the support agreement contracts for software
and firmware, and an extended warranty program for hardware.

xv iii TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

About This Manual

• ftp.trimble.com – use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to

receive files such as software patches, utilities, service
bulletins, and FAQs. Alternatively, access the FTP site from the
Trimble web site at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm.
• Trimble training courses – consider a training course to help
you use your GPS system to its fullest potential. For more
information, visit the Trimble web site at
www.trimble.com/support/training.htm
• RTCM – for information on RTCM SC-104 contact:
Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services
P.O. Box 19 087
Washington, D.C. 20036
U.S.A.

Technical Assistance
If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the
product documentation, contact your local Distributor. Alternatively,
request technical support using the Trimble web site at:
• www.trimble.com/support/support.htm

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual xix

About This Manual

Your Comments
Your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to
improve it with each revision. To forward your comments, do one of
the following:
• Send an e-mail to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com.
• Complete the Reader Comment Form at the back of this manual
and mail it according to the instructions at the bottom of the
form.
If the Reader Comment Form is not available, send comments and
suggestions to the address in the front of this manual. Please mark
them Attention: Technical Publications Group.

Document Conventions
The document conventions are as follows:

Convention Definition
Italics Identifies software menus, menu commands,
dialog boxes, and the dialog box fields.
Helvetica Narrow Represents messages printed on the screen.

Helvetica Bold Identifies a software command button, or

represents information that you must type in a
software screen or window.
% Is an example of a hardware key (hard key) that
you must press on the TSC1 keypad.
>&WUO@ Is an example of a hardware function key that you
must press on a personal computer (PC). If you
must press more than one of these at the same
time, this is represented by a plus sign, for
example, >&WUO@+>&@.
E Is an example of a softkey. The operation of
softkeys is explained in Softkeys, page 24.

xx TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

1
1 Quick Setup
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Before leaving the office
■ In the field
■ Back in the office
■ Rover configuration
■ Base station configuration
1 Quick Setup

1.1 Introduction
The instructions in this chapter are a simplified version of the various
steps found in Chapters 4, 5, and 6 of this manual. The purpose of the
simplified version is to provide quick setup guides with reasonable
default values that can be distributed to field crews to ensure proper
setup of rover or base station receivers.
Data is logged to the TSC1™ datalogger with the Asset Surveyor™
software. For more information on configuration and data collection,
refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.
Note – The steps outlined in this chapter do not include steps required
to collect data using carrier phase information. For instructions on
how to collect high accuracy features, see Chapter 7, Carrier Phase
Data Collection.

2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Quick Setup 1

1.2 Before Leaving the Office

1. Install the GPS Pathfinder® Office software on your office
computer (refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Getting Started
Guide).
2. Using the GPS Pathfinder Office software, prepare any data
files or data dictionaries you require, and transfer them to the
TSC1 datalogger. If you want to update GPS or attribute
information on features stored in a GIS, import the data files
and data dictionary into the GPS Pathfinder Office software and
then transfer them to the TSC1 datalogger. You may also want
to transfer any waypoint and coordinate system files to the
datalogger.
3. Check that you have all the required equipment, and that it is
operational. Set up and connect your GPS system (the appendix
in this manual that discusses your GPS receiver lists the
equipment and shows you how to connect it).
4. If the GPS receiver has an On/Off switch, turn it on (the Series
4000™, GPS Total Station® 4700, GPS Total Station 4800, Site
Surveyor 4400™, and 4600LS™ receivers have an On/Off
switch).
Start the Asset Surveyor software to check that it and the GPS
receiver are communicating correctly. If communication is
established, the GPS status line appears. If communication fails,
an error message appears on the screen.
5. Check all critical settings in the Asset Surveyor software. You
should also check non-critical and display settings, especially if
the system has been used by someone else recently. For more
information on how to configure the Asset Surveyor software,
refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.
6. Turn everything off and pack it into carrying cases if you have
to travel a significant distance to the survey site. Pack spare sets
of batteries if you expect to operate the receiver for any length
of time.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 3

1 Quick Setup

1.3 In the Field

1. Travel to the survey site, remembering to carry all the required
equipment with you.
2. Reassemble the system.
3. If the GPS receiver has an On/Off switch, turn it on. Then start
the Asset Surveyor software if it is not already on.
Wait until the GPS receiver acquires enough satellites to start
computing GPS positions, before beginning to work. The
number of satellites being tracked displays on the status line.
4. Create a new data file, associating the correct data dictionary
with it. Alternatively, reopen an existing data file.
5. Begin collecting data. Collect, review and update all the
features necessary.
6. Close the data file.
7. Disconnect and repack the components of the system.
Remember to turn off the GPS receiver if it has an On/Off
switch. Return to your office.

1.4 Back in the Office

1. Transfer the data files from the TSC1 datalogger to the PC
using the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
2. Use the GPS Pathfinder Office software for differential
correction, plotting, and exporting the data file(s) to a GIS.
3. Recharge the TSC1 datalogger and GPS receiver batteries.

4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Quick Setup 1

1.5 Rover Configuration

Use the following procedure to set up your system in a rover
configuration.
From the Utilities menu, select Factory defaults. This resets the Asset
Surveyor software to its default configuration and then restarts the
datalogger.
Now change some of the configuration settings as follows:

Main menu
1. Configuration
\
Highlight Configuration
then press the key

\
Configuration menu

\
2. GPS rover options Press
3. Logging options Press

Logging options screen

4. Point feature Synchronized with the base station
5. Line/area Synchronized with the base station
6. Not in feature Synchronized with the base station
7. Minimum positions 3
8. Allow GPS update ‘Warn first’

\
9. Warning distance ‘Any’
10. To accept Press

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 5

1 Quick Setup

Position filters screen

11. Position mode ‘Manual 3D’ or ‘Overdet. 3D’
depending on canopy density

\
12. PDOP mask 4 or 6 (depending on receiver)
13. To accept Press

Antenna options screen

14. Height Height to antenna’s phase center
15. Measure ‘Vertical’
16. Type For a list of antenna types, see the
TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide
17. Confirm Select ‘Per feature’, ‘Per file’, or

\
‘Never’
18. To accept Press

GPS rover options menu

19. To return to the
Configuration menu Press =
\
Configuration menu

\
20. Communication options Press
21. Real-time input options Press

6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Quick Setup 1

Real-time input options screen

\
22. RTCM age limit 5 or 10 (depending on your radio)
23. To accept Press
24. To return to the
Configuration menu Press =
Configuration menu
25. To exit the
Configuration menu Press =
1.5.1 Data Collection
Use the following procedure to set up your system for rover data
collection.

\
Main menu
1. Select Data collection and press

Data collection menu

2. Create a data file
\
Select Create new file:
Press and then press \
\
-or- -or-
Open an existing Select Open existing file.

\
data file Press

y
Select an existing file to append

=
to or update, and press
3. To exit Data collection Press and press to
confirm exit

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 7

1 Quick Setup

1.6 Base Station Configuration

Use the following procedure to set up your system in a base station
configuration.

Main menu
1. Configuration
\
Highlight Configuration
then press the key

Configuration menu
2. GPS base station
\
\
options Press
3. Logging options Press

Logging options screen

4. Measurements One to five seconds (depending

\
on rover interval and free space)
5. To accept Press
6. To return to the
Configuration menu Press =
Configuration menu
7. To exit the
Configuration menu Press =

8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Quick Setup 1

1.6.1 Base Station Data Collection

Use the following procedure to set up your system for base station
data collection.

\
Main menu
1. Data collection Press

\
Data collection menu
2. Create base file Press

\
Create File screen
3. Create file Press

Antenna options screen

4. Height Height to antenna’s phase center
5. Measure ‘Vertical’
6. Type For a list of antenna types, see the
TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User

\
Guide
7. To accept Press

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 9

1 Quick Setup

Reference Position screen

8.
\
Enter reference position Type lat/lon (or north/east) and

w\
altitude, and press
-or- -or-
Use an existing Press , select the waypoint
waypoint and press

h \
-or- -or-
Use an approximate
position Press and press
-or- -or-

\
Leave as is and set in
the GPS Pathfinder
Office software Press

Base Station screen

9. To exit Base station Press \ and press
confirm exit.
y to

10 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

2
2 Introduction to the Asset
Surveyor Software
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ The Asset Surveyor software
■ System components
2 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software

2.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces you to the Asset Surveyor software.

2.2 The Asset Surveyor Software

The Asset Surveyor software is designed for fast and accurate
geographic data collection and maintenance. It software operates on
the TSC1 datalogger and acts as the controlling software. It
communicates with the GPS receiver to set specific GPS parameters
required for optimal accuracy, and to record GPS positions to store on
the TSC1 datalogger. User-definable settings, such as PDOP mask, are
easy to configure and are immediately communicated to the receiver.
The Asset Surveyor software displays a status line at the bottom of the
screen so that you can check the current GPS status to make sure you
are working under conditions that enable optimal accuracy. The status
line displays the number of satellites being tracked, and the PDOP. If
the PDOP ever goes above the mask or there are too few satellites, a
message flashes on the status line. A warning tone is also sounded
when these conditions occur and a different (success) tone is sounded
when GPS logging resumes.
The Asset Surveyor software is easy to use, so you can focus on the
information you want to collect in the field. The following introduces
you to the main functions of the Asset Surveyor software:
• Data collection – using a data dictionary created in the GPS
Pathfinder Office software, the Asset Surveyor software
improves the speed and accuracy with which you can collect
GPS and GIS information in the field. For each type of job, you
can transfer a different custom-made data dictionary into the
datalogger. When a data file is open, the Asset Surveyor
software uses the chosen data dictionary to prompt you for
attribute information.

12 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software 2

• Data update – the Asset Surveyor software also lets you make
changes to features you have already logged during data
collection. You can review and update existing features in a new
or existing rover file, or in a file of features imported from a
GIS. You can also add new features to the file.
• External sensor interface – use this to record and store input
from other sensors, such as echo sounders.
• Navigation – use to view distance and bearing to known
coordinates; used in conjunction with waypoints or existing
features so you can update their position or attributes.
• Waypoints – use to store points by name so you can navigate to
them.
• Map – use the map display to graphically display your GPS
position, features, waypoints, and a background, and to show
your navigation path.
• Multiple coordinate systems – you can use both latitude,
longitude, and height (above Mean Sea Level or above
ellipsoid) and northing, easting, and elevation (for example
UTM or U.S. State Plane coordinates are supported).
• Languages – the Asset Surveyor software can be operated in
different languages. The currently available languages are
English, French, German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 13

2 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software

You can access all of the Asset Surveyor software functions from the
Main menu. They are accessed through the following menu entries:
• Data collection
• File manager
• Configuration
• Utilities
• Navigation
• Map
• Receiver status
• Satellite information
When you are collecting data with the Asset Surveyor software, the
two menu options you use most are Data collection and
Configuration. The Data collection menu lets you create and update
data files and enter or change attributes. The Configuration menu lets
you configure the GPS receiver to log only positions that meet your
requirements.
The File manager menu provides access to a number of options for
managing your data files, including the transfer of files between the
TSC1 datalogger and your office computer.
The Utilities menu contains useful miscellaneous operations,
including support for creating, deleting, and editing waypoints, and
measuring between waypoints.
The Navigation menu provides two useful modes for navigating to a
waypoint or feature: the Road and the Direction Dial. The Map menu
provides a graphical map to help you navigate and update data.
The Receiver status and Satellite information menus provide access to
important GPS information such as the details of the satellites being
tracked by your GPS receiver.
For more information about these features and other options available
in the Asset Surveyor software, refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor
Software User Guide.

14 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software 2

2.3 System Components

The Asset Surveyor software combines GPS mapping instrumentation
with graphical geographic data logging and export software. It lets you
record precise position and attribute information in digital form, with a
range of GPS receivers, which you can import into the GIS or CAD
system of your choice using the GPS Pathfinder Office software. In
this way, you can quickly inventory resources.

2.3.1 GPS Receiver

The GPS receiver provides precise GPS positions for point, line, and
area features collected by the Asset Surveyor software. A GPS
receiver consists of a receiver, antenna, batteries, and cables.
The GPS receiver uses information from four or more GPS satellites
to calculate an accurate 3D position. The accuracy of the position can
vary from 2 to 5 meters to submeter and centimeter, depending on the
GPS receiver being used.
The following Trimble GPS receivers can be used with the Asset
Surveyor software on the TSC1 datalogger:
• GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
• GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
• GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
• Series 4000
• Site Surveyor 4400
• GPS Total Station 4700
• GPS Total Station 4800
• 4600LS Surveyor

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 15

2 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software

For each GPS receiver, the required equipment varies. Each GPS
system can be augmented with a number of accessories. The
appendixes detail the equipment used in each system and any optional
accessories. They also show you how to connect the GPS receiver to
the TSC1 datalogger for operation in the field.

2.3.2 The GPS Pathfinder Office Software

The GPS Pathfinder Office software runs under the following
Microsoft operating systems:
• Windows 95
• Windows 98
• Windows 2000
• Windows NT
It provides all of the tools you need for managing a data collection or
maintenance project.
The GPS Pathfinder Office software lets you:
• plan the best times to collect GPS positions, using the Quick
Plan™ mission planning utility
• create separate projects, which lets you manage the data
associated with these projects effectively and conveniently
• construct and edit data dictionaries, which can be used to
control the data collection operation and make sure that the
collected data is complete, accurate, and compatible with your
GIS, CAD package, or database
• import data from a GIS, CAD, or database format, creating data
files that you can transfer to a datalogger and update in the field
• transfer files to and from GPS receivers and handheld
dataloggers
• process the GPS positional data to improve its accuracy

16 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software 2

• display and edit collected data in the office, optionally

overlaying this data onto a vector or raster background map
• export the collected, processed, and edited data to a GIS, CAD,
or database format
• produce a scaled plot as a paper record of the data
The Asset Surveyor software version 5.20 needs version 2.80 or later
of the GPS Pathfinder Office software to make best use of the data
collected in the field. The GPS Pathfinder Office software is used to
transfer GPS data to a PC, and then differentially correct, view, and
edit the data. The software also exports the data in a format suitable
for your GIS or CAD system.
For more information on the GPS Pathfinder Office software, refer to
the GPS Pathfinder Office documentation.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 17

2 Introduction to the Asset Surveyor Software

18 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

3
3 Introduction to the TSC1
Datalogger
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ What is the TSC1?
■ Turning the TSC1 datalogger on and off
■ Screen
■ Memory
■ Rebooting
■ Data capacity
■ Operating temperature and humidity ranges
■ Power sources
■ Ports
■ Servicing
3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains hardware specifications and gives instructions
on operating, storing, and maintaining the TSC1 datalogger.

3.2 What is the TSC1?

The Trimble System Controller (TSC1) is a powerful handheld field
computer with a full alpha-numeric keyboard, a 200 x 240 pixel liquid
crystal display (LCD) and two serial communications ports. The TSC1
datalogger contains a proprietary processor based on the Motorola
CPU32 core, capable of executing up to 20 MHz. It also has a built-in
real-time clock, which is maintained when the unit is powered down.
The TSC1 datalogger has 2 MB of DRAM (working memory) and
2 MB of flash disk memory for data storage, capable of storing about
35,000 GPS positions. A portion of the flash disk memory is allocated
to program space, and this is where the Asset Surveyor program files,
language files, and help files reside.
This chapter describes the features and operation of the TSC1
datalogger using the Asset Surveyor software. For a detailed
description of how to use the TSC1 datalogger with the Asset
Surveyor software, refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide.
Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.2 show different views of the TSC1
datalogger. Use them to become familiar with the terms used in this
manual.

20 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

PC card

Function keys

Multi-directional arrow key

Backspace key Second function key

Space key Caps lock key

On/Off key Help key

To receiver
Power/data cable

Figure 3.1 Front view of the TSC1 datalogger

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 21

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

Top port
PC card
cover release
button

Battery cover

Battery cover screw

Bottom port

Power/data cable

Figure 3.2 Back view of the TSC1 datalogger

22 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

3.3 Turning the TSC1 Datalogger On and Off

To turn on the TSC1 datalogger, make sure that power is supplied (see
|
|
Power Sources, page 30). Then press the green on/off key marked .

|
To turn off the TSC1 datalogger, hold down for one second.
For the location of the key and other keys on the TSC1 keypad,
see Figure 3.1.

Hard Keys
1
3.3.1

a\() =
Hard keys are the physical keys on the TSC1 keypad, such as
, , , , and
different screens.
,
. Use these keys to enter data and to access

3.3.2 Alternate Keys

Alternate keys give some hard keys a second function. Some of the

lettering. To use a second function, press the

press the alternate hard key.
[
second functions are displayed on the hard keys in small yellow
hard key and then

Table 3.1 shows some of the functions that you can access using
alternate keys.
Table 3.1 Useful second functions

[)
Keys Function

[_
Page down

[*
Page up

[(
Home

[N
End

Previous screen

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 23

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

Table 3.1 Useful second functions (Continued)

[e
Keys Function

[f
Contrast up

Contrast down

3.3.3 Softkeys

!@#$%
Softkeys are displayed on the bottom line of the TSC1 screen. A

p
softkey corresponds to the adjacent hard key: , , , , .

to activate the !
Press the hard key to activate the softkey on the screen. For example,
softkey, press . See Figure 3.3.

! @ # $ %

s
Figure 3.3 How function keys correspond to softkeys

Softkeys relate to particular forms or fields and only appear when

these forms or fields are accessed. For example, the softkey only
appears when a line feature is opened for data collection, as this
functionality applies to line features only.

24 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

Menu Key
M
3.3.4

this key in conjunction with the

Surveyor screens quickly.
N
To return to the Main menu at any time, press the hard key. Use
key to move around the Asset

Next Key
N
3.3.5

To simplify the task of moving around menus, the hard key offers
quick access to open screens (windows).

Help Key
?
3.3.6

Press the hard key at any time to obtain further information about

module, press =
a topic. When you press it, the Help menu appears. To exit the Help
from the Help menu.

3.4 Screen
The TSC1 datalogger has an LCD screen. This screen responds to
heat, and prolonged exposure to full sunlight can cause it to darken. If
this happens, turn the screen away from direct sunlight until it returns
to normal.

C Warning – Repeated exposure to direct sunlight can cause the screen to

degrade.

Contrast
[e
3.4.1

[f
To increase the screen contrast, press .
To decrease the screen contrast, press .

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 25

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

Backlight
[l
3.4.2

To switch the screen backlight between on and off, press .

3.4.3 Disconnecting from the Receiver

To disconnect the TSC1 datalogger from the receiver, close any file
that is open and turn off the TSC1 datalogger. You can then disconnect
the TSC1.
If you accidentally disconnect the TSC1 while collecting data, simply
reconnect and, when the receiver has acquired enough satellites to
compute GPS positions again, continue collecting data.

3.5 Memory
The TSC1 datalogger has 2 MB of internal memory for data storage.
While some dataloggers use battery-backed static memory, the TSC1
datalogger uses flash memory. With flash memory, you do not need a
backup battery to preserve data when the system is turned off. Since
backup battery failure is a common cause of data loss, this means that
the TSC1 datalogger provides exceptionally secure data storage.
You can supplement the internal flash memory by using PC cards,
which are inserted in the side of the datalogger. PC cards are available
in various sizes. Trimble supplies 16 MB PC cards.

26 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

3.5.1 Choosing a PC Card

Only Type I or Type II ATA format PC cards are supported by the
TSC1 datalogger at present. Trimble supplies a 16 MB card (part
number 33050-16).
In addition to the cards supplied by Trimble, PC cards from the
following manufacturers have been tested successfully in the TSC1
datalogger:
• Epson
• IBM
• SanDisk
• Viking

3.6 Rebooting
If the Asset Surveyor software fails to respond to any keystrokes, you
may have to reboot the system. To do this, turn off the TSC1

|
datalogger and turn it back on again. If this does not work, hold down
for five seconds, then release it. Press it again to turn on the TSC1
datalogger. If this does not work, perform a warm boot.
Note – If the software fails to respond to keystrokes, check that the
TSC1 datalogger is receiving power.

3.6.1 Warm Boot

A warm boot shuts down the hardware and restarts the Asset Surveyor
software. It also resets the software to the factory default settings.
If you ever have to perform a warm boot, transmit any data from the
TSC1 datalogger to your PC as soon as possible, to safeguard against
further problems, and to avoid any possibility of data loss.
Note – You do not lose data when you perform a warm boot, but you
do lose all your configuration settings.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 27

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

To perform a warm boot:

1. Make sure that the TSC1 datalogger is off, using a five-second

B |
power down if necessary.
2. While holding down the key, press and release the key.
This powers on the TSC1 datalogger.
The TSC1 datalogger should restart after a few seconds and the
Asset Surveyor software should run.
If the warm boot fails, perform a cold boot.

3.6.2 Cold Boot

A cold boot erases the internal memory and restarts the Asset
Surveyor software. It does not affect the PC card.

C Warning – All data in the TSC1 datalogger's memory, including any data
dictionaries and extra coordinate system files you have downloaded onto
the TSC1 datalogger, is lost after a cold boot. Only perform a cold boot if a
warm boot has previously failed, or if you know that the TSC1 has no data
in its memory.

To perform a cold boot:

1. Make sure that the TSC1 datalogger is off, using a five-second

[ %
power down if necessary.

|
2. Hold down and together.
3. While holding them down, press and release the key (which
turns on the TSC1 datalogger).
4. When the following message appears on the screen:

[ %
Force Reformat Internal Media
release and . After a few minutes, the Asset Surveyor
software starts.

28 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

3.7 Data Capacity

The TSC1 datalogger is supplied with 2 MB of internal memory for
data storage, which in most cases provides enough capacity for your
data logging requirements. Table 3.2 provides estimates of the data
logging capacities of the TSC1 datalogger under various data
collection scenarios. Although the TSC1 can hold a large volume of
data, Trimble recommends that you transfer data files to your office
PC daily.
Table 3.2 Data capacities for rover and base files

File type Logging interval Carrier logging Logging time

Rover 1 second On 2 - 2.5 hours
1 second Off 6 hours
5 seconds On 10 hours
5 seconds Off 30 hours
Base 5 seconds 14 hours
15 seconds 35 hours

Note – For the highest accuracy of differentially corrected positions,

Trimble recommends that the rover position interval be set to a
multiple of the base station interval.

B Tip – If you must log data for longer periods, you can increase the GPS
logging intervals.

If you require more memory for data storage than is available in the
TSC1 datalogger’s internal memory, use a PC card.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 29

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

3.8 Physical Specifications

Table 3.3 lists the specifications of the TSC1 datalogger.
Table 3.3 TSC1 physical specifications

Property Specification
Size 266 mm x 116 mm x 42 mm
(10.5 in x 4.6 in x 1.65 in)
Weight 844 gms (1.86 lbs)
Power <1 W
Operating temperature from –20°C to +65°C (–4°F to 150°F)
Storage temperature from –30°C to +80°C (–22°F to +176°F)
Humidity 95 % non-condensing
Casing UV-resistant plastic, resistant to wind-driven
rain and dust
Memory 2 MB internal flash memory
Communications 2 x RS232 serial ports
Display 240 x 200 Graphics LCD display with
backlight

3.9 Power Sources

The TSC1 datalogger is supplied with a Lithium-ion battery (part
number 29518). This is a 7.4 V 1.2 AH rechargeable battery.

C Warning – Only use Trimble-approved batteries in the TSC1 internal

battery compartment. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.

The receiver, or another external power source, provides the power for
the TSC1 datalogger, except when the TSC1 is running off its internal
battery.

30 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

3.9.1 Battery Status

The status line displays the status of the TSC1 battery and of any
external power source (usually a receiver), depending on the source
currently being used. For a list of items that appear in the status line,
refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.
You can also view the power status by selecting Configuration /
Hardware (TSC1). The Internal battery and External battery fields
show how much power remains, and indicate whether the source being
used by the TSC1 datalogger is internal or external.
The values for the Internal battery and External battery fields are
expressed as percentages, and are calculated by comparing the
reported voltage against the possible range for the power source in
question.
For example, the percentage displayed for the External battery field is
computed by comparing the reported voltage against the possible
voltage range (vmin to vmax) for camcorder batteries, as follows:
External battery % = (voltage – vmin) / (vmax – vmin) × 100
The percentage displayed for the Internal battery field is computed by
comparing the reported voltage against the possible range for the
lithium-ion battery, as follows:
Internal battery % = (voltage – vmin) / (vmax – vmin) × 100
Note – The percentage reported for new batteries may be less than
100%. The calculation of the battery percentage assumes a range
typical of a new battery, so used batteries may report percentages well
under 100%. This is because repeated recharging of batteries
normally results in a reduced potential maximum voltage.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 31

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

3.9.2 Low Battery Warnings

When the Asset Surveyor software detects that the internal battery
voltage is low, the following message appears:
The internal battery is low
This usually occurs when the voltage level has dropped to about 10%.
You can continue to use the TSC1 datalogger for a short period, but
replace or recharge the battery as soon as possible.
When the Asset Surveyor software detects that the main battery
voltage is so low that it cannot function, the following message
appears:
Internal battery is dead
The TSC1 datalogger shuts down. You must then replace or recharge
the battery.
Note – When the internal battery can no longer function, no data is
lost, as data in the TSC1 datalogger is stored in the flash memory.

3.9.3 Recharging the TSC1 Battery

You can recharge the datalogger’s lithium-ion battery in one of two
ways:
• using a Trimble Support Module (TSM™) power supply
• using a low voltage power supply (such as a camcorder battery)

32 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

Using a Trimble Support Module (TSM)

To charge the TSC1 battery using a TSM, connect the TSC1
datalogger to a TSM as shown in Figure 3.4.

1
4

1 P/N 38246-00 Trimble Support Module (TSM)

2 P/N 14284 TSM extension cable
3 P/N 32287-00 TSC1 data/power cable
4 TSC1 datalogger

Figure 3.4 Cabling for charging a TSC1 battery using a TSM

1. Plug the TSM into the wall current (mains),

2. Connect the TSM to the extension cable (P/N 14284). Attach
this to the TSC1 data/power cable (P/N 32287-00). This cable
connects to either the top or bottom port of the TSC1
datalogger.
The battery recharges fully in approximately three hours.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 33

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

Using a low voltage power supply

You can recharge the TSC1 battery using a power source of less than
15 V.
1. Connect the TSC1 datalogger to a GPS receiver with an
external power source, or directly to a camcorder battery.
2. Open Configuration / Hardware (TSC1) and set the Low voltage
charging field to ‘On’.
3. The TSC1 battery will charge off the external power source
until it reaches maximum capacity.

3.9.4 Alternative Power Sources

If it can, the TSC1 datalogger draws power from the GPS receiver’s
power source. This is used in preference to the lithium-ion battery.

3.10 Ports
The TSC1 datalogger has two data/power ports. One port is at the
bottom of the unit, the other is at the top on the back. Both ports
function in the same way. Figure 3.2 on page 22 shows where these
ports are located on the TSC1 datalogger.
The Asset Surveyor software automatically detects which port is
connected to an external device. Whichever port is connected first is
the one that is used.

34 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger 3

3.11 Servicing
The TSC1 datalogger does not need to be serviced. To clean the TSC1
datalogger, use a soft cloth moistened with water and a mild soap.
If your TSC1 datalogger develops a fault, transfer any data to your PC
and reset the TSC1 with a cold boot as described on page 28. If you
cannot transfer the data, do not perform a cold boot. Contact your
local dealer for advice.
Contact your dealer for repairs, replacement parts, service
information, and technical assistance. If you need more help, see the
section on Technical Assistance in the beginning of this manual. You
can also contact Trimble at the address listed inside the front cover.
Note – Other Trimble software (such as the Trimble Survey
Controller™ software) can also be installed on a TSC1 datalogger.
Please see your Trimble dealer for details.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 35

3 Introduction to the TSC1 Datalogger

36 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

4
4 Before Leaving the Office
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Planning
■ Projects
■ Data dictionaries
■ Waypoints
■ Coordinate systems
■ Data files
■ Data transfer
■ Configuring the system
■ GPS hardware check list
■ Getting base station data
4 Before Leaving the Office

4.1 Introduction
This chapter explains what to do before you take the Asset Surveyor
software out into the field.

4.2 Planning
Obtaining the desired accuracy requires good planning. The Quick
Plan software lets you plan the best times to collect GPS data. The
following information is useful when planning for data collection:
• The number of visible satellites
• Where the satellites travel
• The PDOP (Position Dilution of Precision)
The more satellites that are visible, the better. PDOP provides an
indication of the expected accuracy of your GPS positions based on
the relative positions of the satellites. Lower PDOP values provide
more accurate data.

38 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

The Quick Plan software provides many different graphical

representations of satellite availability and PDOP:

These help you check whether there are any times of the day when
there are insufficient satellites, or the PDOP is too high. For
instructions on using the Quick Plan software, refer to the Quick Plan
documentation.
You need at least four satellites and a low PDOP for a 3D position. If
you are operating in Overdetermined mode, you need five or more
satellites.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 39

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.2.1 Updating the Almanac

The almanac is a set of data that is used to predict satellite orbits over
a moderately long period of time (about a month).
To produce reasonably accurate results, Quick Plan requires an
almanac that is less than a month old. Therefore, it is important to
obtain a current almanac (if your computer does not have one) before
using Quick Plan.
Trimble Series 4000™ and Trimble GPS Pathfinder receivers all
acquire the current almanac from satellites during regular operations,
and maintain it in memory. You can copy the almanac from a Series
4000 receiver to your computer by importing the ephemeris and
storing it in an .eph file. You can import the almanac from a GPS
Pathfinder receiver to an .ssf file.
For instructions on how to transfer an almanac file to your PC, refer to
the Quick Plan documentation.

4.3 Projects
With the GPS Pathfinder Office software, you can organize your work
into projects. Dividing your work into projects assists you with file
management; you can set up projects for different groups of data. For
example, if you are a consultant or contractor, you could create a
project for each client, each major task, each city you work in, or each
month.
When you create a project, the GPS Pathfinder Office software asks
you to enter information about the project, including the name and
folder path. The project folder path tells the GPS Pathfinder Office
software where to find and store data files belonging to the project.
The GPS Pathfinder Office software lets you specify three folders for
storing files for different purposes (backup, export, and base files).

40 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

4.3.1 Creating a Project

Start the GPS Pathfinder Office software. The GPS Pathfinder Office
application window appears with the Select Project dialog open:

The folder structure is flexible. The folders you specify are only
defaults; you can change them and store your data elsewhere if you
want. The folders for backup, export and base files do not have to be
folders of the project folder. They can be a shared folder on a network
so that all users can access their files, or they can be in the project
folder itself.
For more information about creating a project, refer to the GPS
Pathfinder Office documentation.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 41

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.4 Data Dictionaries

A data dictionary is a description of the features and attributes relevant
to a particular project or job. It is used in the field to control the
collection of features (objects) and attributes (information about those
objects). A data dictionary includes a list of features that are collected
in the field, and for each feature, a list of attributes that describe that
feature. A data dictionary structures data collection. It does not
contain the actual information collected in the field (positions and
actual attribute values for each occurrence of a feature).
Understanding how to put together a data dictionary is very important.
Design your data dictionary with your GIS in mind. In particular, be
familiar with any format restrictions imposed by the GIS, otherwise
you may not be able to import the data you collect. Constructing a
haphazard data dictionary can greatly increase the amount of time and
work required to enter the data you collect into a GIS or database.
Data dictionaries are project independent. The GPS Pathfinder Office
software does not automatically store the data dictionary (.ddf) files in
the project folder. You may want to create a folder specifically for data
dictionary files. For more information on the creation of data
dictionaries, see the Data Dictionary Editor documentation, or the
Mapping Systems General Reference.

42 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

To start the Data Dictionary Editor utility, select Utilities / Data

Dictionary Editor from the GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar. The Data
Dictionary Editor dialog appears, letting you create a new data
dictionary. The following screen snap is an example of features and
attributes that can be created for your data dictionary:

Once you have finished designing your data dictionary you can
transfer it to the TSC1 datalogger. For more information on how to
transfer your data dictionary to the TSC1 datalogger, see Data
Transfer, page 49.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 43

tutmain.bmp
4 Before Leaving the Office

4.5 Waypoints
A waypoint is a three-dimensional point which can be given a name
and a location, either prior to field work or in the field. Waypoints are
useful for navigation purposes and can be used as references for sites.
This makes returning to the same site possible at a later date.
Waypoints can be created using the Waypoint Manager utility in the
GPS Pathfinder Office software and are stored as .wpt files. Like data
dictionaries, waypoints are project independent, and are not stored
automatically in the project folders. You may want to create a folder
specifically for waypoint files. For more information on creating
waypoints, see the GPS Pathfinder Office documentation.
For more information on how to transfer waypoint files to the TSC1
datalogger, see Data Transfer, page 49.

4.6 Coordinate Systems

Coordinate systems are three-dimensional reference frames used to
describe the location of objects in space. Trimble’s GPS receivers
provide you with your position in relation to the coordinate system
you have configured. Coordinate systems for use with the Asset
Surveyor software can be created using the Coordinate System
Manager™ utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software and
transferred to the TSC1 datalogger.
For more information on how to transfer coordinate system files to the
TSC1 datalogger, see Data Transfer, page 49.

44 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

4.7 Data Files

As well as logging new features, the Asset Surveyor software can
update features you have already collected in previous sessions. You
can open an existing data file and add new features to it, or update
features already logged to the file. The Data collection module of the
Asset Surveyor software shows you which features you have updated
and which you have yet to visit. You can select a feature you have
already logged and navigate to that feature to check its condition and
attributes, and optionally re-record its GPS position.
You can review or update data files which have been:
• created on your TSC1 datalogger but not yet transferred from
the datalogger to the GPS Pathfinder Office software
• transferred from the GPS Pathfinder Office software back to the
datalogger
• imported from a GIS into the GPS Pathfinder Office software
and then transferred to the datalogger
You can transfer any data (.ssf) file to the TSC1 datalogger from the
GPS Pathfinder Office software, before or after differentially
correcting the file. For more information on transferring data files
from the GPS Pathfinder Office software to the TSC1 datalogger, see
Data Transfer, page 49.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 45

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.7.1 Importing Data from a GIS

Keeping information up to date is an important aspect of maintaining a
GIS. With the Export utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software,
you can add new features to your GIS. However, to update features
you have already transferred to the GIS, you need to import them from
the GIS back into the GPS Pathfinder Office software, then transfer
the resulting data (.ssf) files to the TSC1 datalogger.
You can import data in the following GIS formats:
• ArcView Shapefile
• dBASE
• MapInfo MIF
• Microsoft Access MDB
Even if your GIS does not use any of these formats, it may be able to
export data in one of the formats.

46 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

To ensure that the data you export from the GIS can be used easily in
the Asset Surveyor software, Trimble recommends that you import
data as follows:
1. Import the data dictionary from the GIS to the GPS Pathfinder
Office software:
a. Select Utilities / Import from the GPS Pathfinder Office
menu bar.
The following dialog appears:

b. In the Input Files group, click Browse, locate the GIS,

select all the data files you want to import the data
dictionary from, and click Open.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 47

4 Before Leaving the Office

c. From the Choose an Import Setup group, select the option

that corresponds to the GIS file format.
d. Click Properties. The Import Setup Properties dialog
appears.
e. Make sure that the Data tab is selected, and in the Type of
Data to Import group, select the Data Dictionary File Only
option.
f. Click OK to close the Import Setup Properties dialog.
g. Click the second Browse button, select a name and
location for the imported data dictionary, and click Save.
h. Click OK in the Import Utility dialog to import the data
dictionary.
2. In the Data Dictionary Editor utility in the GPS Pathfinder
Office software, review the data dictionary, making changes
where necessary.
You may want to make data entry mandatory on some
attributes, or make other attributes protected to prevent
accidental editing or deletion of important information.
3. Import the features from the GIS, validating them against the
data dictionary you have already imported. Do the following:
a. Select Utilities / Import from the GPS Pathfinder Office
menu bar.
b. In the Input Files group, click Browse, locate the GIS,
select all the data files you want to import features from,
and click Open.
c. In the Choose an Import Setup group, make sure the option
that corresponds to the GIS file format is selected.
d. Click Properties. The Import Setup Properties dialog
appears.

48 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

e. Make sure that the Data tab is selected, and in the Type of
Data to Import group, select the Features with External
Data Dictionary option.
f. Click Dictionary File, browse for the Data Dictionary file
you imported in step 1, and click Open.
g. Click OK to close the Import Setup Properties dialog.
h. Click the second Browse button, select a name and
location for the imported data file, and click Save.
i. Click OK in the Import Utility dialog to import the data
file.
4. Transfer the .ssf data file to the TSC1 datalogger. For more
information, see Data Transfer, page 49.

4.8 Data Transfer

Once you have created data dictionaries, waypoints, or coordinate
systems on your office PC, or imported data from an existing GIS into
the GPS Pathfinder Office software, you need to transfer this
information to the TSC1 datalogger.
The Data Transfer utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software
provides all the functionality you require to efficiently transfer data
between the TSC1 datalogger and your office PC.

B Tip – Transferring large data files to a PC card connected directly to your

computer is faster than transferring them to the TSC1 datalogger.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 49

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.8.1 Connecting the TSC1 Datalogger

A TSC1 datalogger can be connected to the PC for data transfer using
the data download cable for a direct connection.
If the battery charger is not connected to the cable, the TSC1
datalogger’s internal batteries power the transfer process between the
TSC1 datalogger and the PC.
To connect the TSC1 datalogger to the PC:
1. Connect one end of the TSC1 data cable (PN 32287-00) to the
null modem cable (PN 18532) and the other end to the TSC1
datalogger.
2. Connect the null modem cable to the serial port on the PC, as
shown in Figure 4.1.

Figure 4.1 Connecting the TSC1 datalogger to the PC

50 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

4.8.2 Transferring Files to the TSC1 Datalogger

Some of the files that you have stored on your PC may need to be
transferred to your TSC1 datalogger.
To transfer files to the TSC1 datalogger:
1. Select File manager from the Asset Surveyor Main menu, then
select File transfer. The Asset Surveyor software is now ready
to transfer data files.
2. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software on your office computer,
select Utilities / Data Transfer.
The following dialog appears:

3. From the Device list, select the device name that represents the
TSC1 datalogger.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 51

4 Before Leaving the Office

You can use one of the predefined names (GIS Datalogger on

COM 1 or GIS Datalogger on COM 2, depending on which
serial (COM) port the support module is connected to) or you
can set up a new device definition.
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the
datalogger.
4. In the Send tab, click Add.
The Open dialog appears.
5. In the Files of type field, select the format of the files that you
want to send. For example, select Data Dictionary (*.ddf) to
send Data Dictionary files.
6. In the list of files, highlight the file or files you want to transfer
and click Select.
The Open dialog disappears, and the files you selected appear in
the Files to Send list.
7. If necessary, repeat Step 4 through Step 6 to select other files to
send.
8. Click Transfer All.
The selected files are transferred to the Asset Surveyor
software.
9. A message showing summary information about the transfer
appears. Click Close.
10. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.

52 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

4.9 Configuring the System

Before you take your TSC1 datalogger out into the field and use it to
collect data, you need to check the critical configuration settings in the
Asset Surveyor software.
The Asset Surveyor software can be configured in a large number of
ways. The configuration settings are divided into three classes:
• Critical settings: A configuration setting is considered critical
if it affects the quality and usability of GPS positions logged by
the Asset Surveyor software. It is crucial that you check all
critical settings before collecting data or navigating with the
Asset Surveyor software.
• Non-critical settings: Settings that affect the behavior of the
Asset Surveyor software but do not have a potentially negative
impact on GPS positions are termed non-critical. You should
still check each non-critical setting before collecting data or
navigating with the Asset Surveyor software, but if you do not
do so, it does not affect the quality of GPS positions logged.
• Display settings: Many settings have no impact on the data that
is collected, but merely alter the way data is displayed. You do
not need to change any display settings unless you want data
displayed in a way that differs from the Asset Surveyor
software’s default settings.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 53

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.9.1 Critical Settings

The critical configuration settings are listed in Table 4.1. For each
setting, the default (and suggested) value is indicated. For a detailed
description of each setting, refer to the chapter on configuration in the
TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.
All critical settings can be checked or changed by selecting GPS rover
options or GPS base station options from the Configuration menu.
The Configuration menu is accessed from the Main menu.
Table 4.1 Critical configuration settings

Setting Default value Configuration menu entry

Logging intervals (rover) GPS rover options / Logging options
Point feature 5 seconds
Line and area features 5 seconds
Not in feature None
Velocity None
Logging intervals (base) GPS base station options / Logging
Measurements 5 seconds options

Minimum positions (point feature) 3 GPS rover options / Logging options

Position mode (rover) Manual 3D GPS rover options / Position filters
Elevation mask (rover) 15° GPS rover options / Position filters
SNR mask (rover) 6.0 GPS rover options / Position filters
PDOP mask and switch (rover) 6.0 GPS rover options / Position filters
Position mode (base) Manual 3D GPS base station options / Position filters
Elevation mask (base) 10° GPS base station options / Position filters
SNR mask (base) 4.0 GPS base station options / Position filters
PDOP mask and switch (base) 8.0 GPS base station options/ Position filters

54 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

The settings listed in Table 4.1 are critical for the following reasons:
• If a Logging interval is set incorrectly, the Asset Surveyor
software does not log data as often as you require, and may
possibly not log certain data at all.
• If the Minimum positions setting is incorrect, you may not log
sufficient GPS positions for point features to achieve your
desired level of accuracy.
• If the Position mode setting is incorrect, the Asset Surveyor
software may log 2D positions (which are generally much less
accurate than 3D positions) when 3D positions are required. If it
is necessary to log only overdetermined positions (5 or more
satellites) to achieve a desired level of accuracy, then use
Overdetermined 3D mode.
• If the Elevation mask is set too low, your GPS rover may use
satellites which are not visible to, or usable by, the base station.
This may make it impossible to differentially correct the data
you have logged.
• If the SNR mask is set too low, your GPS rover may log
positions that are inaccurate due to low signal quality.
• If the PDOP mask is set too high, your GPS rover may log
inaccurate positions due to poor satellite geometry.
For more information about each critical setting, refer to the TSC1
Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.

B Tip – When using a Pro XL™, Pro XR™, Pro XRS™, 4600LS™, Site
Surveyor 4400™, GPS Total Station® 4700, GPS Total Station 4800, or
Series 4000™ receiver, you can obtain submeter accuracy with a single
position, and can therefore reduce the Minimum positions setting to 1 if
you want to minimize the amount of time spent recording each point
feature.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 55

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.9.2 Non-critical Settings

The non-critical configuration settings are listed in Table 4.2. For each
setting, the default (and suggested) value is indicated.
All non-critical settings can be found under entries in the
Configuration menu. Table 4.2 also indicates under which entry in the
Configuration menu you find the setting. The Configuration menu is
accessed from the Main menu.
Table 4.2 Non-critical configuration settings

Setting Default value Configuration menu entry

Antenna options Integrated GPS rover options
GPS/Beacon, 0.0m GPS base station options
Initial position ? GPS rover options
2D altitude ? GPS rover options
Carrier phase
Minimum time 10 minutes GPS rover options / Logging options
Reference position ? GPS base station options
Dynamics code Land GPS rover options / Logging options
Audible click Yes GPS rover options / Logging options
Log DOP data Yes GPS rover options / Logging options
GPS base station options / Logging options
Log PPRT data Yes GPS rover options / Logging options
Log QA/QC data Yes GPS rover options / Logging options
Allow GPS update Warn first GPS rover options / Logging options
Warning distance Any GPS rover options / Logging options
Apply real-time Auto GPS rover options / Position filters
RTK mode On GPS rover options / Position filters
Log RTK only Yes GPS rover options / Positions filters
Real-time input options Custom, 9600, 8, 1, Communications options
N, Any, 20s

56 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

Table 4.2 Non-critical configuration settings (Continued)

Setting Default value Configuration menu entry

Integrated DGPS Beacon, Auto range Communication options / Real-time input
options
RTK protocol CMR Communication options / Real-time input
(roving receiver) options
Real-time output options Off, Custom, 9600, 8, Communication options
1, N
RTK protocol CMR Communication options / Real-time output
(base receiver) options
NMEA/TSIP output None Communications options
options
Time N/A Time and date
Date N/A Time and date
Attributes Default Quickmarks
Confirm No Quickmarks
Offsets Off Constant offset
LCD contrast 30% Hardware (TSC1)
Auto shutoff 20 minutes Hardware (TSC1)
Beep volume High Hardware (TSC1)

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 57

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.9.3 Display Settings

The display configuration settings are listed in Table 4.3. For each
setting, the default (and suggested) value is indicated.
All display settings can be found under one of the entries in the
Configuration menu. Table 4.3 also indicates under which entry in the
Configuration menu you find the setting. The Configuration menu is
on the Main menu.
Table 4.3 Display configuration settings

Setting Default value Configuration menu entry

Coordinate system Latitude/Longitude WGS 1984 Coordinate system
Meters (m)
Coordinate units Meters (m) Coordinate system
Altitude units MSL Coordinate system
Altitude reference DMA 10x10 (Global) Coordinate system
Geiod model Coordinate system
Units
Distance units Meters Units and display
Velocity units Km/Hour Units and display
Angle units Degrees Units and display
Angle format DD.MMSSss Units and display
Order North/East Units and display
(Latitude/Longitude)
North reference True Units and display
Magnetic declination Auto Units and display
Null string ? Units and display
Language English Units and display
24-hour clock No Time and date
Date format MM/DD/YYYY Time and date
Layers Show Map display options
Scale display Show Map display options
Coordinate display Show Map display options

58 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Before Leaving the Office 4

Table 4.3 Display configuration settings (Continued)

Setting Default value Configuration menu entry

Background file None Map display options
Direction dial options
Dial info panels Turn, Heading, Velocity, Time Navigation options
Close-up range (DGPS) 5 meters Navigation options
Close-up range (RTK) 2 meters Navigation options
Close-up style Target-centered Navigation options
Road options
Dial info panels Turn, Heading, Velocity, Time Navigation options
Road scale Normal Navigation options

4.10 GPS Hardware Check List

Before setting out to collect data with the Asset Surveyor software and
your Trimble GPS receiver, check that you have all the necessary GPS
hardware, batteries, cables, and so on. It is very easy to forget a crucial
piece of equipment, and this can be frustrating or costly if you have
driven or flown to a remote site before setting up your system and
discovering the item is missing.
Your GPS receiver’s Operation Manual provides cabling diagrams for
the Trimble GPS systems of which the TSC1 datalogger is a
component.

B Tip – Set up your entire GIS/GPS data collection system and test it, to
make sure that everything is connected correctly, that your batteries are
charged, and that your TSC1 datalogger and GPS receiver are
communicating correctly, before you leave your office. After testing the
system, remember to turn off the GPS receiver and any other equipment
(such as radios) before proceeding to the start point of your survey.
Leaving equipment powered on is likely to waste battery life, especially if it
will be some time before you need to use the equipment.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 59

4 Before Leaving the Office

4.11 Getting Base Station Data

To record high accuracy data you must be able to differentially correct
your data. You need to locate a source of base station data or set up
your own base station. The base station is used to collect base data or
to output RTCM corrections for differentially correcting the positions
of the features that you observe with the roving receiver in the field.
Many organizations and universities operate active community base
stations for differential corrections from which you can obtain data.
However, to achieve C/A code submeter accuracy, the base station
must be another 12-channel Pro XR system, Pro XRS system,
12-channel Pro XL, 4600LS Surveyor, Site Surveyor 4400, GPS Total
Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800, or Trimble Series 4000
receiver.

60 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

5
5 In the Field
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Starting the Asset Surveyor software
■ Using GPS
■ Logging data to a file
■ Updating data
■ Using the map
■ Navigating with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Managing data files
5 In the Field

5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides instructions and examples of collecting and
updating data, navigating and performing other tasks with the Asset
Surveyor software. It provides a general description of each aspect.
For more information, refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide.

5.2 Starting the Asset Surveyor Software

B Tip – As you read this chapter, you may like to follow the description of the
Asset Surveyor software’s capabilities on your TSC1 datalogger. Your
GPS receiver must be connected and operational, although you need not
be outdoors. You may also like to refer to Chapter 5 of the TSC1 Asset
Surveyor Software User Guide for the appropriate details regarding the
configuration of your TSC1 datalogger.

This chapter describes the Asset Surveyor software as it is

preconfigured. If you have re-configured various Asset Surveyor
settings, the software’s behavior may differ from what is described in
the manual.
As described in Chapter 2 of the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide, you normally start the Asset Surveyor software by simply
turning your TSC1 datalogger on. If, when you turn your TSC1
datalogger on, the Asset Surveyor software is not running, follow the
instructions in Chapter 2 of the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide to start the Asset Surveyor software.

62 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

When you first start the Asset Surveyor software, the Main menu
appears on the screen of the TSC1 datalogger:

From this menu, you can choose one of the eight main Asset Surveyor
operations, as shown in the above screen.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 63

5 In the Field

5.3 Using GPS

Once the Asset Surveyor software has started running on your TSC1
datalogger, it is ready to communicate with the GPS receiver and start
collecting data.

5.3.1 Activating GPS

If you connect a supported Trimble GPS receiver to your TSC1
datalogger using the correct cabling and batteries, the Asset Surveyor
software starts to communicate with the GPS receiver immediately
after the TSC1 datalogger is turned on.
If, for some reason, the Asset Surveyor software cannot communicate
with the GPS receiver, it displays the following message:

If this message is displayed, check that:

• the cabling is connected firmly and correctly
• the batteries are connected and charged
•
y
your GPS receiver is turned on (if appropriate)
Then press to the above question.

64 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

If the Asset Surveyor software and the GPS receiver still do not
establish communication, consult your receiver’s Operation Manual
or the appropriate appendix at the back of this manual for cabling and
configuration details specific to the GPS receiver you are trying to use.

The GPS status line

Once communication with a GPS receiver is established, the Asset
Surveyor software beeps and displays the GPS status line. The GPS
status line (just above the line of softkeys) provides you with
up-to-date information regarding the status of the GPS receiver.
Various messages periodically flash on the GPS status line. For
example, if you have your TSC1 datalogger and GPS receiver
operating while you are indoors, the receiver cannot track any
satellites, so the GPS status line flashes the message:

Most messages that appear on the GPS status line inform you of a
condition that is preventing the computing or logging of GPS
positions. When such a condition arises, the Asset Surveyor software
emits a warning beep and starts to flash the appropriate message.
When the condition ceases, the Asset Surveyor software emits a
success beep to indicate that you can proceed with your data collection
session. It also removes the flashing message from the status line.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 65

5 In the Field

5.3.2 Controlling GPS

The Asset Surveyor software acts as a control panel for your Trimble
GPS receiver. Some receivers are even turned on and off by the Asset
Surveyor software. A GPS receiver is controlled primarily by the way
it is configured. The Asset Surveyor software lets you configure the
GPS receiver from the Configuration module. You can select a
number of forms from the GPS rover options menu:

Select Logging options to display the following form. This is where

you set the options for how you want to log the GPS data:

66 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

)
Note – The entire contents of this form do not fit onto the screen at
once. You must move through the form (using ) in order to check all of
the fields in the form.
Once the Asset Surveyor software is communicating with a Trimble
GPS receiver, your interaction with the GPS receiver takes place
through four of the Main menu operations:
• Navigation
• Map
• Receiver status

M
• Satellite information.
Press at any time to display the Main menu.

@
Your current GPS position
To view your current or most recent GPS position, select the Map
entry from the Main menu, then press the softkey. The position
is displayed, as shown below:

When the Asset Surveyor software cannot obtain a current GPS

position from the GPS receiver (for example, due to a high PDOP
value, or insufficient satellites), the title of this form changes to OLD
position, and flashes on and off.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 67

 w
5 In the Field

@
Press to create a waypoint for the current position.
To cycle back to the graphical map mode from the GPS position form,
press . For a description of this mode, refer to Chapter 8 of the
TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.

Current GPS status

If you select the Receiver status entry from the Main menu, the Asset
Surveyor software displays information regarding the status of the
GPS receiver. For example:

Satellite information
If you select the Satellite information entry from the Main menu, the
Asset Surveyor software displays information about the satellites the
receiver is tracking. There are two graphical modes and a text mode.
The software opens the module in the last mode you used or, if you
have not used this module before, opens the Skyplot screen.

68 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

The skyplot is a graphical representation of the position of each

satellite in the GPS receiver’s tracking set:

@
@
Press to switch to the SNR levels screen. This screen shows a bar
graph of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the satellites being tracked.
Press to display the Satellite information form. This form

@
displays five columns of information, and spans as many pages as
required to display information for all satellites in the receiver’s
current tracking set. Press again to return to the skyplot.
For a description of the modes in this module, refer to Chapter 10,
Satellite Information, in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide.

Deactivating GPS
Normally, you do not need to disconnect the GPS receiver; you can
just turn the TSC1 datalogger off when you have finished using it.
However, if you want to use the Asset Surveyor software for a while
without using GPS (for example, to review and edit data) and want to
preserve the GPS receiver’s batteries, you may choose to deactivate
the receiver. You must also disconnect communications with the
receiver before transferring files to or from the PC.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 69

5 In the Field

When you select Disconnect GPS from the Utilities menu, the Asset
Surveyor software ceases communications with the GPS receiver and
shuts down all GPS logging operations. Before doing so, it asks you to
confirm the action:

If you pressy , the Asset Surveyor software closes down its GPS
operations, and the GPS receiver is turned off, if possible.
To reactivate the GPS receiver, select Connect GPS from the Utilities
menu, or select Navigation, Receiver status or Satellite information
from the Main menu.

5.3.3 An Accurate Clock

Each of the GPS satellites contains a number of very precise atomic
clocks. Your GPS receiver uses timing information transmitted by the
satellites to determine its position. Your own GPS receiver can
therefore also serve as a very accurate time source.

70 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

The Asset Surveyor software aligns the internal clock of the

datalogger to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time, which is based
on GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), while you are connected to a GPS
receiver, so it can display the current time to the precise second,
anywhere on earth. When not connected to GPS, the TSC1
datalogger’s clock drifts somewhat, but is still reasonably accurate.
Whenever you next connect to a GPS receiver, the Asset Surveyor
software immediately realigns the TSC1’s clock to UTC time.
To view the local time to GPS accuracy, select the Time and date entry
from the Configuration menu. The Time and date configuration form
appears:

Until you have connected to a GPS receiver and obtained an accurate

time, the Asset Surveyor software simply uses the internal clock of the
TSC1 datalogger. Initially, the Asset Surveyor software does not know
the time zone of the area in which you are operating. When you set the
time and date to within 7½ minutes of the actual local time (some time
zones are only 15 minutes ‘wide’), the Asset Surveyor software
automatically aligns it precisely using GPS time (and the known offset
to UTC time). From this point on, the Asset Surveyor software,
together with your GPS receiver, can serve as the most precise
timepiece you are ever likely to own.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 71

5 In the Field

5.4 Logging Data to a File

The Asset Surveyor software logs GPS positions, offsets, external
sensor data, and attributes for GIS features to data files. You can have
a number of data files on your TSC1 datalogger at once, but you can
only log GPS data to one data file at a time.
Note – You can view a second rover or background file as the
background for the map, but you cannot select or edit any features
from this file.
Data files are classified as rover, base, or background files. A rover
file contains feature and attribute information, together with the GPS,
offset and external sensor data associated with each feature. A base
file contains only GPS base station data. To create base files, select the
Create base file entry from the Data collection menu.
A background file is a data file that you may want to view on the map,
but which you do not want to edit. Importing such a file as a
background file means it is safe from accidental updates.
If you select Data collection from the Main menu, the Asset Surveyor
software displays the Data collection menu:

72 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

You can perform a variety of operations from this menu, including:

• creating a new rover file and opening it for logging of data
• creating a new base station file and opening it to log data
• reopening an existing rover file to log new data, or review and
update existing data
• opening a data file transferred from a geographical information
system (GIS) to review and update existing data, or log new
data
The following section describes how to create a new rover file.

5.4.1 Creating a New Data File

When you select Create new file from the Data collection menu, the
Asset Surveyor software displays the Create new file form:

You can accept the default file name suggested by the Asset Surveyor
software, or type a new name into the Filename field. You can also

t
change the data dictionary that is associated with the data file. If you
have a PC card installed, you can choose whether to store the data file
on the card or on the TSC1 datalogger. Press to switch between
UTC and local time for the default file name.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 73

 \
5 In the Field

Pressing creates the new data file. The Asset Surveyor software
automatically opens this data file for logging.
Note – For information on how to collect carrier phase features, refer
to Chapter 7, Carrier Phase Data Collection.
When you create a new data file, the Asset Surveyor software starts to
log data to this file. It displays a menu of geographic features that can
be recorded; these features are determined by the data dictionary
associated with the data file.
An example of a menu of features is the following:

5.4.2 Collecting New Features

When you select a feature from the Start feature menu, the Asset
Surveyor software starts logging data for the feature. A feature’s data
includes:
• its GPS position(s)
• an optional offset to the GPS position(s)
• its attributes, manually entered using the options provided by
your chosen data dictionary
• any external sensor data recorded for that feature

74 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Provided a GPS receiver is connected and operational, the Asset

Surveyor software records GPS positions automatically for the
feature, as determined by the way in which you have configured the
GPS interface. It starts recording GPS positions when you select the
feature and continues recording positions until you save the feature.
If you have configured and activated an external sensor, external
sensor data is also recorded automatically. External sensor data is
recorded until you save the feature.
If you have configured and activated a laser rangefinder, you can
record an offset for the feature by aiming and firing the rangefinder.
Alternatively, you can measure and enter the offset manually.
By taking care of GPS and external sensor data collection, and by
integrating the recording of an optional offset to each feature, the
Asset Surveyor software lets you concentrate on entering attribute
values for the feature.
Each feature is defined as a point, a line, or an area. The way the data
collection software logs GPS positions for points, lines, and areas
differs. Figure 5.1 shows examples of geographical features.

Points Lines Areas

• Well sites • Streams • Parks
• Power poles • Roads • Wetlands
• Accident sites • Pipelines • Timber stands

Figure 5.1 Examples of geographical features

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 75

5 In the Field

• Point features: You can remain stationary at a point for a

period of time. The Asset Surveyor software records a number
of GPS positions during this time, based on the configured
logging intervals. After differential correction of these GPS
positions, they are averaged together (in the GPS Pathfinder
Office software) to produce an accurate position for the point
feature.
You can also record point features using a technique known as
quickmarking. To record a quickmark, you press a key on the
TSC1 datalogger at the moment you travel past the feature. The
Asset Surveyor software computes a single instantaneous
position for the feature. Positions obtained by quickmarking are
less accurate, even after differential correction, than averaging a
number of GPS positions together, but quickmarking lets you
collect many features very quickly.
• Line features: In order to record a line feature, you travel along
the line. As you do so, the Asset Surveyor software periodically
records GPS positions. These positions are joined together to
form a line.
• Area features: In order to record an area feature, you travel
around the perimeter of the area, and the Asset Surveyor
software periodically records GPS positions. These positions
are joined together to form the perimeter of the area. The first
and last GPS positions are joined together to close the area, so
there is no need to return right to the start point.
For applications in which higher accuracy is required, you can
configure the Asset Surveyor software to record GPS carrier phase
data, provided your GPS receiver can compute such data. You can
then process this data with the GPS Pathfinder Office software to yield
accuracy of a few decimeters, or down to centimeter level using the
GPS Pathfinder Pro XR/XRS Centimeter Option.
In general, you must finish collecting one feature before you can
collect another. The exception to this rule is the ability to collect point
features within line or area features, by either nesting or quickmarking
point features.

76 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Point features
When you are collecting a point feature, there are several softkeys at
the bottom of the attribute entry form. You can press these to perform
various operations while you are entering attribute values for the point
feature, or while waiting for the Asset Surveyor software to complete
the logging of GPS positions for that point feature.
An example of the attribute entry form for a point feature is the
following:

The ‘?’ value is the configurable ‘Null string’. It indicates that no

X O
value has been entered or supplied as a default for the corresponding
attributes.

p
The softkey provides access to external sensor configuration and

{
control. Press to view, enter, or edit the (optional) offset for this
point feature. The softkey lets you pause GPS position logging.
Press to switch to the Review data list. This is a list of features,
notes, and messages logged to this file so far. You can view or edit the

b
GPS positions, offsets, and attributes of features in the file from this
list. To switch from review mode back to the attribute form for the
new point feature, press .
Note – For more information on how to collect carrier phase point
features, see Chapter 7, Carrier Phase Data Collection.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 77

5 In the Field

Line features
When you are collecting a line feature, there are several softkeys at the
bottom of the attribute entry form. You can press these to perform
various operations while you are entering attribute values for the line
feature and traveling to the end of the line, logging GPS positions.
An example of the attribute entry form for a line feature follows:

N q
If, while traveling along the line feature, you come across a point
feature which you want to record, you can record it either as a nested
point feature by pressing , or as a quickmark by pressing .
The nesting of point features is described in Nested point features,

,
page 84, and quickmarking is described in Quickmarked point
features, page 85.
Press to start logging positions for an averaged vertex. Instead of
logging a single position while in motion, when you log averaged
vertices you record a number of positions while stationary. The
software averages these positions together to calculate a single, more
accurate position. For more information, see Recording averaged
vertices, page 90.

78 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 s
In the Field 5

To segment a line feature, press . This ends the current line

feature and immediately starts another feature of the same type. The
new line feature has, by default, the same attribute values as the
previous line segment. These can be edited to reflect the properties of
the new line segment. The last GPS position of the first line is the
same as the first GPS position of the second line, so that the two line
segments join up in the GPS Pathfinder Office software and your GIS.

s
The offset of the new line segment defaults to the offset of the
previous line segment, if any.
The function makes it easy to record a line as several segments,
each with differing attribute values, without any discontinuities

O{
between the segments.
To view, enter or edit the optional offset for this line feature, press
.
Press to switch to the Review data list. This is a list of features,

b
notes, and messages logged to this file so far. You can view or edit
attributes of features on the list. To switch from Review mode back to
the attribute form for the new line feature, press .
Note – For more information on how to collect carrier phase line
features, see Chapter 7, Carrier Phase Data Collection.

Area features
When you are collecting an area feature, there are several softkeys at
the bottom of the attribute entry form. You can press these to perform
various operations while you are entering attribute values for the area
feature and traveling around the area’s perimeter, logging GPS
positions.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 79

5 In the Field

An example of the attribute entry form for an area feature is the

following:

N q
If, while traveling around the area feature, you come across a point
feature that you want to record, you can record it as a nested point
feature by pressing , or as a quickmark by pressing . For
more information, see Nested point features, page 84, and

O,
Quickmarked point features, page 85.
To view, enter, or edit the (optional) offset for this area feature, press
.
Press to start logging positions for an averaged vertex. Instead of
logging a single position while in motion, when you log averaged
vertices you record a number of positions while stationary. The
software averages these positions together to calculate a single, more

{
accurate position. For more information, see Recording averaged
vertices, page 90.
Press to switch to the Review data list. This is a list of features,

b
notes, and messages logged to this file so far. You can view or edit
attributes of features on the menu. To switch from review mode back
to the attribute form for the new area feature, press .
Note – For more information on how to collect carrier phase area
features, see Chapter 7, Carrier Phase Data Collection.

80 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Reviewing features
While you have a data file open you can add new features, or open
existing features for review and update their attributes, offsets, or even
their GPS positions. At any time when a data file is open you can

{
switch from data entry to review, and back to data entry.
When you open a new rover file, the default mode is data entry and the
Start feature form appears. Press the softkey in this form, or in

\
the attribute form for a new feature, to switch to Review mode. The
Review data list appears, listing all the notes and features logged to the

b
data file so far. You can select a feature and press to open the
attribute form for the feature. In the Review data list, or in the attribute
form of a feature opened from the Review data list, the softkey
switches you back to Data Entry mode.
Note – When you have two features open you can edit the attributes or
offsets for both features, but you can only log GPS positions to the
feature which was opened first.
Switching between Data Entry and Review mode is like switching
between modules. You do not lose any unsaved data when you switch,
and when you switch back, you return to the form and field you were

{
working with. This means you can open a new feature and open an
existing feature for review at the same time.

b
You can use the softkey to check data you have logged so far in
a new file, or you can open an existing file for review and use the
softkey to add any new features to the file. For more information
on updating features, see Updating Data, page 94.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 81

5 In the Field

Carrier Phase mode

For applications in which accurate data is required, you can configure
the Asset Surveyor software to record GPS carrier phase data,
provided your GPS receiver is capable of computing such data. You
can subsequently process this data with the GPS Pathfinder Office
software to yield accuracy of a few decimeters.
Note – For more information on how to collect carrier phase features
see Chapter 7, Carrier Phase Data Collection.

Pausing and resuming

p
If you need to move away from a point feature (for example, to see the
top of a power pole more clearly) or need to avoid an obstacle when

p L L
recording a line or area feature, press to avoid recording
inappropriate GPS positions. Logging of GPS positions for the feature
halts, and the softkey changes to . Return to the position
you want to record and press to continue logging GPS positions.

p L
Normally, the Asset Surveyor software logs GPS positions while you
enter attributes, but you can separate these two activities and perform
them in either order using and .

B Tip – Each time you resume logging while collecting a line or area feature,

pL
the Asset Surveyor software logs a GPS position immediately

L
(irrespective of the logging interval for line/area features). You can use
this feature to force the Asset Surveyor software to log a GPS position
when you come to a corner or a point of interest. Press and then
to cause the current GPS position to be logged. After is
pressed, the Asset Surveyor software continues logging GPS positions at
the configured line/area logging interval.

82 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Repeating features

\
You normally start collecting a feature by selecting it from the menu

J
of features (that is, by highlighting it and pressing , or using a
first-letter search). However, you can also start collecting a feature by
highlighting it on the Start Feature menu and pressing :

J
The difference between normal selection of a feature and selecting
is in the attribute values that are entered by default when the
feature is created. If you select the feature by the ‘normal’ method, the

J
default attribute values are determined by the data dictionary, which
specifies a default value for each attribute belonging to each feature. If
you select a feature using , the attribute values are copied from

J
the last recorded feature of that type.

B Tip – The softkey lets you record a sequence of similar features

very efficiently. You do not have to re-enter the values for all of the
attributes; you can just page through, checking that each attribute value is
correct for the current feature, and only changing those that differ.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 83

5 In the Field

B
{ \=
Tip – The feature that is repeated is normally the last feature of that type
that was collected. However you can repeat the attributes of any feature in

b
the file. To repeat a feature, press to switch to the Review data list,

J
highlight the feature on the list, and press to open it and check its
attributes. If necessary, you can then press to close the feature, but
you do not have to close it before repeating it. Press to return to the
Start feature form and press .

repeated when you press J

Note – Offsets, except those configured as constant offsets, are not
.

When you press N

Nested point features
on the attribute entry form for a line or area
feature, the Asset Surveyor software displays a menu of point features
that can be nested within that line or area, for example:

When you select a point feature from this menu, the Asset Surveyor
software lets you enter attributes for it, and all GPS positions that are
logged subsequently are associated with it (rather than with the line or
area feature within which the point is nested). When you save the
point feature, the Asset Surveyor software again logs positions for the
outer line or area feature.

84 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 A
In the Field 5

\
To nest the updating of an existing point feature, press on the
Nest feature menu. A menu of existing point features appears.
Highlight a feature on the menu and press to update the attributes
or GPS position of the point feature. For more information on
updating features, see Updating Data, page 94.
You can nest as many point features within a line or area feature as
necessary. For more information on nesting, and for more information
on how to nest points that do not lie right on a line or on an area’s
perimeter, refer to Chapter 3, Data Collection, in the TSC1 Asset
Surveyor Software User Guide.

Quickmarked point features

If you have a large number of point features to collect, and you do not
require the best possible GPS position accuracy for these point
features, you can record them by quickmarking. This technique does
not require you to remain stationary at a feature at all; you simply
travel past the feature and at the moment you pass each feature you

q
press a key on the TSC1 datalogger. The Asset Surveyor software
instantly computes a single GPS position for the feature.
When you press on the Start Feature menu, the Asset Surveyor
software displays a menu of point features, for example:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 85

5 In the Field

Each time you select a feature from this menu, the Asset Surveyor
software records a quickmark position for that feature, along with the
default attribute values.
Quickmarking is particularly useful when features lie along the
roadside (for example, street furniture, power poles, or bridges).
You can record quickmarks instead of normal (averaged) point
features, and you can record quickmarks within line or area features.
For more information on quickmarking and for more information of
how to configure and edit attributes for quickmarked features, refer to
Chapter 3, Data Collection, in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide.

B Tip – If you are usually unable to travel right over top of each feature,
configure a constant offset for quickmark features, as described in the
following section. You can then travel past each feature at the specified
distance and record it as an offset quickmark.

Offsets and laser rangefinders

The offset feature in the Asset Surveyor software lets you record the
position of a geographical feature, without actually having to position
your GPS receiver directly over that feature. You may often find this
facility very useful because it may be difficult, inconvenient, or even
impossible, to position a GPS receiver over a feature and obtain GPS
positions.
Some examples where offsets might be used are:
• when collecting a tree feature. It is typically easier to stand
some distance (for example, ten paces to the north) from the
tree and record its attributes, firstly to ensure good GPS
reception and secondly so as to be able to see the tree clearly
and assess its condition. You can then specify an offset to the
tree of ‘10 m south’. This ensures that the tree will be
positioned correctly in your GIS. This is an example of an offset
point feature.

86 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

• when driving along a road recording power poles using

quickmarks. You can specify an offset of ‘3.5 m to the right’, so
that the poles are positioned 3.5 m to the right of your direction
of travel. This is an example of collecting offset quickmark
features.
• when collecting road centerlines. It is generally easier (and
safer) to specify an offset of ‘2 m to the left’ than to actually
drive along the center line, especially in the case of a highway
with a central dividing strip. This is an example of collecting
offset line features.
• when collecting a building as an area feature. It is generally
easier to ensure GPS coverage by walking around the building
at a distance of 5 m from the building, and to specify an offset
of ‘5 m to the right’ (if you walk clockwise around the
building), so that in your GIS the outline of the building is

O
accurately recorded. This is an example of an offset area
feature.
The softkey provides access to the offset entry form for the
feature you are currently in. An offset for a point feature consists of a
bearing (an angle from either true or magnetic north), a range (slope
distance), and an inclination (angle above or below the horizon), as
illustrated below:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 87

5 In the Field

A point feature offset can also be displayed and entered as a horizontal

distance, a vertical distance (above the horizontal), and a bearing:

by pressing f
You can switch between these two modes of offset display and entry
.
An offset for a quickmark, line feature, or area feature consists of a
direction (left or right) relative to the direction of travel at the time the
feature is recorded, a range (slope distance), and an inclination (angle
above or below the horizon), as shown below:

88 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

A line, area, or quickmark offset can also be displayed and entered as a

horizontal distance, a vertical distance (above the horizontal) and a
direction:

by pressing f
You can toggle between these two modes of offset display and entry
.
Note – All Asset Surveyor features (points, lines, areas, or
quickmarks) can have only one offset associated with them. You
cannot have two or more offsets for a single feature. This means that
to record a line feature with a given offset and then change the offset
part-way through the line feature, you need to segment the line at that
point (each segmented line feature has its own offset). You must
carefully plan how to collect an area feature using offsets, as the same
offset value must apply to the entire area feature.

B Tip – Because an offset is a three-dimensional modification to your GPS

position, you can use offsets to record the full three-dimensional position
of completely inaccessible features such as the top of a tree or a ledge
part-way up a cliff.

Every feature recorded with the Asset Surveyor software has an offset
associated with it. If you are able to actually position your GPS
receiver over the feature, as is generally the case, the offset is zero.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 89

5 In the Field

If every feature that you record is an offset from your position at the
time you record it, you can configure a constant offset, which is
automatically applied to that class of features. Just modify the feature
offset for specific features that are exceptions to the general rule.
Offsets can be measured and entered manually using a compass and a
tape measure, or simply by pacing out the distance from the feature to
the point at which you are measuring it. The Asset Surveyor software
also supports the collection of offsets for features using a laser
rangefinder. This allows very efficient collection of offsets without the
need to manually enter distances, bearings, or inclinations.

Recording averaged vertices

The averaged vertices feature in the Asset Surveyor software lets you
record several positions for a single location within a line or area
feature. These positions are averaged together to calculate the position

,
of this vertex. Averaging positions is more accurate than recording a
single position for a vertex.
To record an averaged vertex, press in the attribute entry form.
This opens the Vertex form:

90 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

This form contains the same fields as the attribute entry form, so you
can enter or edit attribute values for the line feature. You can also use
softkeys to switch to the Review data list, pause or resume logging, or
configure or activate an external sensor, but you cannot record
quickmarked or nested features, segment the current feature, or edit
the feature’s offset.
You must remain stationary whenever you are logging averaged
positions for a vertex. When you have logged as many positions as
you require for the vertex, close the Vertex form. You are returned to
the attribute entry form. Repeat this procedure at each vertex of the
line or area feature.

B Tip – If you want to record only averaged vertices in a feature, pause

logging before you open the feature. When you open the Vertex form,
logging starts, and when you close the Vertex form, logging returns to the
paused state, so no positions are logged unless you log an averaged
vertex or manually resume logging.

5.4.3 Entering Attributes

When you select a feature to collect, whether it is a point, line or area
feature, the Asset Surveyor software displays the attribute entry form
for that feature.

J
The default attribute values for the feature are derived either from the
data dictionary or from the previous feature of that type (if you
selected it using , or if the attribute is auto-incrementing). You
can enter new attribute values or edit existing values using the keypad
on the TSC1 datalogger.
You can also configure an external sensor to automatically fill in one
attribute value per feature. For more information, refer to Chapter 5,
Configuring the Asset Surveyor Software, in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor
Software User Guide.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 91

5 In the Field

5.4.4 Saving a Feature

entry form’s contents by pressing \

As with any standard Asset Surveyor form, you save the attribute
. You normally do not press
the moment you finish entering attributes for the feature, because,
\
while the feature is ‘active’, any GPS positions and external sensor
data associated with that feature are being collected.

configured minimum positions have been logged, and then press \

If this is a point feature, remain stationary at that feature until the
.

\
If it is a line or area feature, continue to walk or drive along the feature
(or around its perimeter, if it is an area feature). Only when you have

=
traversed it completely should you press .

=
If you want to abandon a new feature, press . This permanently
deletes the feature and discards all data it contains. When you press
while updating an existing feature, the feature reverts to its initial
values and only the changes you have made are discarded.

5.4.5 Entering a Note

Whenever you are logging data to a file, you can enter a note by
selecting the Note entry from the Utilities menu. The Asset Surveyor
software lets you type any characters into a note, which can be up to
100 characters long:

92 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 \
In the Field 5

= \
When you have finished entering the note, press . The Asset
Surveyor software stores the note in the current data file. If you decide
that you want to abandon the note, press instead of .

=
5.4.6 Exiting Data Collection
When you have finished collecting data, press on the Start feature
menu or the Review data list. The Asset Surveyor software asks you to
confirm this action. It then exits to the Data collection menu. Once
you have exited data collection, the Asset Surveyor software ceases
logging GPS or external sensor data.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 93

5 In the Field

5.5 Updating Data

When you are logging data, you may need to return to a feature to
change attributes, edit offsets, record its GPS position again, or delete
it. The Asset Surveyor software lets you review features in a rover file
at any time, even if you have not finished logging new features. You
can review features collected so far in a new rover file, or you can
reopen an existing file for review. You can even add new features to an
existing file.
The Asset Surveyor software also lets you review and edit the data
from your geographical information system (GIS) database. Use the
Import utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software to convert data
from your GIS format to the .ssf file format. Then transfer the
imported data file to your datalogger. For more information, see
Importing Data from a GIS, page 46. Once the file has been
transferred to the datalogger you can open and review it like any other
rover file.

5.5.1 Opening an Existing File

You can review and optionally edit an Asset Surveyor data file by
selecting Open existing file from the Data collection menu. The Open
existing file form appears:

94 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

The fields in this screen show details of the selected file in the File
field. This makes it easy to identify the file you want to update.

B Tip – A file stored on a PC card takes longer to open than a file stored in
the main memory of the TSC1 datalogger. This includes background files
as well as foreground data files. Move files you use frequently from the PC
card to the TSC1 datalogger to speed up opening.

The Update status field indicates whether the selected file has been
reviewed in the Asset Surveyor software.

Update status is … when …

Imported you have transferred the file from the GPS
Pathfinder Office software to the Asset Surveyor
software and have not yet made any changes to it
Not Transferred the file is new and you have not yet transferred it to
the GPS Pathfinder Office software
OR
you transferred the file from the GPS Pathfinder
Office software, have made changes to it since, and
have not yet transferred it back to the GPS
Pathfinder Office software
Transferred you have transferred the file to the GPS Pathfinder
Office software, and have not edited it or appended
to it since
File is corrupt the file is damaged and the Asset Surveyor

\
software failed to rebuild it successfully

When you have found the file you want, press . If you have

\
chosen to confirm antenna information for every feature or every file,
the Asset Surveyor software displays the Antenna options form. Make
any changes required in this form and press to open the file and
display the Review data list.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 95

5 In the Field

The Asset Surveyor software displays each feature and note in the data
file on a single line of the Review data list. The last feature or note in
the form is highlighted:

5.5.2 Reviewing
The Review data list shows a history of logging operations on the
selected file. It lists each feature and note in the file, as well as logging
notes indicating when the file was closed and opened again, or when
carrier lock was lost or regained.

\
To review and edit any feature or note in this list, highlight it and press
. You can display other information using the softkeys.

B
{
Tip – If you open an existing file, the Review data list appears. If you open
a new file, the Start feature form appears, but you can review the file by
pressing the softkey.

96 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Feature icons
Each entry in the file appears with a numeric identifier, an icon, and
the feature type. If an entry is a note or a logging message, the note
icon and the text of the note or message appear.
If the entry is a feature, the feature symbol for the feature type, as
assigned in the data dictionary, is displayed. The line and area
icons appear beside line and area features respectively.
If the feature is a point, the point symbol configured for it appears.
The Asset Surveyor software has a set of nineteen symbols which can
be used to identify point features. The Point feature symbols form lists
all the point features in the selected data dictionary and the symbol
associated with each one. You can use this form to change the symbol
assigned to any point feature.

• Press & in the Map screen, then F

To open the Point feature symbols form, do one of the following:
in the Map display

F
options form.
• Select Map display options in the Configuration module, then
press in the Map display options form.

\ F
• Select Data dictionaries in the File manager module to display

F
the Select data dictionary form, highlight the data dictionary
you want to use, press , then press .
The softkey is only available from the Map display options form
when a data file is open. It is always available in the Select data
dictionary form, because you can select which data dictionary to use.
Point feature symbols are specific to the data dictionary, not a data
file, and are displayed with any other rover files which also use that
dictionary.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 97

5 In the Field

Labels
When a feature is selected in the Review data list, two labels appear
below the list, showing attribute information from the selected feature.
Each label consists of the attribute name followed by its value. By
default, the two attributes used are the first two attributes added to the
feature in the data dictionary.
If the selected feature type has no attributes, or you have chosen not to
display labels for this feature type, no label information appears and
the Review data list covers the space where the labels would appear.
You can select any two attributes from each feature type as its labels.
These labels appear when the feature is selected in the Review data list

& \
or in the Map screen. To select the attributes you want to use as labels
for each feature, do one of the following:
• Press in the Map screen, press
\
in the Map display

\
options form, select a feature from the list, and press .

\
• Select Map display options in the Configuration module, press
in the Map display options form, select a feature from the
list, and press .

\\ \
• Select Data dictionaries in the File manager module to display
the Select data dictionary form, highlight the data dictionary
you want to use, press , press , select a feature from
the list, and press .

Update status
To the right of each feature entry in the Review data list there may be
an icon representing its update status. If the feature has been imported
from the GPS Pathfinder Office software but not changed, an empty
box appears. If you have made changes to the feature, the box contains
a check mark . You can also display the Update check marks layer
in the Map module so you can easily identify which features you have
visited and which you still need to review.

98 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

(
Note – Changing a feature means editing its attributes or offsets,
updating its GPS position, or marking the feature as visited with the
softkey.
New features have no update icon. A new feature is one which the
GPS Pathfinder Office software has no record of, either because it is
logged in a new file which has not yet been transferred to the GPS
Pathfinder Office software, or because it has been appended to a file
transferred from the GPS Pathfinder Office software and the file has
not yet been transferred back to the PC.
If the selected feature in the Review data list can be updated, it is
displayed in inverse video (white text with a black background).
If a feature cannot be opened, for example because it is already open
for update, it appears with a box around it:

While you are updating existing features, you can also add new

{b
features. At any time when a data file is open you can switch from
Data Entry mode to Review mode, and back to Data Entry mode. To
switch to data entry, press in the Review data list. To switch to
Review mode, press in the Start feature form.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 99

5 In the Field

Switching between Data Entry and Review mode is like switching

between modules. You do not lose any unsaved data when you switch,
and when you switch back, you return to the form and field you were
working with. This means you can open an existing feature for review
and start a new feature at the same time.

Press Q
Position
to open the Averaged position form for the highlighted
feature. If the feature is a line or area, the Asset Surveyor software
displays the Which position form first, so you can select which point
of the feature to display details for. For a line feature, you can view the
position information for the start or end of the line. If the feature is an
area, you can choose to see the position details of the start/end point,
or the centroid (the calculated center of the area).
The average latitude, longitude, and height of the feature, or the
selected point in the feature, appear in the Averaged position form,
with the datum and zone they were recorded in:

You cannot edit this position information here. For more information
on how to change the GPS position of an existing feature, see
Updating position, page 110.

10 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

position to the feature. PressO

You can use this form to view or change the offset from the GPS
to open the offset form for the
feature type (for example, Point offset for a point feature), then enter

f \
the offset details. You can enter the offset as a bearing, slope distance,
and inclination, or as a bearing, horizontal distance, and vertical

w
distance. Press to switch between the two options. Press to
confirm the offset and return to the Averaged position form.
To make a waypoint at the position shown, press . The caption of
the form changes to Create waypoint #, where # represents the next
available waypoint number.
Waypoints created in the Asset Surveyor software are assigned
sequential numbers as identifiers, but are usually referred to by name:

You can change the name of the waypoint, which defaults to the

\
feature name. You can also edit its latitude, longitude, or altitude. To
confirm the new waypoint and return to the Averaged position form,
press .

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 101

5 In the Field

Info
Press I in the Review data list to open the information form for the
highlighted feature. The name of the form is the feature type, and the
fields displayed depend on the feature type. The Number of positions
and Real-time positions fields are displayed for all feature types:

For line features, the Length (2D) and Length (3D) fields show the
two-dimensional and three-dimensional lengths of the line. For area
features, the Area (2D) field shows its two-dimensional area, while
Perimeter (2D) and Perimeter (3D) show the distance around the
perimeter of the area in two dimensions and in three dimensions.
You cannot change any information displayed in this form. However,
if you update the GPS position for the feature, this information
changes accordingly. For more information, see Updating position,
page 110.

10 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.5.3 File Operations

Some of the softkeys available on the Review data list represent
operations on the selected file instead of an individual feature.

#
Sorting
You can sort the features in the open file into various orders to make
updating or reviewing them easier. In the Review data list, press
to display the Sort by menu:

Select a sort order and press \ to apply the sort to the file.
The Sort by Feature type option rearranges features to match the order
of features in the data dictionary. Logging messages and notes appear
last.
The Sort by Time option sorts entries in their original chronological
order.
The Sort by Update status option orders features by whether they have
been updated. Features with the Updated status are first, then Imported
features, and finally New features.
The Sort by Deletion status option orders Undeleted features before
Deleted features.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 103

5 In the Field

The Sort by Distance from GPS (2D) option arranges the list to display
the features that are closest to the current GPS position first, followed
by more distant features, then messages and notes. The height of a
feature is ignored when calculating its distance from the GPS position.
The Sort by Distance from cursor (2D) option arranges the list to
display the features which are closest to the location of the map cursor
first, followed by more distant features, then messages and notes. The
height of a feature is ignored when calculating its distance from the
map cursor. This option is only available when the Map module is
open and the map cursor is activated. For more information on the
map cursor, see Using the Map, page 116.

Filtering

^
When you filter the Review data list, the Asset Surveyor software
hides or shows features in the list according to the setup you choose.

\
To view the list of filter types, press the softkey. Highlight any

\
entry in the list and press to enable this filter. A check mark ( )
appears to the left of any enabled filter option. To clear a check mark,
highlight the option and press again:

10 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

you require and press S

To specify the filtering details of a filter, highlight the filtering option

the filter you selected:

. The filtering options displayed depend on

Note – Filtering affects the whole system, including searching, Start

and Target menus, and the Map module.

}|
If you choose to filter by feature, the Feature type filtering form lists
each feature type in the data dictionary as a field. You can set the value
of each field to ‘Show’ or ‘Hide’, or use the or softkeys to
set all fields to the same value.
The Attribute filtering form contains a number of fields representing
each of the feature types, attributes, and attribute values in the data
dictionary that is associated with the open data file. After selecting a
field from the Feature type field, and an attribute for that field from
the Attribute field, use the Attribute value field to specify a value to
filter on, and the Operator field to select the comparison operation. If
there is no attribute or a text attribute selected, the default operator is
‘Containing’, but you can select ‘Not containing’. For other attribute
types the default value is ‘Equals’, but you can select ‘Not equal to’,
‘Greater than’ or ‘Less than’. Features not matching these parameters
will be hidden.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 105

5 In the Field

If you select the Update status or Deletion status filter, the form lists
each update status (New, Imported, or Updated) or deletion status
(Deleted or Undeleted) as a field. You can set each field’s value to
‘Show’ or ‘Hide’ or use the softkeys to set all fields to the same value.
The Time filtering form lets you set a start and end date and time. The
start date and time defaults to the date and time you began logging to

H 8
the selected file. The end time and date are initially blank, but you can
fill them in with any date and time that is later than the start value.
Softkeys for the current date ( ) and time ( ) are provided
when you edit fields, so that data entry is faster. Features with start
times outside this time period will be hidden.

= P
When you have finished selecting filters and setting up the filtering
options for each, return to the Review data list or the Map screen by
pressing or . The software applies all selected filters to the
list of features, and the text (Filtered) appears after the filename in the
caption to indicate that some features may now be hidden.
Note – You cannot enable the Feature and Attribute filters at the same
time. If you check both, a warning message appears when you try to
apply the filters, and you are unable to exit the Filters form until you
have disabled at least one of the two filters. All other filters can be
applied in addition to any existing filter.

10 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Searching
In a large data file, locating a particular feature to update can be time

z
consuming, and it is easy to miss the feature you are looking for as you
scroll through many pages of features. The search option lets you
locate features by specifying an attribute value. Press to display
the Search form.
Specifying search criteria is similar to filtering by attribute. You select
a feature type and attribute of that feature type, and then specify a
value and comparison operation:

\
z
When you press to start the search, the first feature in the Review

\
data list that matches the search criteria is highlighted. The search
criteria are retained so if you press again to show the Search
form, then , you can jump to the next feature matching the
previously configured search requirements.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 107

5 In the Field

5.5.4 Updating Features

Review data list or in the Map screen, press \

To update attributes of a feature, simply highlight the feature in the
, and edit it in the
update form that appears. In practice, you may need to navigate to the
feature before you can check its attributes. To update its GPS position,
you must return to the exact position of the feature. You can use the
Map module or the Navigation module to guide you back to the
location of any feature.

G
Target
In the Review data list, you can make a feature the navigation Target
by highlighting it in the menu and pressing . The Target icon
appears beside the selected feature, and the Navigation module and
Map screen change to navigate towards this point:

In the Map module and the Navigation module, you can select a Start
position as well as a Target. The Start and Target can be either a
feature or a waypoint. For more information on selecting Start and
Target positions, see Using the Map, page 116, and Navigating with
the Asset Surveyor Software, page 125.

10 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Updating attributes

\
After locating the feature in the Review data list or map, and pressing
to display its attributes, you can edit any field in the form in the

\
usual way. The Asset Surveyor software does not restrict the attributes
you can edit, although the data dictionary may specify that changing
attribute values is not permitted. Press again to close the update
form and confirm your changes:

O
Updating offsets

pressing \
After locating the feature in the Review data list or the map, and
to display its attributes, press
\
to open the offset
form for this feature type. Edit offset values as usual, then press
twice to close the update form and the feature and confirm your

Q O
changes.
You can also edit offsets from the feature’s position form. In the
Review data list, select the feature, press , then press .

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 109

5 In the Field

Updating position
If the position recorded for a feature is not precise enough, or no

3
positions have been recorded, you can record a new position for the
feature whether you update its attributes or not. To record a new

yp 3
position, press in the update form. The software asks you to
confirm that you want to update the positions for this feature. Choose
to start logging GPS data. The softkey changes to the

\
softkey, as described in Pausing and resuming, page 82. When
you have reached the end of a line or area feature, or have recorded

=
enough positions for a point feature, press to save the new GPS
data for the feature. To abandon the update and restore the original
position(s) to the feature, press instead.

Marking a feature as Updated

If you make changes to the attributes or position recorded for a
feature, the status of the feature changes to Updated. However,
sometimes you may want to simply flag the feature as Updated, to

(
show that it has been visited and checked, without changing any other
information about it. To mark a feature as updated, open the feature for
editing and press the softkey:

The feature status changes to Updated but no other information

changes.

110 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 )
In the Field 5

)
If a feature has already been marked, the softkey appears in the
attribute form instead. Press this softkey to reset the feature status to
Imported. You cannot use to reset features which have been
updated by changing attributes, offsets, or GPS positions.

Updating two features at a time

You can have up to two features open at the same time: either a new
feature and an existing feature, or two existing features. However,
because you can only log GPS position information for one point at a
time, the Asset Surveyor software only lets you record GPS positions
for one of the open features. The second feature may be viewed, and
its attributes updated, but you cannot change its position information
until you close the other feature. The text (edit only) appears in the
title of the attribute entry form for the second feature.
The edit-only feature need not be the last feature you opened. You can
open a feature (and optionally edit its attributes) without updating its
GPS position, then open another feature and begin logging GPS data
for it. The first feature you opened then becomes edit-only, and cannot
be updated in full until you close the second feature.
A new feature can only be opened for full update, and is never edit-
only. Even if you have paused logging, opening a new feature makes
any other open feature edit-only. However, you must always stop
logging for one feature before you begin logging for another one. If
you are already logging GPS positions for an existing feature, the
Asset Surveyor software will not let you open a new feature until you
close the existing one.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 111

5 In the Field

Saving or discarding updates

\ = to confirm the new data, or

changes. If you press
=
When you have finished updating attributes or the GPS position of a
feature, press to cancel the
, you must confirm that you want to
abandon the changes. If you do abandon them, the feature reverts to its
initial values.
When a feature is updated, the updated icon is displayed in the
Review data list beside the feature to indicate it has been updated:

If you have enabled the Update check marks layer in the Map module,
a check mark appears above the changed feature in the map:

112 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.5.5 Collecting New Features

b
While you are updating features you have already collected, you may
find new features you need to include in your data. To switch to the

{
Start feature form, press in the Review data list. Then select a
feature, enter attributes, and record GPS positions as usual. Press
to switch back to the Review data list at any time and continue
updating existing features.
Note – To postprocess GPS positions, you must accurately record the
date and time each position was recorded. The Asset Surveyor
software does not let you log new features to any file with the update
status Not Transferred if it contains positions recorded more than a
week ago.
If the Asset Surveyor software displays the following message:

you can update the attributes or offsets of existing features in the file,
but you cannot update their GPS positions or add new features to the
file.

B Tip – If you want to log new features to a file that is displaying this error
message, transfer the file to the GPS Pathfinder Office software, then
transfer it back to your datalogger. The status of the file changes to
Imported and the Asset Surveyor software lets you add new features.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 113

5 In the Field

5.5.6 Deleting and Undeleting Features

When the Review data list is open, the d softkey is available. Press

y
it to delete the currently selected feature or note. The Asset Surveyor
software displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to
delete the feature. If you press , the Asset Surveyor software
marks the feature as deleted and displays a line through the selected
feature or note and its icon:

displayed instead of the du

When a deleted item is highlighted in the list, the u softkey is
softkey. To restore a deleted feature or
note, highlight it and press .
A deleted feature can still be undeleted after you close the file. You
can open the file in the Asset Surveyor software, or in the GPS
Pathfinder Office software after transferring, and restore any feature
marked as deleted.

114 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.5.7 Exiting Data Update

close the current file by pressing =

When you have finished reviewing data and adding new features,
on the Review data list or the
Start feature menu. The Asset Surveyor software asks you to confirm
your intention.

B Tip – Do not use = when you want to close the new feature form and

{
return to the Review data list. The new feature form and the Review data

b
list are different data collection modes, rather than separate forms that
open in sequence. Closing one form closes the other form (and the file) as
well. Use the softkey to switch to the Review data list. To switch
from the Review data list to the new feature form, press .

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 115

5 In the Field

5.6 Using the Map

You can use the Map module to check your current GPS position, to
navigate to waypoints or features, to view the update status of

M
features, and to open features for update. The map shows the features

N
in the data file selected in the Data collection module. To open the
map, return to the Main menu by pressing , then select Map. You
can use the key to switch between the map and other open
modules.

5.6.1 Mode
The Map module can operate in a graphical mode, or in a text mode.
The graphical mode displays the position of each feature in the data
file, by drawing the boundaries of line and area features and
displaying the symbol assigned to each point feature type. It can also
show a background map, and navigation information such as
waypoints and the GPS trail.
Note – When the Map module is performing calculations, an
hourglass appears in the top right corner of the screen. It remains
visible until calculations are complete and the map is ready to display
again.

116 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 @
In the Field 5

The default mode is graphical. Use the softkey to switch

between modes:

displayed. You can create a waypoint by pressing

cannot view or edit any other information:
w
In text mode, the coordinates of the current GPS position are
, but you

The rest of this section refers to the graphical mode.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 117

5 In the Field

5.6.2 Zooming
Use the + _ and softkeys to reduce or enlarge the scale of the

=
map. The maximum zoom scale is 25 cm, and the minimum is
2000 km.
When you press the key, the software zooms to the extent of the
map, automatically selecting the zoom scale at which all features and
waypoints in the map can be shown.
When you open the Map module, the software automatically zooms to
include the contents of the data (foreground) and background files,
any waypoints defined, and the current or, if the receiver is not
connected, the old GPS position. If there is no data file open, or there
is only a single GPS position, the Map screen uses a default display
scale of 250 meters, centered on the GPS position.

5.6.3 Display Options

Press the& softkey to display the Map display options form, where
you can customize the map display. These settings are stored and
applied to each data file you open, so the map displays in the same
way for all files until you change it.

B Tip – You can also use the Map display options command in the
Configuration module to open this screen.

118 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

In the Map display options form you can choose to show or hide any
of five map layers, the scale arrow, and the coordinate display:

The layers you can show or hide are:

^
Layer Description
Features Point, line, and area features logged in the current
data file. You can also hide only selected feature
types using the softkey.
Update check-marks Check marks which appear over a feature to
indicate that it has been updated.
Not in feature Marks indicating GPS positions that have been
logged but which are not part of a feature.
GPS trail A trail of dots behind the GPS cursor showing its
recent positions.
Navigation Navigation aids such as waypoints, Target and
Start positions, and point or line features that
contain a Start or Target.

The scale arrow shows the current zoom scale. It is displayed over any
features on the map, so hiding it can make the map easier to read. The
coordinate display shows the coordinates of the GPS position or the
map cursor location. It occupies a separate area at the top of the
screen, so when it is hidden the visible area of the map increases.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 119

5 In the Field

You can also select a background file to display on the map. To display
a menu of files you can use as backgrounds, select the Background file
field. The menu includes all rover files on the TSC1 datalogger or PC
card, and background files that have been transferred from the GPS
Pathfinder Office software.

B Tip – A file stored on a PC card takes longer to open than a file stored in
the main memory of the TSC1 datalogger. This includes background files
as well as foreground data files. Move files you use frequently from the PC
card to the TSC1 to speed up opening.

1 2
If you select a background file, display the background by pressing
in the Map screen. When the background is enabled, this softkey

F
changes to . Press it to hide the background. By default, the
background is displayed.
The softkey in the Map display options form lets you customize
the symbols (icons) used for different point features. You can assign
one of ten icons to any point feature type in the data dictionary, and the
same icon can be used for more than one feature. By default, the

\
software assigns symbols to point features to minimize the number of
features that share a symbol.
The softkey in the Map display options form lets you customize
the attributes from each feature type that are used as labels. The values
of the two label attributes are displayed when a feature is selected. By

^
default, the attributes selected as labels are the first two attributes
added to the feature type in the data dictionary.

^
The softkey opens a menu of filter types and lets you select and
define filters, so only the features you want to see are displayed. The
same Filter by menu can be opened using the softkey in the
Review data list. Information on applying filters can be found in the
section on File Operations, page 103.

12 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.6.4 Navigating Using the Map

Usually you will use the Navigation module to guide yourself to a
Target, which may be either a waypoint or a feature you want to
update. You can also use the Map module to:
• orient yourself in the area you are working in
• get a general indication of the location of a feature you want to
find
• find or select features or waypoints to navigate to
• plot a course from one place to another

Cursor
In the Map screen, the GPS cursor shows the current GPS position

&
reported by the receiver. It is always enabled in the Map screen,
although it may not always be within the visible part of the map. You
can use the softkey to hide or display the GPS trail, the heading
showing the direction you are traveling in and other options on the
map display. The GPS trail is a line of dots showing up to 60 previous
GPS positions.
Note – The Map screen and the GPS position will be affected by the
accuracy of your GPS source. Unless you have a real-time source, or
are viewing a file that has been differentially corrected, positions
shown on the map are only accurate to within about 100 meters.
If you use any of the arrow keys on the datalogger, the map cursor
appears at the center of dotted horizontal and vertical cursor lines. The
Coordinates display, if it is enabled, now shows the position of the
map cursor. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor crosshairs. When
you position the crosshairs directly over a point feature or any part of a
line or area feature, the feature becomes selected.
Note – If the open data file contains more than 5000 features, the map
cursor is not visible and cannot be used to highlight or select features
or waypoints.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 121

5 In the Field

B Tip – Use the = =

key to hide the map cursor and the arrow keys to show
it again. When the map cursor is hidden, closes the Map module.

Panning
When the map cursor is visible, you can use the arrow keys to move it
around, and to pan to another part of the map. When you move the
map cursor to the edge of the screen, the map automatically pans so
the map cursor is in the center of the screen. The map cursor remains
at the same GPS position and the map scale does not change.

B [
[ {(
Tip – If you press while you press an arrow key, the map pans one
screen width or height in the direction of the arrow. For example, press
to pan one screen width to the right.

Highlighting and selecting features

The feature that is highlighted in the Review data list is also the
highlighted feature on the map. A highlighted line or area appears in
bold, while a highlighted point feature appears in reversed colors. For
example, when the point feature symbol is selected it appears as .
When you position the map cursor directly over the center of a point
feature, or any part of a line or area feature, the feature’s ID number
and name appear beside the map cursor. If labels have been
configured, the two label values appear below the name and ID.

12 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

When a feature’s label is visible, the feature is selected as well as

highlighted:

To open the selected feature for update, press \ . Pressing \ when

a feature is highlighted but not selected has no effect. You must select
a feature before you can open it from the Map screen for update or
review, but you can set a feature or waypoint that is only highlighted,
not selected, as the Start or Target.
A feature remains highlighted even when you move the cursor off it,
but it is no longer selected and its label disappears. When you
highlight another feature, the previously highlighted feature returns to
its normal state.
Note – Highlighting a feature on the Review data list changes the
highlighted feature on the map, and changing the highlighted feature
on the map changes the highlighted feature in the Review data list.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 123

5 In the Field

Target and Start

If a feature in the Review data list is selected as the navigation Target,
the Target waypoint icon appears over it on the map. This is the
same as the normal waypoint icon except that it is larger. If the Target
is off the screen, the bearing to go arrow appears to show you the

G
direction the Target is in.

G
You can also use the map to select a Target. Use the cursor to highlight
the feature or waypoint you wish to navigate to and press , or
press and choose your destination from the Select target menu

T
that appears.
In the map you can also select a place to start navigating from by
pressing . The Start is marked with the Start icon . The Start,
like the Target, may be a waypoint, a point feature, the start or end of a
line or area feature, or the center of an area feature.
When you select both a Start and a Target, and the Navigation layer of
the map is enabled, a dashed ‘cross-track’ line appears between the
Start and Target, representing the direct route between the two
locations. You can use this trail as a basic navigation guide to reach
the Target.

12 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.7 Navigating with the Asset Surveyor Software

You can use the Asset Surveyor software together with a Trimble GPS
receiver to determine and record your current position. You can also
use the Asset Surveyor software and a GPS receiver to navigate to a
position of interest. Navigation is normally associated with ensuring
that you follow a prescribed course when traveling from A to B, but
you can also use navigation to revisit features that have been
previously surveyed, and to identify a specific feature that may require
maintenance.
The Navigation module has two graphical modes. In both modes, text
information appears on the right in the Info panels. You can configure
the data that appears in the Info panels, and you can choose to display
different text information in the different graphical modes.
When you select the Navigation entry from the Main menu, the
software displays the last navigation mode you used. If you have not

@
used the Navigation module before, the Direction Dial screen appears.
You can switch between this screen and the Road screen with the
softkey.

5.7.1 Target and Start

GT
To navigate you need to select a Target and then, optionally, a Start
position. The Target and Start position can be features from the open
data file, or waypoints. Press or in the Navigation module
to display a list of features and waypoints you can choose from.
If you already have a selected Target, it is the highlighted item in the
list and is also marked with the Target icon . If there is no Target
selected yet, the feature that is highlighted in the map is highlighted in
the list.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 125

5 In the Field

\
In the example below, the Bus Stop feature is the highlighted feature.
To choose another Target, highlight a feature or waypoint in the list
and press . The Target changes to this position:

If you select an area or line feature, you must then specify the start or
end point, or the center of the area, as the position to use.
Once you have selected a Target, the Distance to Go appears at the
bottom of the Navigation screen. This is the distance remaining
between the current GPS position and the Target.

B Tip – If you set a feature or waypoint as the Target, and then change its
GPS position, you must select it as the Target again to make the map and
navigation displays use the new position.

B
You can also create a new waypoint, which you can then set as the
Target, from the currently highlighted feature, the GPS position, or the

T
location of the map cursor. Press in the Target menu to create a
waypoint. For more information, see Waypoints, page 135.

highlight a feature or waypoint, and press \

Selecting the Start is similar to selecting the Target. Press ,
. The Start is marked
with the Start icon . You can also create waypoints from the Select
start menu.

12 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

B Tip – The Start is useful for calculating the cross-track error and other
navigation information.

5.7.2 Heading Lock

In the Navigation module, the software uses the angle between the last
two GPS positions to calculate your heading. If you are not moving, or
are moving too slowly, the software cannot calculate the heading.
When this happens the heading is locked. This may occur in the
Direction Dial screen or in the Road screen.
When the heading is locked the message Heading locked starts flashing
in the message area, alternating with the message Start moving. The dial
or road, the heading arrow on the map, and any values in the Info
panels that depend on the heading, freeze. Info panels that depend on
the heading include Bearing, Turn, ETA, and Time to Go. When you
start moving fast enough for the Asset Surveyor software to calculate
a reliable heading, the heading display becomes active again.
Note – When you are using autonomous GPS, the heading is locked
when your velocity drops below 0.65 meters/second (2.34
kilometers/hour). With differential GPS the minimum velocity is 0.35
meters/second (1.26 kilometers/hour).

5.7.3

Press the &

Navigation Options
softkey in the Navigation module to open the
Navigation options form. You can use this form to set options for both
the Direction Dial screen and the Road screen. You do not have to be
in a navigation mode to change its options; for example, you can open
the Navigation options form from the Direction Dial screen and use it
to change the road scale for the Road screen.
Use the Navigation options form to select a close-up range and style
for the Direction Dial screen, a road scale for the Road screen, and
Info panels for both.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 127

5 In the Field

5.7.4 Direction Dial Screen

The default navigation mode is the Direction Dial mode:

The direction dial includes an arrow, which always points in the

direction of the Target you have selected. This is the bearing to go.
The triangle at the top of the dial represents your current direction of
travel (your heading). This triangle never moves, but by moving in the
direction of the arrow you can line the arrow up with the triangle.
When the two are aligned, you are heading in the direction of the
Target.
Note – Since the Direction Dial and Road displays are calculated from
the direction of movement (heading), they will not be correct if you

&
move backwards.
The four Info panels can be configured to display relevant text-based
navigation information next to the direction dial. Press the
softkey to display the Navigation options form where you can set
options, including the Info panels, for both graphical modes.
When you move close to the Target, the bull’s-eye appears on the
edge of the Direction Dial screen, in the approximate location of the
Target. This feature has two purposes: to guide you more exactly in
the direction of the Target, and to warn you that the display is about to
switch to the Close-up screen.

12 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

Close-up screen
When you get close to the Target, the proximity alarm sounds and the
Direction Dial screen is replaced by the Close-up screen:

The represents your current GPS position, and the bull’s-eye

represents the Target. Depending on whether you use GPS-centered or
Target-centered close-up style, the (GPS-centered) or the bull’s-eye
(Target-centered) is fixed in the middle of the display and the other
symbol moves as you change position.
To navigate to the Target, move so that the is directly over the
bull’s-eye. You can use the distance information at the top of the
screen to gauge how far you have to travel. The top of the screen
represents your heading at the time the Close-up screen was activated,
and remains fixed while you are in this screen. If you change
direction, the position of the or bull’s-eye will change but the screen
will not show your change of direction in any other way.
Note – In the Close-up screen, heading information is not updated, so
any of the Info panels which relate to your heading or velocity, such as
Bearing, Turn, ETA, and Time to Go, are frozen.

B Tip – Because the Close-up screen does not show your direction, it is
best to maintain your original heading and move sideways or backwards
as if you were staking out a survey point, rather than turn around.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 129

5 In the Field

Close-up style
The Close-up screen has two navigation styles. In the GPS-centered
close-up style, the GPS position is fixed in the center of the screen,
and you navigate so that the bull’s-eye representing the Target moves
to the center of the screen. This is the GPS-centered close-up style. In
the Target-centered style, the bull’s-eye is fixed in the center and the
moves around as you move, until the lies over the bull’s-eye
and you have reached the Target:

as your preferred style. Use the &

The default style is the Target-centered style. You may choose either
softkey to select a close-up style.

Close-up range
You can specify the distance from the Target at which the software

&
changes from the Direction Dial screen to the Close-up screen. If you
set this distance to zero, the Close-up screen never appears. Press the
softkey to open the Navigation options form where you can set
the close-up range.
When the display changes from the Direction Dial screen to the
Close-up screen, a proximity alarm sounds.

13 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.7.5 Road Screen

The Road screen can be accessed by pressing the @ softkey from
the Direction Dial screen or, if you used the Road screen last time you
opened the Navigation module, by selecting the Navigation option
from the Main menu.
In the Road screen you navigate by ‘walking’ along a road. A stick
figure represents your current GPS position, and the Target icon
shows the point you are navigating to. The stick figure is always in the
center of the screen:

As in the Direction Dial screen, your heading is represented by the

top center of the screen (the triangle in the direction dial). Your
bearing to go is shown by the direction of the road. The direction of
the road rotates as you change your heading.
To navigate to the Target, turn in the direction of the road until it is
pointing straight ahead and the center line is parallel to the sides of the
screen. Then move towards the Target, keeping the road pointing
straight ahead where possible. As you move closer to the Target the
screen zooms in so the road appears wider.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 131

5 In the Field

B Tip – If you have lined up the road so that it points straight ahead but the
Target is at the bottom of the screen, you have turned in the wrong
direction and are heading away from the Target. Turn 180° so that the
Target is at the top of the screen. The Turn Info panel can be a helpful
indicator of the direction you need to move in.

&
The four Info panels can also be configured to display relevant
text-based navigation information next to the road. To set options for
both graphical navigation modes, press the softkey. The
Navigation options form appears.

Road scale
The road scale determines the actual distance the width of the road
represents. If you have selected a Start position, the center of the road
represents the direct path from Start to Target. If you stray to one side
of this direct path, the display moves the road sideways so the stick
figure is walking off the center line or off the road itself. The distance
you have strayed is called the cross-track error. The width of the road
in the display shows you the amount of cross-track error in your path.
The road width shown depends on the road scale you choose and how
far you are from the Target.
You can make the road narrower or wider, depending on how
accurately you want to navigate. When you stray sideways from the
direct path, the stick figure is displayed as being off the road. The
wider the road scale, the more you can stray before the stick figure
leaves the road.
If you want to stay very close to the path you are following, set a

&
narrow road scale. If you only want to go in the general direction of
the Target, and following the path exactly is not important, set a wide
scale. To set the road scale, use the softkey.
Note – The road scale only adjusts the width of the road when a Start
point has been selected. This is because it is computed using the
cross-track error.

13 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.7.6 Info Panels

In both the Direction Dial screen and the Road screen, up to four text-
based Info panels can appear on the right of the screen. Info panels are
visible at all times. You do not have to switch to a text mode to see text
navigation information.
You can choose up to four Info panels for each navigation mode. Each
mode can use different panels from the other. Any panel can be left
blank by selecting the ‘None’ option.
Some Info panels can only show useful data when you have selected a
Target or are moving with sufficient velocity.
Table 5.1 shows the Info panels you can display in the Navigation
module.
Table 5.1 Info panels

Panel What it shows

Altitude Your current altitude. If you are using two-dimensional
GPS, the altitude shown is the value entered in the 2D
altitude field. The altitude reference used (HAE or MSL) is
also shown.
Bearing to Go The compass bearing (angle) that you need to follow in
order to take the shortest path between the current GPS
position and the Target. The bearing is displayed with a ‘T’
if it is relative to true north or an ‘M’ if it is relative to
magnetic north.
Cross-Track The direction and distance to the cross-track line, an
imaginary straight line linking the Start and Target by the
shortest route. The numeric value indicates how far, and
the arrow shows which direction (left or right), you need to
travel to get back on line.
ETA The Estimated Time of Arrival at the Target, based on
your current heading and velocity.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 133

5 In the Field

Table 5.1 Info panels (Continued)

Panel What it shows

Go North/East The northerly and easterly distance components of the
bearing to go to the Target. It is given as two Cartesian
distances, with one value representing the north/south
distance and one representing the east/west distance
from the current GPS position to the Target.
Go Up/Down The difference in altitude between the current altitude and
the altitude of the Target. If you are using 2D GPS then
the current altitude used is the value entered in the 2D
altitude field.
Heading Your current direction of travel. The heading is the angle
between the last two GPS positions computed. If you are
stationary or moving very slowly, the heading display
freezes until you start moving again. The heading is
displayed with a ‘T’ if it is relative to true north or an ‘M’ if it
is relative to magnetic north.
Time The current GPS time and date. The value is the GPS
time plus the local variation from GMT, taken from the
‘Time and Date’ setting.

Time to Go The expected time to reach the Target. This value is

calculated from your heading and velocity.

Turn The size and direction of the turn required to head

towards the Target. The arrow indicates whether you
need to veer to the left or to the right, and how big a turn is
required, while the numeric value indicates the angle
between the bearing to the Target and the current
heading.
Velocity Your velocity. It is two-dimensional, taking into account
your horizontal velocity but not your altitude.

options form. Press the &

You can select the Info panels to be displayed from the Navigation
softkey to access this form.

13 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.7.7 Waypoints
An Asset Surveyor waypoint is a named three-dimensional position. A
waypoint can be used to record a geographic point such as a position
of interest, a survey mark, an excavation site, or a previously surveyed
feature.
The Asset Surveyor software maintains a single waypoint file, which
contains a list of waypoints:

Waypoints can be used for navigation, and can be transferred to and

from the GPS Pathfinder Office software.

Creating waypoints
You can add a waypoint from various modules and screens of the
Asset Surveyor software. You can create a waypoint from:
• an existing feature
• the current GPS position
• the map cursor position
• coordinates typed in manually
A file of waypoints can also be transferred from the GPS Pathfinder
Office software.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 135

5 In the Field

• In the Map module, press

type in coordinates or press
Th G B
These are some of the ways you can create a waypoint:
or and then
to use the current GPS
. Either

Th G B
position. The default coordinates are the coordinates of the
current GPS position or the map cursor position if it is active.
• In the Navigation module, press or and then .
Either type in coordinates or press to use the current GPS
position. The default coordinates are the coordinates of the

Q
current GPS position or the map cursor position if it is active.
• In the Data Collection module, open a file for review. In the

w
Review data list, select a feature, press and then, for a line
or area feature, select a single point in the feature. GPS details
for the point appear in the Averaged position form. Press

B h
to create a waypoint at this position.
• In the Utilities module, choose the Waypoints menu option, then
press . Either type in coordinates or press to use the
current GPS position. The default coordinates are the
coordinates of the current GPS position or the map cursor
position if it is active.

D
Editing and reviewing waypoints
Whenever a list of waypoints is displayed, the exd , , , and
softkeys appear. You can edit a waypoint from the Select start or
Select target menus in the Map and Navigation screens, or from the
Review waypoint list in the Utilities module. By pressing the
appropriate softkey you can:
• edit the name or position of a selected waypoint
• measure the distance between any two waypoints
• delete a selected waypoint
• delete all waypoints

13 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.8 Managing Data Files

Because the data storage space on the TSC1 datalogger is finite, you
must eventually delete, move, or copy data files from the TSC1
datalogger. Use the File manager menu, accessed from the Main
menu.

C Warning – Before deleting the original data files from the TSC1
datalogger, always check that files that have been transferred to your PC
were transferred correctly. Once a data file has been deleted from the
TSC1, it cannot be recovered.

5.8.1 Deleting Files

When you select the Delete file(s) entry from the File manager menu,
the Asset Surveyor software displays a list of data files similar to the
following:

can press D
You can select a particular data file from this list to delete it, or you
to delete all data files. The Asset Surveyor software
always asks you to confirm that you really want to delete one or more
data files, and asks you to confirm again for each data file that has not
yet been transferred to your PC.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 137

 C
5 In the Field

If you have a PC card installed, you can press to display a list of

files stored on the PC card. Follow the same process as above to delete
any files from the PC card.
If you want to delete data files to make space on your TSC1
datalogger, it is useful to know how much storage space individual
data files consume. Select Open existing file from the Data collection
menu to view some useful statistics on the highlighted data file,
including its size and the amount of data storage space remaining on
the TSC1 datalogger or PC card.

5.8.2 Renaming Files

When you select the Rename file entry from the File manager menu,
the Asset Surveyor software displays a list of data files similar to the
following:

You can select a particular file from this list (or press
file on a PC card) to rename it.
C to select a

13 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 In the Field 5

5.8.3 Copying Files to and from the PC Card

When you select the Copy file(s) entry from the File manager menu,
the Asset Surveyor software displays a list of data files:

(or vice versa), or you can copy all the files listed by pressing
The Asset Surveyor software always asks you to confirm that you
0
You can select a particular file from this list to copy it to the PC card
.

really want to copy all the files. If it detects a file with the same name
in the destination folder, it asks you to confirm that you want to
overwrite the file:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 139

5 In the Field

5.8.4 Moving Files to and from the PC Card

When you select the Move file(s) entry from the File manager menu,
the Asset Surveyor software displays a list of data files similar to the
following:

(or vice versa), or you can press 0

You can select a particular file from this list to move it to the PC card
to move all files. The Asset
Surveyor software always asks you to confirm that you really want to
move all the files, and asks you to confirm again if it detects a file with
the same name which is about to be overwritten.
Note – Moving a file from the TSC1 datalogger to the PC card (or vice
versa) results in the original file being removed from the source (TSC1
or PC card).

14 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

6
6 Back in the Office
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Transferring data to the PC
■ Transferring data From the PC
■ Postprocessed differential correction
■ Displaying data
■ Exporting data to a GIS
■ Batch Processor
6 Back in the Office

6.1 Introduction
This chapter covers what to do with your data once you have collected
it in the field. The topics include:
• Transferring data to the PC
• Transferring data from the PC
• Postprocessing data to differentially correct it
• Displaying data
• Exporting data to a GIS
• Batch processing data

6.2 Transferring Data to the PC

Instructions for transferring rover data from the datalogger are given
below. If you have used Asset Surveyor as a temporary base station
then follow the same instructions as for the rover files. If you have an
alternative source of base station data, you must transfer those files to
the PC on which the GPS Pathfinder Office software is installed.

6.2.1 Transferring Data from the Datalogger

After data has been collected, it must be transferred (using the GPS
Pathfinder Office software’s Data Transfer utility) from the TSC1
datalogger to the PC. The procedure for transferring the data from the
datalogger is straightforward. Connect your TSC1 datalogger to the
PC, as shown in Figure 6.1, then transfer the data.
Data stored on a PC card can be transferred through the TSC1
datalogger, as described below. Alternatively, if you have a PC card
slot on your office computer, you can transfer your data files directly
into the GPS Pathfinder Office software from this slot.

14 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

Transferring data
The rover or base station data that you have stored on your TSC1
datalogger (or PC card) needs to be transferred to your PC. This is
accomplished through the File manager / File transfer option
accessed from the Asset Surveyor Main menu.

B Tip – Transferring files from a PC card connected directly to your

computer is faster than transferring them from the TSC1 datalogger.

To transfer data files from the TSC1 datalogger to the PC:

1. Connect your TSC1 datalogger to the PC.
2. On the TSC1 datalogger select File manager from the Asset
Surveyor Main menu.
3. From the File manager menu, select File transfer. The Asset
Surveyor software is ready to transfer data files:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 143

Win_gis.bmp
6 Back in the Office

To connect the TSC1 datalogger to the PC:

1. Connect one end of the TSC1 data cable (PN 32287-00) to the
null modem cable (PN 18532) and the other end to the TSC1
datalogger.
2. Connect the null modem cable to the serial port on the PC. See
Figure 6.1.

Figure 6.1 Connecting the TSC1 datalogger to the PC

14 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

To transfer files from the TSC1 datalogger to the PC:

1. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software on your office computer,
select Utilities / Data Transfer.
The Data Transfer dialog appears:

2. From the Device list, select the device name that represents the
TSC1 datalogger.
You can use one of the predefined names (either GIS
Datalogger on COM 1 or GIS Datalogger on COM 2,
depending on which serial (COM) port the support module is
connected to). Alternatively, set up a new device definition.
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the
datalogger.
3. Make sure the Receive tab is selected.
4. Click Add.
The Open dialog appears.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 145

Win_mai1.bmp
6 Back in the Office

5. In the Files of type field, select the format of the files you want
to transfer. For example, select Data File (*.ssf) to transfer Data
files.
6. In the list of files, highlight the file or files you want to transfer
and click Select.
The Open dialog disappears, and the files you selected appear in
the Files to Receive list.
7. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 7 to select other files to
receive.
8. Click Transfer All.
The selected files are transferred from the Asset Surveyor
software.
9. A message box showing summary information about the
transfer appears. Click Close to close it.
10. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.
To transfer data files directly from the PC card slot to the PC:
1. Insert the PC card into the slot on your office computer.
2. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software on your office computer,
select Utilities / Data Transfer.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
3. Add a new device definition for the PC card:
a. Click Devices to open the Devices dialog, then click New.
b. Select the GIS PC Card option, then click OK to start the
Add Device wizard, which guides you through adding a
device definition for the PC card.
c. Follow the steps in the wizard. When the wizard finishes,
click Close in the Devices dialog to return to the main
Data Transfer dialog.
For more information on adding a device definition, refer
to the Data Transfer Help.

14 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

4. From the Device list, select the device name that you just set up.

B Tip – Any device definition you set up is saved. The next time you transfer
files to or from the PC card, you do not need to set up a new device
definition. Instead you can simply select this device name from the Device
list.

The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the PC card.

5. Make sure the Receive tab is selected, then click Add.
The Open dialog appears.
6. In the Files of type field, select the format of the files you want
to transfer. For example, select Data File (*.ssf) to transfer Data
files.
7. In the list of files, highlight the file or files you want to transfer
and click Select.
The Open dialog disappears, and the files you selected appear in
the Files to Receive list.
8. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 7 to select other files to
receive.
9. Click Transfer All.
The selected files are transferred from the PC card.
10. A message box showing summary information about the
transfer appears. Click Close to close it.
11. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.
For more information on transferring files to and from the PC, see the
GPS Pathfinder Office documentation.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 147

Opendat.bmp
6 Back in the Office

6.3 Transferring Data From the PC

When you return to the field to review or update data, you must first
transfer the files you need to the TSC1 datalogger. The process is
similar to the process for transferring files from the TSC1 to the PC.
To transfer data files from the PC to the TSC1 datalogger:
1. Connect your TSC1 datalogger to the PC.
2. On the TSC1 datalogger select File manager from the Asset
Surveyor Main menu.
3. From the File manager menu, select File transfer. The Asset
Surveyor software is ready to transfer data files:

4. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software on your office computer,

select Utilities / Data Transfer.

14 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

The Data Transfer dialog appears:

5. From the Device list, select the device name that represents the
TSC1 datalogger.
You can use one of the predefined names (GIS Datalogger on
COM 1 or GIS Datalogger on COM 2, depending on which
serial (COM) port the support module is connected to) or you
can set up a new device definition.
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the
datalogger.
6. Select the Send tab.
7. Click Add.
The Open dialog appears.
8. In the Files of type field, select the format of the files you want
to transfer. For example, select Data File (*.ssf) to transfer Data
files.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 149

6 Back in the Office

9. In the list of files, highlight the file or files you want to transfer
and click Select.
The Open dialog disappears, and the files you selected appear in
the Files to Send list.
10. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 7 to select other files to
send.
11. Click Transfer All.
The selected files are transferred to the Asset Surveyor
software.
12. A message box showing summary information about the
transfer appears. Click Close to close it.
13. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.
To transfer data files from the PC to the PC card:
1. Insert the PC card into the slot on your office computer.
2. In the GPS Pathfinder Office software on your office computer,
select Utilities / Data Transfer.
The Data Transfer dialog appears.
3. From the Device list, select the device name that represents the
PC card.
The Data Transfer utility automatically connects to the PC card.
If there is no device definition for the PC card, you need to add
a new device definition. For more information on adding a
device definition, refer to the Data Transfer Help.
4. Make sure the Send tab is selected, then click Add.
The Open dialog appears.
5. In the Files of type field, select the format of the files you want
to transfer. For example, select Data File (*.ssf) to transfer Data
files.

15 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Win_expo.bmp
 Back in the Office 6

6. In the list of files, highlight the file or files you want to transfer
and click Select.
The Open dialog disappears, and the files you selected appear in
the Files to Send list.
7. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 7 to select other files to
send.
8. Click Transfer All.
The selected files are transferred to the PC card.
9. A message box showing summary information about the
transfer appears. Click Close to close it.
10. To close the Data Transfer utility, click Close.
For more information on transferring files to and from the PC, see the
GPS Pathfinder Office documentation.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 151

dlg_dir.bmp
6 Back in the Office

6.4 Postprocessed Differential Correction

The data collected by GPS receivers is subject to errors. The vast
majority of these errors can be removed from the data by differential
correction.
When this is applied to the data file, submeter C/A code position
accuracy can be achieved using a GPS Pathfinder Pro XR™,
Pro XRS™, Pro XL™, 4600LS™, Site Surveyor 4400™, GPS Total
Station® 4700, GPS Total Station 4800, or Series 4000™ receiver.

C Warning – If you are going to permanently average positions, adjust the

2D records, or manipulate the file in other ways in addition to differential
correction, perform differential correction first.

C Warning – Although there are no real advantages of collecting carrier

data over code data at distances greater than 35 km, the GPS Pathfinder
Office software does not restrict the user with distance limits between the
rover and base when processing in Carrier Only mode. However, when
processing in Smart mode, the GPS Pathfinder Office software will not
process carrier data collected more than 75 km from the base.

15 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

6.4.1 Starting Differential Correction

The Differential Correction utility enables you to remove errors in the
GPS data caused by atmospheric effects and other factors. It improves
the accuracy of GPS positions from approximately 10 meters to
submeter, depending on the receiver and data collection technique
used.
Select Utilities / Differential Correction from the GPS Pathfinder
Office menu bar to start the Differential Correction utility:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 153

6 Back in the Office

6.5 Displaying Data

The GPS Pathfinder Office Map window is the primary means of
viewing field data. It lets you make graphical queries and
measurements on the data that you collect in the field. The Map
window provides an easy way to verify the integrity of your field data
before you enter it into a GIS database. For more information on each
Map window function, see the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
To display your data:
1. Select File / Open from the GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar.
2. From the Open Data File dialog, select the data file(s) you want
to view. The current project folder is the default path:

3. To change projects, use File / Select Project from the GPS

Pathfinder Office menu bar. Once you have selected the data
file you want, click Open.

15 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

The Map window now displays this data file:

You can define what elements you want to view on this screen,
and display positions and features simultaneously or separately
by using the commands under Layers in the View menu.
In addition, you can specify the colors, symbols and line styles
for each feature. For example, poles can be one symbol and
color, and trees can be a different symbol and color. Instructions
for assigning colors, symbols, and line styles to features are
given in the View menu topic in the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.
4. To query a position, select Data / Position Properties from the
GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar.
5. To measure between positions and features, select
Data / Measure from the GPS Pathfinder Office menu bar.
To gain more proficiency with the GPS Pathfinder Office Map
window display, refer to the View menu topic of the GPS Pathfinder
Office Help. This section discusses the functionality of this powerful
display module in detail.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 155

6 Back in the Office

6.6 Exporting Data to a GIS

The Export utility converts .ssf format files into another format that
can be read by a GIS or CAD system. It lets you export the following
data to a variety of other formats:
• point features
• line features
• area features
• feature attributes
• raw GPS positions
• note records
• velocity records
• external sensor records

15 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

To export data to a GIS:

1. Select Utilities / Export from the GPS Pathfinder Office menu
bar to run the Export utility:

By default, the last used set of files are selected as input files.
For example if you had just differentially corrected a set of .ssf
files, the corrected files would be selected by default.
2. If you want to change the list of selected input files, click
Browse (in the Input Files group) to find the files you want to
export.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 157

6 Back in the Office

3. The default output folder is the Export folder in the current GPS
Pathfinder Office project. If you want to change the output
folder, click Browse (next to the Output Folder field) and select
the folder you want to store the exported files in:

4. From the Choose an Export Setup field, select the export setup
that you want to use for exporting the data.
The Export utility supports a number of existing GIS and CAD
products such as ARC/INFO, AutoCAD, MGE ASCII loader,
and MapInfo. You can also export data into ASCII format. For
more information on how to customize export formats, see the
Export utility Help.
5. Click OK after choosing an export setup. A progress bar
appears, tracking the status of the export process.

15 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Back in the Office 6

6.7 Batch Processor

The Batch Processor utility is designed to help you increase
productivity by automating repetitive tasks that must be performed
when you return from the data collection session. You can come back
from the field at the end of the day, start the Batch Processor utility
running, and go home. When you arrive back at work the next
morning, your data has been transferred from the TSC1 datalogger,
differentially corrected, formatted for your particular GIS system, and
possibly even imported and processed by your GIS software,
depending on the power of its own batch or macro language.
For more information, refer to the Batch Processor Help.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 159

6 Back in the Office

16 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

7
7 Carrier Phase Data Collection
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Before you begin
■ Configuring the Asset Surveyor software
■ In the field
■ Back In the office
7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

7.1 Introduction
When you need to collect a feature with a precision better than 50 cm,
you can configure the Asset Surveyor software to log carrier phase
data.
As this is an important feature, this chapter introduces you to the basic
concepts involved, and then describes in detail how to collect and use
carrier phase data.

7.2 Before You Begin

The following sections discuss some of the concepts associated with
using carrier phase data.

7.2.1 Why Use This Feature?

In a conventional GPS session, the Asset Surveyor software logs
independent GPS positions. If enough satellites are visible and the
PDOP is low, it continues to log reliable positions.
In a GPS session where the Asset Surveyor software logs carrier phase
data, positions collected in the field can be postprocessed to generate
more precise positions once you are back at the office. Because
measurements are collected from each individual satellite, the
positions generated during postprocessing are more precise than
positions logged in the field.

16 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

7.2.2 Planning
You require a clear view of the sky at all times when collecting carrier
phase data, so avoid obstacles such as trees, bridges, and tall
buildings. Choose a time of day when you can expect to track a
maximum number of satellites with the best possible geometry.
Note – Always make sure that you collect sufficient useful data while
you are in the field. This is discussed more fully in the following
section.

7.2.3 Collecting Sufficient Data

Always make sure that at least four satellites remain visible for
enough time to provide sufficient useful data for postprocessing.

Number of satellites
To provide sufficient carrier phase data to achieve the required
precision, the Asset Surveyor software needs to log data from at least
four satellites for the minimum time specified. However, you must log
data from at least five satellites for the postprocessing software to
indicate the precision. These five satellites together provide the
necessary redundancy for the precisions required—but you can use
more.
‘Loss of lock’ occurs when the number of available satellites drops
below four. If you minimize the number of times that loss of lock
occurs during the session, you greatly increase the precision of the
postprocessed results.
As you start a session, the Asset Surveyor software starts to record
carrier phase data. As soon as four or more satellites are available, a
counter starts. When the specified Minimum time has elapsed, all of
the carrier phase data recorded during that period can be used during
postprocessing.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 163

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

7.2.4 Time
When you specify the Minimum time for which four or more satellites
must be available, you are effectively setting a precision warning level
below which you consider the recorded data to be insufficient.
According to the precision you require, you choose a setting from the
following options:
• 10 minutes (the default)
• 20 minutes
• 30 minutes
• 45 minutes
For more information on configuring the Minimum time, see
Configuring the Asset Surveyor Software, page 172.

Counter
A counter in the Asset Surveyor software starts to measure time as
soon as four or more satellites are available.
When the counter reaches the Minimum time specified, a ‘success
beep’ sounds and a message is displayed in the status line. This
indicates that the current ‘block’ contains sufficient useful data.
If you lose lock before the end of the Minimum time, the data collected
until then may not provide the required precision during
postprocessing. Consequently, the counter is automatically reset to
zero when loss of lock occurs. It only restarts when lock is regained.
Note – The counter is active only if the Asset Surveyor software is
logging carrier phase data from four or more satellites—it does not
simply record the time that has elapsed since the beginning of the file.

16 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

Time and precision

The precision of positions generated during postprocessing depends
on a combination of the number of satellites used, the distance
between base and rover, and the length of time for which data is
recorded from those satellites. Collecting data for longer generally
gives more precise positions.
Assuming that enough satellites are available, Figure 7.1 shows the
relationship between the time taken to collect carrier phase
measurements and the precision of the positions generated during
postprocessing.
Error

longer baseline

short baseline

Time

Figure 7.1 Precision achieved relative to time elapsed

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 165

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

7.2.5 What Is a Block of Data?

When you start a file, the Asset Surveyor software starts to record
carrier phase measurements. Useful data is not stored as one
continuous stream, however, but as a series of ‘blocks’.
The beginning and end of each block is determined by the number of
available satellites. As soon as four (or more) satellites are available, a
new block begins. This block continues until lock is lost. When lock is
regained, a new block begins.
The Asset Surveyor software continues to create blocks of data
throughout the file. These blocks together constitute the measurement
data for the entire session.

Opening and reopening files

The files that you create in the Asset Surveyor software are
independent of each other, so carrier phase data collected in one is of
no use to another.
If you use the Asset Surveyor software to collect carrier phase data,
you need to collect sufficient data every time you open a file—this is
true whether you open a new file or reopen an existing one. Always
make sure that you collect sufficient data for each file.

16 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

Figure 7.2 shows how the Asset Surveyor software creates distinct
blocks of carrier phase data as the number of satellites changes.

BLOCK BLOCK

8
A

6
Number of SVs

5 B C D

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Time in minutes

A = 4 or more satellites – useful carrier phase data

B = lock is lost – unusable carrier phase data
C = lock is regained (4 or more satellites) – useful carrier phase data
D = lock is again lost – unusable carrier phase data

Figure 7.2 Blocks of carrier phase data relative to satellite lock

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 167

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

In Figure 7.2, the counter begins at time zero and stops at 35 minutes
when lock is lost (B). This creates the first block of carrier phase data.
If you specified a minimum time of 30 minutes, for example, this first
block contains sufficient useful data. It should produce positions that
meet the precision you require.
Between B and C, the required minimum number of satellites is not
met. The counter does not start, and the carrier phase data collected
during this period is not used.
When four satellites are again available (C), the Asset Surveyor
software creates a new block and the counter begins to measure again
from time zero. In this example, this happens 38 minutes after the start
of the session. Lock is lost at 55 minutes (D)—after only 17 minutes
worth of data has been collected. Since you specified a minimum time
of 30 minutes for this session, this block contains insufficient
continuous data.
This is likely to result in data that may not produce positions that meet
the precision you require.

7.2.6 Recording Features

While the Asset Surveyor software logs carrier phase measurements in
the background, you start to record features—these can be points,
lines, or areas.
Decide carefully when to start and stop recording feature data.
Before you start the first feature in your file, wait until four or more
satellites are available. Once you are receiving carrier phase data from
at least four satellites, the Asset Surveyor counter starts.

Ending a feature before minimum time is reached

Once the counter is running, you can choose to end the feature and
stay where you are until the minimum time is up. When the success
beep sounds, you can move to the next feature. Using this method, you
can be sure that you have sufficient data to generate precise positions.

16 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

Alternatively, if you think you are unlikely to lose lock, you can move
to the next feature before sufficient carrier phase data has been
collected.
Note – This is possible because all features recorded during a block
achieve the precision associated with that block (see Figure 7.3).
In earlier versions of the Asset Surveyor software, a point feature
could only use carrier phase data collected while that point feature
was being recorded. Data collected before or after that did not affect
the feature.
As long as a block eventually contains sufficient useful data, you can
generate precise positions for any feature that falls within it.
Figure 7.3 shows how individual features benefit from blocks of
carrier phase data stored at the time they were recorded.

Blocks of carrier phase data

BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3

A B C

Individual features logged during this time

Figure 7.3 Features relative to blocks

In this example, Block 1 contains sufficient carrier phase data. Feature

A was started after the counter started for Block 1 and ended before
the success beep, but during postprocessing it derives the full benefit
of all data recorded for Block 1.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 169

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

Feature B was unwisely recorded during a period when no useful data

was recorded. You probably need to record this feature again.
Feature C was started when the counter started for Block 2. Logging to
this feature continued after the success beep. Then there was a loss of
lock and a new block of carrier phase data started. The feature was
ended before the success beep sounded for this block of data, and the
file was closed. In this case, the portion of the feature collected up
until the loss of lock, indicated by the end of Block 2 in Figure 7.3,
should achieve the desired precision. However, the second portion of
the data, associated with Block 3, may not achieve the desired
precision.

C Warning – Only move to the next feature before the minimum time is up if
loss of lock is unlikely.

As you record features, be aware of the following:

• the number of satellites available
• the position of these satellites—if they are to stay visible, they
should be high rather than low on the horizon
• any obstruction likely to cut off your view of the satellites as
you move
Read any messages that appear on the screen. They indicate how
useful the current data is.
The review screen also shows if loss of lock has occurred so you can
measure that feature again if necessary. If it is clear that a block
contains insufficient data, you can collect any features that are affected
before leaving the site.
You may sometimes decide that enough time has elapsed to provide a
useful measurement, even though the specified time has not been met.
This depends on the precision required.

17 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

7.2.7 Postprocessing
Postprocess all data using an office PC running the Differential
Correction utility in the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
In addition to carrier phase data, the Asset Surveyor software also logs
code phase data in the field.
During postprocessing, the Differential Correction software uses the
carrier phase data to generate positions of high precision. It computes
positions and stores the results over the top of the code phase data—
the code phase data only serves to assist with the arrangement of the
new positions.
Finally, the software computes the estimated precision of the
generated positions. This helps you to evaluate your GPS results.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 171

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

7.3 Configuring the Asset Surveyor Software

If you decide to use carrier phase data, configure the Asset Surveyor
software as follows:
1. From the Configuration menu, select GPS rover options. The
GPS rover options menu appears:

2. Select Logging options:

17 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

3. Set the Carrier mode field to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ (the default),

depending on your requirements.
When Carrier mode is ‘On’, the Asset Surveyor software logs
carrier measurements that are synchronized with each position
collected. Select ‘On’ when high accuracy data is required.
If further features in a file do not require high accuracy data
logged, and you want to save storage space on the TSC1
datalogger, you can set Carrier mode to ‘Off’.

C Warning – Setting Carrier mode to ‘Off’ causes the carrier lock to be lost.
If you later set Carrier mode back to ‘On’, you must make sure that the
carrier lock is maintained for the Minimum time for further features to
achieve the desired accuracy.

If you attempt to switch the Carrier mode from ‘On’ to ‘Off’

during a data collection session, and the Minimum time has not
yet been achieved, the following warning message appears:

This message reminds you that the Minimum time has not been
reached, and that setting Carrier mode to ‘Off’ may result in
preceding features not meeting the required precision.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 173

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

If, during a data collection session, you attempt to switch the

Carrier mode from ‘On’ to ‘Off’ after the Minimum time has
been achieved, the following warning message appears:

This message reminds you that the Carrier mode should be left
set to ‘On’ if further features require carrier precision.
4. Set the Minimum time field to the minimum time you require.
Note – Trimble recommends that you set the Position mode field in the
Position filters form to ‘Overdetermined 3D’ when logging carrier
phase data. This ensures that five satellites are used to generate each
position. This also ensures that precision statistics can be computed by
the postprocessing software.

17 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

7.4 In the Field

You are now ready to go into the field. The techniques you use are
slightly different from those you use to collect just code-phase GPS
positions.

7.4.1 Opening a Data File

You can either create a new file or open an existing file.
When you select Create new file from the Data collection menu, the
Asset Surveyor software displays the Create new file form:

Accept the default file name suggested by the Asset Surveyor software
or type a new name into the Filename field. You can also change the

t
data dictionary that is associated with the data file. If you have a PC
card installed, you can choose whether to store the data file on the card
or on the TSC1 datalogger. Press to switch between UTC and

\
local time for the default file name.
Press to create the new data file. The Asset Surveyor software
opens this data file for logging.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 175

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

When you select Open existing file from the Data collection menu, the
Open existing file form appears:

When you select a different file in the File field, the other fields

\
change to show information about the selected file. This makes it easy
to identify the file you want to update. When you have found the file
you want, press .
If you did not set the Position mode to ‘Overdetermined 3D’ (see the
note on page 174) the following warning appears:

Decide whether or not to open the Position filters form from the GPS
rover options menu and change the Position mode.

17 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

7.4.2 Starting to Log Data

When you open (or reopen) a carrier phase data file, the Antenna
options form appears:

Make sure that the Height and Type fields contain the correct details
for the antenna you are using.
For more information about antenna types and configuring the
Antenna options form, refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User

\
Guide.
Press to proceed.
The Asset Surveyor software now starts to log data to the file you have
opened. You must now choose which feature you want to record.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 177

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

7.4.3 Starting a Feature

Choose a geographic feature from the list that appears, for example:

Items in this list are determined by the data dictionary you specified
earlier (see page 175).

Antenna Options form

\
When you choose a feature, the Antenna options form appears. It
appears every time you begin a new feature. Make sure that it contains
the correct details, then press to proceed.

B Tip – If the antenna configuration is unlikely to change during the session,

you can set the Confirm field to ‘Per file’ or ‘Never’. If you do this, the
Antenna options screen does not appear every time you begin a new
feature.

The Asset Surveyor software now starts to log data for the feature.
Note – Quickmarks cannot be processed as carrier phase features.
Quickmarks collected in a file containing carrier data are processed
as code-corrected features.

17 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

7.4.4 Logging Carrier Phase Data

As you log carrier phase data, the Asset Surveyor software displays
the time elapsed since the current block of data started. This is referred
to as ‘carrier time’.
The carrier time appears in the status line at the configured feature
logging interval and shows the amount of data in minutes and seconds:

(This value also appears in the Carrier time field in the Receiver status
screen.)

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 179

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

When the Asset Surveyor software has logged carrier phase data
continuously for the time specified in the Minimum time field, the
success beep sounds and the following message appears in the status
line:

You have logged sufficient carrier phase data to achieve the precision
required for the features collected since the counter was last reset, and
until it is again reset.
Trimble recommends that you occupy the first feature for the full time
specified in the Minimum time field before you move on to other
features. This is discussed in Ending a feature before minimum time is
reached, page 168.

18 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

If you attempt to close a file before the Minimum time is up, the Asset
Surveyor software asks you to confirm that you want to close the file:

You can choose to close the file anyway, accepting a possible loss of
accuracy, or you can keep the file open until more carrier phase data
has been logged.
As you proceed, the Asset Surveyor software also warns you
whenever your GPS receiver loses lock. A message appears in the
status line, for example:

The Carrier lost message tells you how long the last continuous block of
carrier data was when carrier lock was lost.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 181

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

When the counter is reset, the Carrier time field shows 00:00.
In addition, the Asset Surveyor software writes a note to the data file,
for example:

This records when the carrier time was reset, and the amount of carrier
phase data collected for the block. You can review this note in the
field, or back in the office (using the GPS Pathfinder Office timeline).
If the Minimum time has not been reached, you can choose whether to
reoccupy the affected features or move on.

18 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Carrier Phase Data Collection 7

7.5 Back In the Office

To transfer your data from the datalogger to your office PC, see
Transferring Data to the PC, page 142.
Then process your files using the GPS Pathfinder Office software. For
more information on processing data files, refer to the GPS Pathfinder
Office documentation.

7.5.1 Centimeter Processing Option

You can purchase an option for the GPS Pathfinder Office software
which enables the processing of carrier phase data to centimeter
precision levels. For data to be processed using the centimeter option
it must satisfy the following requirements:
• features must be collected within a continuous carrier block of
at least 45 minutes in duration
• the baseline (distance between the base and rover) for the data
must be less than 10 km
• data must be collected using a Pathfinder Pro XR or Pro XRS
receiver.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 183

7 Carrier Phase Data Collection

18 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 CHAPTER

8
8 RTK Mapping
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Introduction to RTK
■ Before you begin
■ In the field
■ Back in the office
8 RTK Mapping

8.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces the basic principles of using Real-Time
Kinematic (RTK) techniques to collect data for use in GIS and CAD
systems. It identifies procedures and techniques to ensure that the
equipment is used appropriately to achieve the specified levels of
accuracy from the RTK system.

8.2 Introduction to RTK

If you need to collect features with a very high level of precision, you
can configure the Asset Surveyor software to collect RTK data.
GPS data collection for geographic information systems (GIS) has
generally been carried out using GPS receivers that achieve submeter
levels of accuracy by applying differential correction techniques for
postprocessed and real-time data collection. However, RTK
techniques allow you to collect positions with centimeter levels of
accuracy.
With an RTK system, this level of accuracy can now be obtained for
mapping purposes, along with the same powerful feature and attribute
data collection.
To obtain these higher levels of accuracy, you need to apply more
rigorous data collection techniques than those used for differential
data collection. While the basic GPS correction concepts are the same
for both RTK and differential data collection, the tolerances associated
with RTK data collection are more precise. Errors which could be
overlooked for differential operations now become important and
must be accounted for carefully in order to obtain the centimeter levels
of accuracy achievable with the RTK system.

18 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

While the RTK system computes very precise GPS positions and
displays reliable precision estimates, these positions are only accurate
when compared to each other. To achieve high levels of absolute
accuracy (when comparing with existing data sources), it is important
to calibrate the data against existing good quality control points. An
accurate location for the base station is also important, as are accurate
heights for both the base and roving receiver antennas.

8.2.1 Real-Time Kinematic Data Collection

RTK data collection is a combination of specialized GPS and radio-
modem equipment that has been utilized by the land survey
community for precisely defining positions on or near the earth’s
surface. The RTK system, in conjunction with appropriate surveying
techniques, is designed to derive positions in the field to centimeter
levels of accuracy for both the horizontal and vertical components of a
coordinate.
RTK operates using relative measurement techniques, in the same way
that differential GPS (DGPS) operates. There is a base station (also
referred to as a reference station) and a roving receiver. The position
of the rover is determined relative to the base station (illustrated in
Figure 8.1). The base station is set up as a stationary receiver over a
known or assumed reference point for the duration of the data
collection session. (A known reference mark is generally a
well-defined survey mark in terms of a local or national coordinate
system.) The roving receiver is moved to features that are to be
collected or updated.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 187

8 RTK Mapping

Base Station

Baseline

Rover

Figure 8.1 Relative measurement between base station and rover

When the data from these two receivers is combined, the result is a
three-dimensional vector between the base station and the rover, called
a baseline, which enables a position to be computed. RTK data
collection uses a radio to transmit the base data to the rover for the
duration of the data collection session. As each GPS position is
computed, a correction can be applied to significantly improve the
level of accuracy of the feature being observed.
Note – Postprocessed techniques (which require data to be stored and
corrected some time after the data collection process has been
completed) are not discussed here. RTK systems are designed to
operate for RTK data collection only.
RTK data collection requires the simultaneous observation of the same
five (or more) satellites by both the base station and rover. You can
have as many rovers as you like simultaneously collecting data;
however, all rovers must be able to see the same satellites as the base
station.

18 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

The difference between RTK and differential data collection

techniques are specifically related to the information that the receiver
(or combination of receivers) is able to interpret from the signals that
are sent by the satellites.
The following section briefly describes satellite signals and the way in
which GPS receivers use these signals, to provide basic information
for understanding the differences between RTK and differential data
collection techniques.

8.2.2 Satellite Signals and GPS Receivers

Each satellite transmits two unique codes. The first and more simple
code is called the C/A (coarse acquisition) code. The second code is
called the P (precise) code. These codes are modulated onto two
carrier waves, L1 and L2. The L1 wave carries both the C/A and the
P-code, while the L2 wave carries only the P-code.
GPS receivers are categorized as being either single-frequency or
dual-frequency. Single-frequency receivers observe the L1 carrier
wave, while dual-frequency receivers can observe both the L1 and L2
carrier waves.
Submeter differential receivers such as the Pro XR and Pro XRS are
single frequency receivers. RTK receivers such as the GPS Total
Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800, Series 4000, and Site Surveyor
4400 track both frequencies, which lets more precise centimeter-level
positions be computed.

Code and phase measurements

There is a time difference between when the code is generated in the
satellite and when it is received at the GPS antenna. Code
measurements, as described in the Mapping Systems General
Reference manual, make it possible to record this time difference. The
measurements are multiplied by the speed of light, making it possible
to determine the distance from the satellite to the GPS receiver’s
antenna—this distance is also referred to as the range.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 189

8 RTK Mapping

High accuracy GPS receivers measure the phase difference between

the carrier waves. The wavelengths of both the L1 and L2 waves are
known, so satellite ranges can be determined by adding the phase
difference of the L1 and L2 signals to the total number of waves that
occur between each satellite and the antenna.
Determining the fractional component of the signals is relatively
simple. However, determining the full number of carrier wave cycles
between the antenna and the satellite is more complex. The
determination of the integer number of waves is referred to as the
integer ambiguity search or, more simply, search. For Real-Time
Kinematic operations that require centimeter-level accuracy, the
integer is determined during a process called initialization.
The initialization process for RTK techniques is, in essence, solving
ambiguities that exist between the base and roving receivers and the
satellites they are observing. The resultant solution of these
ambiguities is referred to as either being Fixed or Float as defined in
Table 8.1.
Table 8.1 Fixed versus Float solutions

Fixed solution Float solution

A fixed solution is obtained when the integer A float solution is obtained when a definitive
values of the wave lengths are able to be integer value for the wave lengths cannot be
computed with confidence. A fixed solution computed with confidence. Float solutions result
achieves centimeter levels of precision. from unmodeled atmospheric, orbital and other
errors. A float solution is not as precise as a
fixed solution.

8.2.3 RTK Correction Messages

During an RTK data collection session, the base station broadcasts
correction messages using the radio modem. There are two types of
message that can be broadcast: CMR and RTCM 2.1. These messages
are configured in the Asset Surveyor software using Configuration /
Communication options.

19 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

C Warning – If you are using a 4400 Site Surveyor receiver, a GPS Total
Station 4700 receiver, or a GPS Total Station 4800 receiver as the rover, it
can automatically detect which signal is being broadcast. If you are using
a Series 4000 receiver as the rover, you must configure the same
message type at both the base and the rover, otherwise messages are not
received by the rover.

CMR
A Compact Measurement Record (CMR) is the most efficient message
to broadcast as it is very compact. CMR only supports RTK data
collection; you cannot use it to provide corrections for real-time
differential data collection (such as when using a Pro XR).
All Trimble Series 4000, 4400, and 4800 receivers support CMR
records. This is the default setting in the Asset Surveyor software.

RTCM 2.1
The Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services (RTCM) 2.1
message is a less compact message that contains an RTCM SC-104
format message with an embedded CMR message. As a result of this,
a single RTK base station could be set up to provide real-time
correction messages for simultaneous RTK and real-time differential
data collection. Therefore, rovers that receive RTCM 2.1 messages
can collect either RTK or real-time differential data by setting the RTK
mode in the software appropriately.
In the Asset Surveyor software, select Configuration / GPS rover
options / Positions filters.
Note – Your receiver must have the RTCM output option installed in
order to use RTCM 2.1.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 191

8 RTK Mapping

8.2.4 Accuracy Considerations

Your RTK system has been designed to achieve centimeter levels of
accuracy. There are a number of important tools incorporated within
the system to help achieve this. However, to ensure ultimate quality, it
is imperative that good data collection procedures are followed.
In considering accuracy requirements, it is important to determine
whether or not the data being collected is to be associated with data
collected by other means. In most instances, the data collected by your
RTK system is required for incorporation into an existing GIS. This
GIS usually stores its current data in terms of a common underlying
coordinate system, such as a national grid or local coordinate system.
The following factors have an effect on ensuring the required levels of
accuracy are obtained:
• precision estimates
• calibrating to existing control points
• geoid models

Precision estimates
Your RTK system computes values that provide an estimate of the
quality of the GPS position that is being derived. These values provide
estimates of the precision associated with the location of the phase
center for your roving receiver’s GPS antenna.
You can make valuable use of these precision estimates during your
RTK data collection activities. They can be used when configuring
your roving receiver to indicate precision tolerances (or masks). A
position is not logged if it does not fall within the assigned tolerances.
Separate precision tolerances can be set for the horizontal and vertical
components of the position. Precision tolerances are further split to
enable separate settings to be made for positions collected as a result
of static or roving techniques. Static and roving techniques are
described later in Data Collection, page 197.

19 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

RTK precision options form. To open this form, press

Position filters form.
R
In the Asset Surveyor software, the precision settings are set in the
in the

During the RTK data collection process, the precision estimate values
are constantly displayed and updated in terms of a position’s
horizontal and vertical components. You can also log the precision
estimates (QA/QC) associated with each position using the Log
QA/QC functionality.
In the Asset Surveyor software, the Log QA/QC field is found in the
Logging options form, accessed from Configuration / GPS rover
options.
The Asset Surveyor software is set by default to log precision
estimates if available. The precision values for a position can be
queried in the GPS Pathfinder Office software and can also be
exported as attributes for point features and Not in Feature positions.
While these values provide a very good indication of the quality of the
GPS signal and the computed position’s precision, they should not be
used in isolation when considering a position’s accuracy.

Calibrating to existing control points

To achieve maximum possible accuracy, it is important to search
survey records for horizontal and vertical control points that may be
used to provide a control framework for a local site calibration.
Trimble recommends that you contact a practising surveyor or survey
company for reliable information related to the control points.
Differences can exist between GPS positions and positions that have
been surveyed using conventional means, such as a theodolite and
EDM. These differences are commonplace and occur because GPS
positions are referenced to a mathematical representation of the earth
(called an ellipsoid), while conventionally surveyed positions are
referenced to a gravitational model of the earth (called a geoid). The
ellipsoid surface is very smooth and regular, while the geoid surface is
uneven, as illustrated by Figure 8.2.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 193

8 RTK Mapping

Ground
Orthometric (Geoidal)
Ellipsoidal Height
Height
Geoid
Geoidal Separation

Ellipsoid

Figure 8.2 Geoid-ellipsoid separation

The differences between the geoid and ellipsoid result in a perceived

degradation of accuracy between the GPS positions and the ‘known’
survey marks. The inaccuracies can be accommodated through a
process called calibration. A calibration applies a least squares
adjustment to derive a ‘best fit’, by moving the GPS-derived positions
slightly to reflect the positions of the existing survey control more
appropriately, as illustrated by Figure 8.3. This is achieved by
observing or collecting GPS positions over known survey marks, then
creating a local site using the GPS Pathfinder Office software.

GPS Position

Known Position

(Diagram not to scale)

Figure 8.3 Local site calibration schematic

19 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

Note – You cannot derive a Local Site Calibration using the Asset
Surveyor software.
For best results, assuming the control is free of errors, local control
points should be evenly distributed over the data collection area as
well as extending beyond the perimeter of the site. A minimum of
three known points is recommended for a horizontal adjustment, while
a minimum of four known points is recommended for a vertical
adjustment.
A local site is the result of plane and height adjustments. The plane
adjustment consists of a rotation, translation, and scale change of the
mapping plane. The height adjustment defines a plane that is inclined
relative to the mapping plane. A mapping plane is an underlying
coordinate system that already has defined datum and map projection
parameters.
Creating a local site is a simple way to compute the parameters
(rotation, translation, and scale) associated with a plane adjustment for
a localized area, or site. Vectors define the relative movements of
positions for known coordinates. A least squares adjustment is then
applied to the vectors to derive a best fit solution for the parameters of
the plane adjustment.
Some important points to remember when creating a local site are:
• A local site is created from a specific coordinate system and
zone; it is linked permanently to that zone. Make sure that the
current coordinate system and zone are the same as that of your
existing database.
• A local site can only be created in terms of a cartesian
coordinate system (that is, not from a latitude/longitude
projection). This is because a local site is defined in linear units,
such as meters, as opposed to non-linear units, such as degrees.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 195

8 RTK Mapping

• A local site created in the GPS Pathfinder Office software must

be transferred to your datalogger for use in the field. For more
information on transferring a local site, refer to the GPS
Pathfinder Office documentation.
• Local sites can be created and edited using the Coordinate
System Manager. For more information about creating and
editing sites, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office documentation.

Geoid models
The geoid, as mentioned above, is a surface of constant gravitational
potential which approximates mean sea level. A geoid model (also
called a geoid grid file) is a table of separations between the geoid and
the ellipsoid. Heights of GPS positions are computed relative to the
WGS-84 ellipsoid. Using a geoid model, the separation between the
geoid and the ellipsoid is calculated and added to the ellipsoid height,
to compute the elevation of the point above the geoid, often referred to
as height above mean sea level (MSL).
You can incorporate a geoid model into your local site as a Height
Adjustment. The geoid-ellipsoid separations are taken from the geoid
file you choose, then used to display elevations, which are shown on
the screen.
The benefits of this function are that you can display elevations
(which are only as accurate as your geoid model) without having to
calibrate on elevation benchmarks. This is very useful when there is
no local control or benchmarks, as it enables you to work on the
ground rather than on the ellipsoid.
Remember elevations that are derived from geoid models are only as
accurate as the geoid model used to determine them.

C Warning – The Asset Surveyor software references a geoid model with a

grid separation of 10 degrees x 10 degrees for standard derivations of
elevation above mean sea level, which is too coarse for RTK operations.
Use a local site calibration if absolute accuracy is desired.

19 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

Trimble recommends that geoid models be applied when collecting

data over large sites, such as entire cities and towns, and in terrain that
undulates significantly. It is also useful to realize that Local Height
Adjustments can be applied relative to a geoid.

8.2.5 Data Collection

RTK data collection follows the same basic principles as standard
GPS data collection for GIS or Mapping applications, as described in
the Mapping Systems General Reference. RTK differs from standard
GIS data collection with respect to the techniques employed to collect
the positional component of a feature.
Collection techniques can be described in terms of two distinct
methods:
• static
• roving
These terms refer specifically to the way that the GPS antenna is being
physically supported and the way that the positions are being logged.

Static data collection

In the Asset Surveyor software, data can only be collected in static
mode for point features when Apply real-time is set to ‘Yes’ in the
Position filters form, and one of the following is true:
• you are using a Series 4000 receiver and RTK mode is set to
‘On’
• you are using a Site Surveyor 4400 receiver, GPS Total Station
4700, or GPS Total Station 4800, and Log RTK only is set to
‘Yes’

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 197

8 RTK Mapping

Upon beginning a point feature (and setting the antenna height, if

Confirm (Antenna Height) is set to ‘Per feature’), the RTK receiver
automatically enters into static mode. When in static mode, only one
position is logged for a point feature. The position is checked as part
of the static collection technique by comparing it with the positions of
two previous epochs of data (in other words, three epochs in total are
used). If all three epochs of data fall within the precision tolerances
specified, then the position is recorded against the feature and the
position counter in the status bar increases from 0 to 1. The feature
remains open, so the attributes can continue to be collected, until the
feature is ended or canceled.
It is important to minimize antenna movement (or ‘pole wobble’) so
that movement is less than the precision tolerances that have been set.
The finer the precision requirements, the steadier the antenna must be.
Note – Positions logged as static positions ignore the Point feature
logging intervals and Minimum positions settings in the Logging
options form in the Asset Surveyor software.

B Tip – Because you need to hold the antenna as steady as possible,

Trimble recommends that the position is recorded before the feature’s
attributes are recorded. Alternatively, logging can be paused before
beginning the feature, then resumed when the position is ready to be
recorded.

3
If the precision estimate values do not fall within the specified
tolerances, but a position still needs to be logged, press to
override the tolerances. The position with the best static precision
attained while the feature has been opened is then logged.

Roving data collection

With the exception of point features collected in Static mode, all RTK
positions are collected in Roving mode. This includes positions that
are recorded as Not in Feature.
Note – Point features are always logged in Roving mode if Apply real-
time (Corrections) is set to ‘Automatic’.

19 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

Positions logged in Roving mode use the Logging intervals and

Minimum positions settings in the Logging options form in the Asset
Surveyor software. Point features logged in Roving mode will
therefore record and average the positions collected while the feature
is open.
Note – The GPS Pathfinder Office software applies smart averaging
which means that if a feature contains autonomous positions as well
as RTK positions then the autonomous positions are ignored when
computing the averaged positions for the feature.
Positions within line and area features, and positions collected as Not
in Feature, which are required to be collected as RTK positions, are
only logged if the estimated precision for those positions falls within
the RTK Roving Precision Tolerances set in the Position filters form.

8.3 Before You Begin

Before you begin your data collection in the field, there are a number
of factors that you need to consider to ensure smooth operation.

Moving the base station

If your roving receiver moves outside the range of the base station,
you may want to move the base station to a new location. Make sure
that each new base coordinate is in the same terms as the initial base
coordinate. That is, make sure that they are referenced to the same
coordinate system and a that control survey has been conducted to
ensure that all base coordinates have their relative errors reduced with
reference to each another.
Note – When using multiple base stations for a single data collection
project, Trimble recommends that a qualified surveyor be employed to
conduct a control survey of the base station reference positions.
Coordinates published by a reliable source and coordinates
determined by control surveys should be homogeneous.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 199

8 RTK Mapping

If subsequent base coordinates are not in the same terms, you will
need to regard data associated with each base as a separate project.
That is, data collected in terms of one base station cannot be assumed
to be accurate with respect to data collected in terms of a second base
station.

Extending base station coverage with radio repeaters

You can extend the range of a base station by using radio repeaters to
rebroadcast the base signal over a wider area. For more information on
radio repeaters, see Radio repeaters, page 203.

8.3.1 Setting Up a Base Station

Planning is important if you want to collect data successfully. Before
commencing data collection, plan a field methodology that enables
you to successfully achieve the goals of the data collection process.
You must start the base receiver before the roving receiver. If different
field crews set up the base and roving receivers, the roving crew must
be sure that the base has been started before they start to collect
features. Obviously, radio corrections are not available until the base
is started. It is a good idea to plan a schedule before leaving the office
and use walkie-talkie radios or mobile phones to communicate
between the base and rover crews.

20 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

Selecting a site for the base station

When selecting a site for the base station, it is important to consider
the following factors:
• The base station should be positioned in an environment that is
free of multipath, has minimal sources of radio interference, and
has a clear and uninterrupted view of the sky. If possible, the
base station should be at the approximate elevation of the
rovers.
• Make sure that the area you want to map is entirely within range
of the base radio. If it is not, you can place radio repeaters in
order to gain full site coverage. Alternatively, you could move
your base station to different locations throughout your data
collection session, but ensure that these locations are
homogeneous, that is, that they are from the same control
network.
• Ensure that a reasonably clear line of sight is maintained
between the base and rover radios, although this depends on the
radios being used. Try to keep the base antenna as high as
possible.
When you set up a base station, it is important that you know the
coordinates of the reference position as accurately as possible. The
reference position is usually a definable point, such as an existing
survey mark. Every ten meters of error in a base station coordinate can
introduce up to 1 ppm scale error for every rover position that is
observed relative to the base station (based on distance between the
base and rover antennas).
There are several recognized methods that you can use to determine
base station coordinates (in descending order of accuracy):
• published or precisely-determined coordinates
• coordinates derived using a reliable differential (RTCM)
broadcast
• an autonomous position generated by the receiver

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 201

8 RTK Mapping

Note – Although local coordinates can be keyed in for the reference

positions, these are transformed by the field software to be in terms of
WGS-84. If accurate WGS-84 coordinates are available, then you can
use these in preference to local coordinate values.

B Tip – In the U.S., NAD83 coordinates are equivalent to WGS-84

coordinates.

C Warning – Although you can use an autonomous position generated by

the receiver, this is a very inaccurate method. Only use it if the data to be
collected is contained within a small area and the data does not need to
be tied in or referenced to an existing set of data.

8.3.2 Equipment Setup and Use

With the RTK system, the way you set up and use the equipment can
have significant effects on the reliability of the data being collected.
This section describes the equipment you need and shows you how to
set it up. Setting up of both the base station and rover is very similar.
For trouble-free hardware integration, use the diagrams provided.
They show you how to connect the GPS receivers, a TSC1 datalogger,
the batteries, and radios.
Note – If you are using a mix of Series 4000 and 4400 receivers,
Trimble recommends that you use the Series 4000 receiver as the base
receiver.

20 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

8.3.3 Radios
Trimble provides a comprehensive range of radio solutions that have
been tested and proven. TRIMTALK radios are powered from the
receiver’s supply using a common data/power cable—receiver and
radio utilize the same power source. This configuration simplifies
battery issues.

C Warning – In some countries there may be legal regulations for the use of
particular radio frequencies. Trimble recommends that you ensure that
you have a legal entitlement to use radios at a particular frequency.

Radio repeaters
Real-time data collection methods rely on trouble-free radio
transmission. Sometimes the conditions or topography of a site
adversely affect radio transmission, resulting in limited coverage.
Occasionally, in these cases, radio repeaters are used to receive the
base transmission and then rebroadcast it on the same frequency.
Trimble provides four radio solutions that you can use with the RTK
system. Table 8.2 lists these radio solutions, and shows the number of
repeaters that you can use with each.
Table 8.2 Radio repeater options

Radio Number of repeaters

TRIMTALK 450 1
TRIMTALK 900 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
TRIMTALK 450S (12 kHz) 1
TRIMTALK 450S (25 kHz) 1 or 2
TRIMMARK 1 – Refer to the TRIMMARK
documentation
Pacific Crest / Satel / Clarion Refer to the manufacturer’s
specifications

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 203

8 RTK Mapping

8.3.4 Antennas
The Series 4000 or Site Surveyor 4400 RTK system comes standard
with two dual frequency, compact L1/L2 geodetic antennas (P/N
16046-10). The base antenna is usually attached to a tripod and the
rover antenna to a range pole.
The antenna of the GPS Total Station 4800 RTK system is integrated
into a self-contained unit.
For all systems it is imperative to accurately measure the height of
both the base and rover antennas, as an error in these measurements
will result in a corresponding error in your final results. This is
especially true with respect to the vertical component of a
three-dimensional position.
The antenna receives GPS signals at the Antenna Phase Center (APC).
You cannot measure directly to the APC as it is inside the plastic
housing. The best way to measure the antenna height is to measure the
vertical height from the survey mark on the ground to a specified part
of the antenna housing. This type of measurement is called an
uncorrected measurement. The Asset Surveyor software then corrects
to the true vertical height to the APC.
When you enter a value for the antenna height, also ensure that you
specify the correct measurement method that was used in the
Measurement Method field. The software then corrects the antenna
height value according to the antenna that you have selected.
Note – If you use a fixed height range pole at the rover, you do not
need to measure it. Simply enter the fixed height in the Antenna height
field and select Vertical as the measure option.
Figure 8.4 shows how to measure the height of an antenna mounted on
a range pole. Alternatively you could be using a fixed height range
pole, in which case the height would be a constant value.

20 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

Measure Correction
to here

Vertical (APC)
Uncorrected Height
Height

Figure 8.4 Measuring the height of a Compact L1/L2 antenna on range

pole

For example, on a Compact L1/L2 antenna, measure to the bottom of

the plastic antenna housing and enter this value as the antenna height,
with Measurement method set to ‘Bottom of antenna mount’. The
software then calculates the APC based on the antenna type you have
selected and, in this case, adds 62.5 mm to the measured value. This
APC height is used to calculate the ground height for points.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 205

8 RTK Mapping

Using a ground plane

Ground planes are usually only used at the base receiver. They reduce
the incidence of multipath. If you use a ground plane, select the option
with ground plane as the antenna type, for example ‘Compact L1/L2
w/GP’. To measure the uncorrected height of the antenna with a
ground plane, measure to the underside of the notch in the ground
plane, as shown in Figure 8.5.

Measure
to this
point

Figure 8.5 Measuring the height of a Compact L1/L2 Antenna with ground
plane

B Tip – Measure the height to three notches around the perimeter of the
ground plane and record the average as the uncorrected antenna height.
This will take into account any errors due to a tripod that has not been
accurately leveled.

20 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

8.3.5 Batteries
The following batteries and accessories come with a Series 4000 or
Site Surveyor 4400 RTK system:
• 12V 10AH battery for powering the base receiver
(P/N 13542-10)
• 12V 2.3AH camcorder batteries for powering the roving
receiver (P/N 17466)
• A camcorder battery cable (P/N 18294). This cable connects
both batteries in series. To utilize both batteries connect the
cable to the port labeled PWR 2&3 on Series 4000 or 4400
receivers. The receiver port auto-switches to the second battery
when the voltage of the first battery falls below the required
level. Even though the two batteries are connected in series,
only one is used at a time.
The following batteries and accessories come standard with a GPS
Total Station 4800 RTK system:
• 6AH battery for powering the base receiver (P/N 32364-00)
• 3 PowerLiTE batteries for powering the roving receiver
(P/N 31030-00)
Note – Radios come with their own batteries, or they are powered
directly from the receiver. The type of battery depends on which radio
solution is purchased.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 207

8 RTK Mapping

If you already own the GPS receivers and batteries, the following
information will help to determine which type of batteries to use:
• When setting up a base receiver, make sure that the chosen
power source can provide an uninterrupted supply for the
duration of the survey. This is particularly important if your
base receiver is normally left unattended. Generally, a 6 AH or
10 AH battery will do, but for some applications a heavy-duty
battery and general purpose battery cable may be the only
reliable option.
• For roving receivers, make sure that the batteries are light
enough to be carried for long periods. Camcorder batteries
provide a reliable supply while adding minimal weight.

8.3.6 Setting Up a Base Station with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section describes how to set up and start an RTK base station,
using the Asset Surveyor software.

Base station assembly: Series 4000 and Site Surveyor 4400

receivers
1. Set the GPS antenna over the ground mark using a tripod, a
tribrach, and a tribrach adapter.
2. Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS receiver port labelled
ANTENNA. Use the N-type to 5-pin lemo cable
(P/N 14553-00), as shown in Figure 8.6.

20 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

4000 or 4400

SC1 datalogger PWR 2&3

Power Supply
PWR-I/O 1

TSC1 data cable

Figure 8.6 RTK base station setup for Asset Surveyor with the Series 4000 and Site
Surveyor 4400 receivers

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 209

8 RTK Mapping

3. Assemble and erect the radio antenna, then connect the radio
antenna to the radio using the cable attached to the antenna, as
shown in Figure 8.7.

TRIMTALK
Radio 450/450S
Antenna

TRIMTALK
900

To Receiver
I/O 2

Figure 8.7 Radio and antenna setup

21 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

4. Connect the radio to the GPS receiver port labeled I/O 2. If you
are using a Trimble radio, use the 7-pin lemo to 5-pin lemo
cable. If you are using a radio provided by a third party, use the
appropriate cable.
5. Connect the power source to the GPS receiver port labeled
PWR 2&3.
If you are using a third-party radio solution, make sure that the radio is
connected to the power source.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 211

8 RTK Mapping

Base station assembly: GPS Total Station 4800

1. Set the 4800 unit over the ground mark using a tripod, a
tribrach, and a tribrach adapter, as shown in Figure 8.8.

Figure 8.8 RTK base station setup for Asset Surveyor with GPS Total
Station 4800

21 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

2. Assemble and erect the radio antenna, then connect the radio
antenna to the radio using the cable attached to the antenna, as
shown in Figure 8.9.

TRIMTALK
Radio 450/450S
Antenna

TRIMTALK
900

To Receiver
Port 3

Figure 8.9 Radio and antenna setup

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 213

8 RTK Mapping

3. Connect the radio to Port 3 on the 4800. If you are using a

Trimble radio, use the 7-pin lemo to 5-pin lemo cable. If you are
using a radio provided by a third party, use the appropriate
cable.
4. If you are using an external power source (that is, a source other
than the lithium ion PowerLiTE battery) connect this source to
Port 2 on the 4800 unit.

Communication settings
It is important to select the correct communication settings for your
base and rover receivers. All communication settings are grouped in
the Communication options menu.

B Tip – Set up and test these settings in the office before you go out in the
field to collect data. Once they are configured correctly, you should not
have to configure them again unless you change your hardware
configuration.

To configure the communications settings:

1. Start the Asset Surveyor software.
2. Select Configuration / Communication options / Real-time
output options.

21 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

The Real-time output options form appears:

3. Set Real-time output mode to ‘On’.

4. Select the type of radio you are using in the Radio type field.
The fields below it, Baud rate, Data bits, Stop bits, and Parity,
are set automatically.
If the type of radio you are using does not appear in the list,

R
select ‘Custom’ in the Radio type field and set the other radio
settings as appropriate.
5. Press the softkey. The RTK protocol form appears:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 215

8 RTK Mapping

6. Select the type of correction record to broadcast in the RTK

record type field. This will depend on whether the rovers using
this base station are all RTK, or a combination of RTK and
real-time differential. By default, ‘CMR’ is selected. For more
information on RTK correction messages, see RTK Correction
Messages, page 190.
7. Connect the TSC1 datalogger to the GPS receiver port labeled
PWR-I/O 1 (Port 1 on the 4800 unit) using the 7-pin lemo to
5-pin lemo cable (P/N 32901). For the 4800, use the 7-pin lemo
to 7-pin lemo cable (P/N 31288).
Note – If you are using a Series 4000 receiver as the base receiver, you
may want to configure and start the base station using the receiver’s
front panel. In this case, there is no need to connect the TSC1
datalogger to the base receiver.
A summary of the recommended settings within the Position filters
form and RTK precision options form, to ensure RTK operation, is
shown in Table 8.3.
Table 8.3 Recommended RTK settings in Asset Surveyor

Command Recommended setting

Apply real-time On
RTK mode (4000 only) On
Log RTK only (4400/4800) Yes
RTK Static precision
Horizontal 0.05m
Vertical 0.05m
RTK Roving precision
Horizontal 0.1m
Vertical 0.15m

21 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

R
To ensure RTK corrections are applied, Apply real-time must be set to
either ‘Yes’ or ‘Auto’. If Apply real-time is set to ‘Auto’, then RTK
static and roving precisions cannot be accessed using the
softkey). This option is directly associated with real-time applications,
whether they are for RTK or differential applications. For more
information on the use of this setting, refer to the TSC1 Asset Surveyor
Software User Guide.
When connected to a Series 4000 receiver, set the RTK mode field to
‘On’ to ensure a centimeter level of precision is achieved. This option
is only available if an RTK capable GPS receiver is connected. If RTK
mode is set to ‘Off’, then the RTK static and roving precisions cannot
be accessed.
Note – RTK precision settings do not apply when Apply real-time is set
to ‘Auto’.
When connected to a Site Surveyor 4400 receiver or GPS Total Station
4800, set the Log RTK only field to ‘Yes’ to ensure a centimeter level
of precision is achieved. This option is only available if an RTK
capable GPS receiver is connected and Apply real-time is set to ‘Yes’.
If Log RTK only is set to ‘No’, then the RTK static and roving
precisions cannot be accessed.
The RTK Static and Roving precision settings are used to specify
tolerances within which the GPS positions must fall before they are
logged. The settings can be selected from a short list of options or
keyed in as a user-defined setting. Static and roving techniques are
discussed more extensively in Data Collection, page 197.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 217

8 RTK Mapping

Starting the base station

When you have assembled the base station, you must configure and
start it. Use the Asset Surveyor software to do this. Alternatively, if
you are using a Series 4000 receiver, you may want to start the base
station directly from the receiver’s front panel. If you choose the latter
option, refer to your Series 4000 documentation for details.
To start the base station using the Asset Surveyor software:
1. Start the Asset Surveyor software.
2. Select Data collection / Create base file.
3. The Antenna options form appears. Enter the antenna height,

\
antenna type, and measurement method. If you are using a
compact L1/L2 antenna with a ground plane, the antenna type is
‘Compact L1/L2 w/GP’. Press when you are done.
Note – Enter an accurate antenna height for the base station. If
the height is inaccurate, RTK data collected with reference to
the base station may be erroneous, especially in terms of the
vertical coordinate. For more information on measuring
antenna heights, see Antennas, page 204.

\
4. The Reference position form appears. Enter the position of the
known point manually, or select a waypoint that is at the correct
position. Press when you are finished.
The Real-time base station status form appears, indicating that
RTK corrections are now being generated by the receiver and
broadcast over the radio-modem link. As a check, you may hear
a regular signal being broadcast from the radio, or a light may
flash to indicate that signals are being broadcast.
5. Detach the TSC1 cable from the back of the base receiver.

21 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

8.3.7 Setting up a Rover with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section describes how to set up a rover unit and start it running
using the Asset Surveyor software.
To set up a roving receiver for RTK data collection, using a Trimble
Series 4000 or 4400 receiver:
1. Use a backpack to carry the GPS receiver and the radio, and
mount the GPS antenna on the range pole.
2. Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS receiver port labelled
ANTENNA. Use the N-type to lemo cable (P/N 14553-00) as
shown in Figure 8.6.
3. Assemble the radio antenna and fix it to the outside of the
backpack. Connect the radio antenna to the radio using the
cable attached to the antenna.
4. Connect the radio to the GPS receiver port labeled I/O 2. Use
the appropriate cable, for a Trimble radio, this is the 7-pin lemo
to 5-pin lemo cable.
5. Connect the power source to the GPS receiver port labeled
PWR 2&3.
6. If you are using a third-party radio solution, make sure that the
radio is connected to a power source.
7. Connect the TSC1 datalogger to the GPS receiver port labeled
PWR-I/O 1. Use the 7-pin lemo to 5-pin lemo cable
(P/N 32901).

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 219

8 RTK Mapping

To set up a roving receiver for RTK data collection, using a Trimble

GPS Total Station 4700:
1. Use a backpack to carry the GPS receiver and the radio, and
mount the GPS antenna on the range pole.
2. Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS receiver port labelled
ANTENNA. Use the N-type to lemo cable (P/N 14553-00) as
shown in Figure 8.6.
3. Assemble the radio antenna and fix it to the outside of the
backpack. Connect the radio antenna to the radio using the
cable attached to the antenna.
4. If you are using an external power source (that is, source other
than the lithium ion PowerLiTE battery) connect this source to
Port 2 on the 4700 unit.
5. If you are using a third-party radio solution, make sure that the
radio is connected to a power source and use the appropriate
cable to connect the radio to Port 3 on the 4700 unit.
6. Connect the TSC1 datalogger to Port 1 on the 4700 unit using
the 7-pin lemo to 7-pin lemo cable (P/N 31288).
To set up a roving receiver for RTK data collection, using a Trimble
GPS Total Station 4800:
1. If you are using an external power source (that is, source other
than the lithium ion PowerLiTE battery) connect this source to
Port 2 on the 4800 unit.
2. If you are using a third-party radio solution, make sure that the
radio is connected to a power source and use the appropriate
cable to connect the radio to Port 3 on the 4800 unit.
3. Connect the TSC1 datalogger to Port 1 on the 4800 unit using
the 7-pin lemo to 7-pin lemo cable (P/N 31288).

22 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

8.4 In the Field

Once you have prepared and configured your equipment, you can go
into the field to collect RTK data.

8.4.1 Starting the Rover

When you have assembled the rover, it must be started in order to
commence data collection. Only start the rover once the base station
has been started. Make sure that you have a clear view of the sky in
order to successfully initialize for RTK. Trimble recommends that you
move around in order to minimize the effects of multipath.
To start the rover:
1. Start the Asset Surveyor software.
2. Select Configuration / GPS rover options / Real-time input
options.
The Real-time input form appears:

3.
4.
In the Choice 1 field, select ‘External source’.
Make sure the Choice 1 field is highlighted and press S .

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 221

8 RTK Mapping

The External source form appears:

5. In the Radio type field, select the type of radio you are using.
If the type of radio you are using does not appear in the list,
select ‘Custom’ in the Radio type field and set the other radio
settings as appropriate.
Note – If you are using a 4800 unit, select the ‘4800 (Internal)’
option in the Radio type field. The Frequency field will then be
made available (instead of the four serial parameter fields),
enabling you to specify the frequency you would like the 4800
unit’s internal radio to operate at.
6. In the Correction type field, select ‘RTK’.
7. In the RTK record type field, select the type of correction record
that is being broadcast for the base station. By default, ‘CMR’ is
selected. For more information, see RTK Correction Messages,
page 190.

M
8. In the Baud rate field, select the baud rate you want the receiver
and radio to communicate at.
9. Press to open the General port settings form, where you
can configure the data bits, stop bits, and parity settings.

22 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

Note – These port settings also apply when transmitting NMEA

or TSIP messages. When you change general port settings for
one of these options, you also change the settings for the other

\
option.
10. Press when you are finished.
The roving receiver begins to perform an on-the-fly (OTF)
initialization. The OTF initialization procedures are indicated in
the status line. When the status line reads RTK=Fixed (or
RTK=Float, if this meets your precision requirements), you can
start to collect RTK data. For more information on fixed and
float solutions, see Table 8.4.
11. Create a new data file, associating the correct data dictionary
with it. Alternatively, reopen an existing data file.
12. Begin collecting data. Collect all the features and associated
attributes.
13. Close the data file, and exit the Asset Surveyor software.

8.4.2 RTK Status in the Asset Surveyor Software

The status of RTK initialization is displayed in the status bar of the
Asset Surveyor software:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 223

8 RTK Mapping

The status bar has two parts in which RTK status information is
displayed. The bottom part of the status bar indicates the current mode
of operation along with messages explaining the status of
initialization. The mode of operation indicates the state of the current
RTK position being sent from the GPS receiver.
Table 8.4 lists the RTK status modes.
Table 8.4 RTK status modes in Asset Surveyor

Mode message Description

Float The receiver is computing Float solutions. Solutions
are precise to better than plus or minus a meter.
Fixed The receiver is computing Fixed solutions. Solutions
are precise to between 2 and 5 cm, depending on
whether you are in roving or static mode.

The top part of the status bar displays precision estimates indicating
the horizontal and vertical precision of the current position as
computed at the phase center of the antenna. The values displayed
here provide a level of quality assurance, which, when monitored
closely, offers information related to the appropriateness for RTK data
collection within the current environment.
For example, as the precision values rise, it is likely that
environmental or satellite conditions are not as ideal for data
collection as when they are low. Use the precision estimate values to
help make judgments with respect to the reliability of a position for
collection.

22 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

8.4.3 Recording Less Accurate Positions if the RTK Radio Link

Fails
At some stage the radio link between your base station and rover may
fail, either because the batteries of the base station receiver or radio
are flat, or due to some interference in the signal. By default, no
positions are logged until the radio link is re-established.
However, if necessary, you can configure the rover to switch to
collecting less accurate positions (the same type of positions that you
would collect using a non-RTK receiver such as the GPS Pathfinder
Pro XR).
To let your roving receiver record positions when the radio link fails,
in the Real-time input form set the Choice 2 field to ‘Use uncorrected
GPS’.
Note – RTK precision settings do not apply when Apply real-time is set
to ‘Auto’.

8.4.4 Recording Non-RTK Data Files

If you do not have access to an RTK base station, or do not want to
collect RTK quality positions, you can still collect data files using an
RTK receiver. The types of positions that you collect are the same as if
you were using a non-RTK receiver such as the Pro XR.
If your roving receiver has the RTCM option installed, you can record
real-time differentially corrected positions as long as you have a radio
link to an RTCM base station. If not, you can collect uncorrected
(autonomous) positions and differentially correct them in the GPS
Pathfinder Office software to obtain positions with submeter accuracy.
To collect real-time, differentially corrected positions, set the Choice 1
field in the Real-time input form to ‘External source’ and set the
Correction type field in the External source form to ‘RTCM’.
Note – The Trimble 4400, 4700, and 4800 receivers always send the
best available positions (that is, RTK positions will be sent if
available.)

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 225

8 RTK Mapping

8.4.5 Using RTK and Non-RTK Rovers with the Same Base
Station
You may have several field crews collecting data at the same time.
Even if not all of them are using RTK receivers, they can all use the
same base station. To do this you need to configure the base station to
transmit RTCM 2.1 messages instead of CMR messages. Note that
you must have the RTCM option installed on your base receiver in

R
order to do this.
To allow the base station to service both RTK and non-RTK rovers,
open the RTK protocol form (press the softkey in the Real-time
output options form) and set the RTK record type field to ‘RTCM 2.1’.
Note – If you are using one or more Series 4000 receivers as rovers,
the RTK record type setting of the rovers must match the base setting.
Follow the above instructions for each rover using a 4000 receiver.

8.5 Back in the Office

For information on how to transfer your data from the datalogger to
your office PC, see Transferring Data from the Datalogger, page 142.
Once you have transferred your data, you can view, query, and export
your data using the GPS Pathfinder Office software. This section
explains how to identify RTK positions, display precision estimates,
and export your RTK data.

22 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

8.5.1 RTK Positions in the GPS Pathfinder Office Software

An individual position can be queried in the GPS Pathfinder Office
software using the Position Properties dialog:

For more information on using this dialog, refer to the GPS Pathfinder
Office Help.
The Position Properties dialog displays the position status of each
position in the Summary tab. For an RTK position the status is either
RTK Fixed or RTK Float, depending on the solution type achieved.
If you need to confirm that your positions meet your requirements,
review each position in the Position Properties dialog. This dialog
also displays the precision values for each position in the Positions
tab. The precision is 68%, 95%, or 99%, depending on your preferred
setting.
For more information on interpreting and configuring precision
estimate data, refer to the GPS Pathfinder Office Help.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 227

8 RTK Mapping

8.5.2 Exporting RTK Data

The Export utility of the GPS Pathfinder Office software provides
tools for filtering the data exported, based on the quality of the
positions, and for exporting the precision estimate values for each
feature.

Including RTK positions for export

To include all RTK positions within the data set to be exported, select
the check box associated with RTK Float and RTK Fixed in the Filter
by GPS Position Info box. If, for example, you only want RTK
positions to be exported, then ensure all check boxes are cleared
except for the RTK Float and RTK Fixed check boxes. Select only
RTK Fixed if you want only the most precise RTK positions. Positions
derived using an RTK Float solution are less precise than those
derived using an RTK Fixed solution. For more information on Fixed
and Float solutions, see Code and phase measurements, page 189.

Filtering by RTK precision

Because RTK positions can have precision estimates associated with
them, you can filter your RTK data set by identifying precision
tolerances within which the precision of a position must fall before it
will be exported. To enable filtering based on the RTK precision
values, select the Filter by RTK Precision (68% confidence) option on
the Position Filter Criteria dialog.
Note – Select Options / Units (in the GPS Pathfinder Office main
program) to change the confidence level from the default 68%.
Precision estimates associated with RTK positions are displayed using
the confidence level set in the Units dialog of the GPS Pathfinder
Office main program (here 99%). The data can be filtered based on a
combination of the horizontal and vertical precision components of a
position.

22 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 RTK Mapping 8

B Tip – Use Filter by RTK Precision in conjunction with RTK data collected
that had Apply real-time (Corrections) set to ‘Auto’. This type of data is
unable to utilize the RTK precision tolerance settings in the Asset
Surveyor software. The Filter by RTK Precision is therefore able to
provide the same functionality as having Apply Real-time set to ‘Yes’.

The default values for Horizontal Precision and Vertical Precision are
set to ‘Any’. This means that all RTK data will be exported. Data that
has been collected which is not RTK data is not exported if Filter by
RTK Precision is selected.

8.5.3 Exporting RTK Precision Estimates

RTK precision estimates can be exported as attributes for features,
provided that QA/QC data was logged during data collection.
You can choose to export both horizontal and vertical precision
estimates for point features, and both an average and a worst
horizontal and vertical precision estimate for line and area features.
For more information on how these attributes are exported, refer to the
Export utility Help.
To export RTK precision estimates as attributes:
1. Start the Export utility of the GPS Pathfinder Office software.
2. Select the Export Setup that you want to use for exporting of
data, and click Change Setup Options.
3. Select the Attributes tab in the Export Setup dialog.
4. Select the appropriate precision check boxes for point, line, and
area features. RTK precisions are exported for all selected
features.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 229

8 RTK Mapping

23 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

A
A Pro XRS System
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to the GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
■ Cabling diagram
■ Equipment list
■ Activating satellite differential (DGPS) service
A Pro XRS System

A.1 Introduction
The GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS system is an advanced
high-performance geographic data-acquisition tool that uses
differential GPS to provide submeter (50 cm RMS) positional
accuracy on a second-by-second basis. The Pro XRS GPS receiver is
available with 12 channels. The Pro XRS receiver uses Trimble’s The
Choice technology, offering users unsurpassed flexibility in choosing
a source for real-time corrections. This breakthrough technology
combines a GPS receiver, an MSK beacon differential receiver, and a
satellite differential receiver all in a single housing. The beacon
component is a fully-automatic dual channel MSK radiobeacon
receiver for receiving DGPS (Differential GPS) broadcasts
conforming to the IALA (International Association of Lighthouse
Authorities) standard.

A.2 Turning the Receiver On

When the receiver and TSC1 datalogger are connected as shown in the
cabling diagram later in this section, you do not need to explicitly turn
on the GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS receiver. When the TSC1 datalogger
is turned on, the Asset Surveyor software immediately turns on the
Pro XRS receiver and starts communicating with it.
Note – The TSC1 datalogger draws power from the receiver’s battery
when the receiver is turned on.

A.3 Turning the Receiver Off

When you turn off the TSC1 datalogger or explicitly disconnect the
GPS receiver, the Pro XRS receiver is automatically turned off. It
ceases drawing current from the system battery when turned off.

23 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XRS System A

A.4 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
No special configuration of the Pro XRS receiver is required to get the
Asset Surveyor software and Pro XRS receiver to communicate,
beyond the usual GPS rover options that you need to configure in the
Asset Surveyor software. The following section describes the settings
required to obtain submeter accuracy from your Pro XRS receiver.

A.5 Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Pathfinder

Pro XRS
The following sections outline the operational aspects specific to the
GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS system.

A.5.1 < 50 cm Accuracy

To achieve postprocessed accuracy with the Pro XRS receiver of
better than 50 cm (RMS) +1 ppm times the distance between the base
station and the rover, you must have the appropriate EVEREST
firmware installed on the receiver, and use the following Position
filters configuration settings in the Asset Surveyor software. Table A.1
lists the recommended settings.
Table A.1 Recommended settings

Setting Recommended value

Position mode Overdet. 3D or Manual 3D
PDOP mask 6.0 or less
SNR mask 6 or more
Elevation mask 15 degrees or more

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 233

A Pro XRS System

You must also be using a base station which is logging or transmitting

(in RTCM messages) synchronized measurements, and which is
equipped with an EVEREST capable Pro XR, Pro XRS, 4600LS, Site
Surveyor 4400, GPS Total Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800 or
Series 4000 GPS receiver. Your roving receivers must be within 500
km of your base station.
Note – Using receivers without the appropriate EVEREST firmware
installed results in a degradation in accuracy.

A.5.2 RTCM Input

The Pro XRS receiver supports RTCM Version 2 input. Connect your
RTCM link directly to the cable labeled ‘RTCM’.
The Pro XRS receiver with integrated Beacon/GPS antenna receives
and demodulates MSK DGPS radiobeacon signals from radiobeacon
transmission stations (for example, USCG). No special configuration
is required to receive these signals.
The Pro XRS receiver extends the use of real-time differential
corrections to many areas where other sources of real-time differential
corrections (for example, radiobeacons) are currently unavailable. The
satellite differential receiver requires a subscription to a differential
service and provides multiple vendor support.
A built-in virtual reference station (VRS) permits the satellite
corrections to be uniformly associated with the increasing distance
from the fixed reference stations. For more information on the
Pro XRS GPS receiver, refer to the Pro XR/XRS Receiver Operation
Manual.

23 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XRS System A

A.5.3 RTCM Output

The Pro XRS receiver supports RTCM output as a receiver firmware
option. The Asset Surveyor software can configure and control a real-
time base station provided the receiver is a Pro XL, Pro XR, Pro XRS,
Series 4000, Site Surveyor 4400, GPS Total Station 4700, or GPS
Total Station 4800 and has the appropriate firmware option installed.
The Pro XRS receiver can be operated as an Unattended Real-time
Base Station without a datalogger if you have the appropriate cable.
The Unattended Real-time Base Station power cable (P/N 32247)
supplies power to the Pro XRS receiver on Port B so that you may
remove the datalogger when using the Pro XRS receiver as an
Unattended Real-Time Base Station. Contact your local Trimble sales
office to order this accessory.
If you require the data for postprocessed differential correction, you
must have the TSC1 datalogger connected to the Pro XRS base station
at all times.
If you are using a Trimtalk™ 450, 450S, or 900, a Trimmark™ I or II,
or a new Pacific Crest RFM96W with the Pro XRS receiver you must
purchase the RTCM OUT cable (P/N 32871) which connects to the
Pro XRS receiver on Port A, replacing the NMEA/RTCM cable (P/N
30232-00). If you are using an old Pacific Crest RFM96W with the
Pro XRS receiver you must purchase the RTCM OUT cable (P/N
33346). The RTCM OUT cable has a Lemo connector on the other end
for connection to the radios listed above.
Note – A Lemo adapter cable, supplied by Pacific Crest, is required to
connect the RTCM OUT cable (P/N 32871) to the RFM96W radio.
If you are using a non-Trimble radio with the Pro XRS receiver, you
must have your own cable to connect from your radio to the supplied
NMEA/RTCM cable in Port A.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 235

A Pro XRS System

A.5.4 Overdetermined Positions

The Pro XRS receiver supports the computation of overdetermined
GPS positions.

A.5.5 Carrier Phase Mode

The Pro XRS receiver can be operated in carrier phase mode. You
enable carrier phase mode from GPS rover options / Logging options.
If you are using the integrated GPS/Beacon/Satellite antenna
(P/N 33580-50), then ‘Integrated GPS/Beacon/Sat DGPS’ must be
selected from the Type field menu in the Antenna options form. If you
are using a compact dome antenna, then ‘Compact Dome’ must be
selected.
Alternatively, you can enter the part number straight off the antenna
itself (that is, for the ‘Integrated GPS/Beacon/Sat DGPS’, you would
select P/N 33580-50, or for the Compact Dome, you would select
P/N 16741- 00).

A.5.6 PPRT Positions (Postprocessed Real-Time)

The Pro XRS receiver can be configured to collect PPRT positions,
enabling the user to differentially correct real-time collected data.

A.5.7 Receiver Outputs

The Pro XRS receiver supports TSIP and NMEA output. It also
supports (without any need for configuration of the Asset Surveyor
software) 1 PPS output.

23 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Figure 1: tdc2set.eps
 Pro XRS System A

A.6 Cabling Diagram

In order to use the Asset Surveyor software with a GPS Pathfinder
Pro XRS receiver, connect up the system as shown in Figure A-1.

9
1

3 6

1 P/N 33580-50 Integrated GPS/Beacon/Satellite antenna

2 P/N 22628 Antenna cable
3 P/N 33302-50 12-channel Pro XRS receiver
4 P/N 17466 Camcorder batteries
5 P/N 30232-00 NMEA/RTCM cable
6 P/N 30231-00 Data/Power cable
7 P/N 24333 Dual Battery cable
8 P/N 32287-00 TSC1 data cable
9 TSC1 datalogger

Figure A.1 Cabling for the GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS receiver

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 237

A Pro XRS System

A.7 Equipment List

Table A.2 lists the equipment that can be used when operating a GPS
Pathfinder Pro XRS receiver in conjunction with the Asset Surveyor
software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table A.2 Full equipment list

Part name Part number

Backpack Assembly for Pro XRS System with TSC1 31446-27
Integrated GPS/Beacon/Satellite antenna 33580-50
3 x 1/16" antenna spacing plate 18375
1 foot range pole (x3) 31165
6 inch range pole 31166
GPS Pathfinder pouch belt for accessories 13274
Pro XRS hard travel case 31789-00
RTCM output cable 32871
Unattended real-time base station power cable 32247
External sensor cable 14284

23 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XRS System A

A.8 Activating Satellite Differential (DGPS) Service

The following sections provides step-by-step instructions on
activating the satellite DGPS component of your Pro XRS GPS
receiver.

A.8.1 Activating the OmniSTAR Satellite DGPS Service

To activate the OmniSTAR satellite differential service, perform the
following steps:

Step 1 – Prepare the Pro XRS GPS receiver

1. Connect Asset Surveyor to the Pro XRS receiver.
2. Open the Receiver status form from the Main menu. Write
down the OmniSTAR ID as displayed.

Step 2 – Call OmniSTAR

Tell OmniSTAR:
1. Your location (for example, Sunnyvale, California, USA).
2. The OmniSTAR ID you copied from the OmniSTAR ID field in
the Receiver status form.
OmniSTAR will:
3. Tell you the OmniSTAR satellite and frequency for your local
area.
4. Give you a 24-digit activation code, or advise you that on-air
activation will be implemented.
Note – For on-air activation to be successful you must
configure the Asset Surveyor software for OmniSTAR activation
and be receiving the appropriate OmniSTAR satellite signal, as
described below in Step 3, before OmniSTAR initiates the
activation.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 239

A Pro XRS System

5. Place you on an activation verification list.

Note – Phone numbers and further details on how to access the
Fugro-OmniSTAR service are contained in the OmniSTAR booklet that
accompanies this product.

Step 3 – Configure the Pro XRS GPS receiver

1. Connect Asset Surveyor to the Pro XRS receiver and begin
tracking GPS satellites with a clear view of the sky.
2. Open the Real-time input form (select Configuration/GPS rover
options/Real-time input).
3.
4. With this Choice field highlighted, press S
Set one of the Choice fields to ‘Integrated satellite’.
to open the
Integrated satellite form, where you can configure this real-
time source.
5. Set the Service provider field to ‘OmniSTAR’.
6. Enter the satellite you want to receive corrections from in the
Satellite field. The Frequency and Data rate fields are

\
automatically set once the Satellite field has been configured.
7. Press .
8. The message Do you have a 24-digit code to enter? appears. Do one of

y
the following:
– if OmniSTAR has supplied you with a 24-digit activation

n
code, press the softkey, and then proceed to step 8
– to enter the selected configuration and start the on-air
activation process, press the softkey
9.
Activation code entry form and press
process.
\
Enter the 24-digit code you received from OmniSTAR into the
to start the activation

24 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XRS System A

C Warning – Make sure that the 24-digit code is typed correctly.

Typographic errors will prevent successful activation.

Step 4 – Wait 45 minutes

Wait up to 45 minutes for the activation process to complete.
Note – If the activation process does not complete within 45 minutes,
call Fugro-OmniSTAR and report your problem.
Note – The 45 minute wait period is for activation only. Once
activated, OmniSTAR corrections begin less than 15 seconds after
configuring the Pro XRS receiver to receive them.

A.8.2 Activating the Racal-LandStar Satellite DGPS Service

To activate the Racal-LandStar satellite differential service, perform
the following steps:

Step 1 – Prepare the Pro XRS GPS receiver

1. Connect Asset Surveyor to the Pro XRS receiver and begin
tracking GPS satellites with a clear view of the sky.
2. Open the Receiver status form from the Main menu. Write
down the LandStar ID as displayed.

Step 2 – Call Racal-LandStar

Tell Racal-LandStar:
1. Your location (for example, Sunnyvale, California, USA).
2. The LandStar ID you copied from the LandStar ID field in
Receiver status.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 241

A Pro XRS System

Racal-LandStar will:
3. Tell you the LandStar satellite and frequency for your local
area.
4. Place you on an activation verification list.
Note – Phone numbers and further details on how to access the
Racal-LandStar service are contained in the LandStar booklet that
accompanies this product.

Step 3 – Configure the Pro XRS GPS receiver

1. Open the Real-time input form (select Configuration/GPS rover
options/Real-time input).
2.
3. With this Choice field highlighted, press S
Set one of the Choice fields to ‘Integrated satellite’.
to open the
Integrated satellite form, where you can configure this real-
time source.
4. Set the Service Provider field to ‘LandStar’.
5. Enter the satellite you want to receive corrections from in the
Satellite field. The Frequency field is automatically set once the
Satellite field is configured.
6. Set the Station preference field to ‘Virtual’ or ‘Closest’,

\
depending on your requirements.
7. Press to start the activation process.

Step 4 – Wait 45 minutes

Wait up to 45 minutes for the activation process to complete.
Note – If the activation process is not completed within 45 minutes,
call Racal-LandStar and report your problem.
Note – The 45 minute wait period is for activation only. Once
activated, Racal-LandStar corrections begin less than 15 seconds
after configuring the Pro XRS receiver to receive them.

24 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

B
B Pro XR System
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to the GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
■ Cabling diagram
■ Equipment list
B Pro XR System

B.1 Introduction
The GPS Pathfinder Pro XR system is an advanced high-performance
geographic data-acquisition tool that uses differential GPS to provide
submeter (50 cm RMS) positional accuracy on a second-by-second
basis. The Pro XR GPS receiver is available with either 8 or 12
channels. The Pro XR receiver has a fully-automatic dual channel
MSK radiobeacon receiver for receiving DGPS (Differential GPS)
broadcasts conforming to the IALA (International Association of
Lighthouse Authorities) standard.

B.2 Turning the Receiver On

When the Pro XR receiver and TSC1 datalogger are connected as
shown in the cabling diagram later in this section, there is no need to
explicitly turn on the GPS Pathfinder Pro XR receiver; when the TSC1
datalogger is turned on the Asset Surveyor software immediately turns
on the Pro XR and starts communicating with it.
Note – The TSC1 datalogger draws power from the receiver’s battery
when the receiver is turned on.

B.3 Turning the Receiver Off

When you turn off the TSC1 datalogger or explicitly disconnect the
GPS receiver, the Pro XR receiver is automatically turned off. It
ceases drawing current from the system battery when turned off.

24 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XR System B

B.4 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
No special configuration of the Pro XR receiver is required to get the
Asset Surveyor software and Pro XR to communicate, beyond the
usual GPS rover options that you need to configure in the Asset
Surveyor software. The following section describes the settings
required to obtain submeter accuracy from your Pro XR receiver.

B.5 Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Pathfinder

Pro XR
The following sections outline the operational aspects specific to the
GPS Pathfinder Pro XR system.

B.5.1 <50 cm Accuracy

To achieve accuracy with the receiver of better than 50 cm (RMS)
+1ppm times the distance between the base station and the rover, you
must have the appropriate EVEREST firmware installed on the
receiver, and use the following GPS rover options configuration
settings in the Asset Surveyor software. Table B.1 lists the
recommended settings.
Table B.1 Recommended settings

Setting Recommended value

Position mode Overdet. 3D or Manual 3D
PDOP mask 6.0 or less
SNR mask 6 or more
Elevation mask 15 degrees or more

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 245

B Pro XR System

You must also be using a base station which is logging or transmitting

(in RTCM messages) synchronized measurements, and which is
equipped with an EVEREST capable Pro XR, Pro XRS, 4600LS, Site
Surveyor 4400, GPS Total Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800 or
Series 4000 GPS receiver. Your roving receivers must be within
500 km of your base station.
Note – Using receivers without the appropriate EVEREST firmware
installed results in a degradation in accuracy.

B.5.2 RTCM Input

The Pro XR receiver supports RTCM Version 2 input. Connect your
RTCM link directly to the cable labeled ‘RTCM’.
The Pro XR receiver with integrated Beacon/GPS antenna receives
and demodulates MSK DGPS radiobeacon signals from radiobeacon
transmission stations (for example, USCG). No special configuration
is required to receive these signals.

B.5.3 RTCM Output

The Pro XR receiver supports RTCM output as a receiver firmware
option. The Asset Surveyor software can configure and control a
real-time base station provided the receiver is a Pro XL, Pro XR,
Pro XRS, Series 4000, Site Surveyor 4400, GPS Total Station 4700 or
GPS Total Station 4800 and has the appropriate firmware option
installed.
The Pro XR receiver can be operated as an Unattended Real-Time
Base Station without a datalogger if you have the appropriate cable.
The Unattended Real-Time Base Station power cable (P/N 32247)
supplies power to the Pro XR receiver on Port B so that you may
remove the datalogger when using the Pro XR as an Unattended
Real-Time Base Station. Contact your local Trimble sales office to
order this accessory.

24 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XR System B

If you require the data for postprocessed differential correction, you

must have the TSC1 datalogger connected to the Pro XR base station
at all times.
If you are using a TRIMTALK™ 450, 450S, or 900, a TRIMMARK™
I or II, or a Pacific Crest RFM96W with the Pro XR you must
purchase the RTCM OUT cable (P/N 32871) which connects to the
Pro XR on Port A, replacing the NMEA/RTCM cable (P/N 30232-00).
The RTCM OUT cable has a Lemo connector on the other end for
connection to the radios listed above.
Note – A Lemo adapter cable, supplied by Pacific Crest, is required to
connect the RTCM OUT cable (P/N 32871) to the RFM96W radio.
If you are using a non-Trimble radio with the Pro XR, you must have
your own cable to connect from your radio to the supplied
NMEA/RTCM cable in Port A.

B.5.4 Carrier Phase Mode

The Pro XR receiver can be operated in carrier phase mode. You
enable carrier phase mode from GPS rover options / Logging options.
If you are using the integrated GPS/Beacon antenna (P/N 29653-00),
then ‘Integrated GPS/Beacon’ must be selected from the Type field
menu in the Antenna options form. If you are using a compact dome
antenna, then ‘Compact Dome’ must be selected.
Alternatively, you can enter the part number straight off the antenna
itself (that is, for the Integrated GPS/Beacon antenna, you would
select P/N 29653-00, or for the Compact Dome, you would select
P/N 16741-00).

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 247

B Pro XR System

B.5.5 Overdetermined Positions

The Pro XR receiver supports the computation of overdetermined
GPS positions.

B.5.6 PPRT Positions (Postprocessed Real-Time)

The Pro XR receiver can be configured to collect PPRT positions,
enabling you to differentially correct real-time collected data.

B.5.7 Receiver Outputs

The Pro XR receiver supports TSIP and (in firmware version 2.07 and
later) NMEA output. It also supports (without any need for
configuration of the Asset Surveyor software) 1 PPS output.

24 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Figure 1: tdc2set.eps
 Pro XR System B

B.6 Cabling Diagram

In order to use the Asset Surveyor software with a GPS Pathfinder
Pro XR receiver, connect the system as shown in Figure B.1.

9
1

3 6

1 P/N 29653-00 Integrated GPS/Beacon antenna

2 P/N 22628 Antenna cable
3 P/N 29654-00 8-channel Pro XR receiver or
P/N 29654-10 12-channel Pro XR receiver
4 P/N 17466 Camcorder batteries
5 P/N 30232-00 NMEA/RTCM cable
6 P/N 30231-00 Data/Power cable
7 P/N 24333 Dual Battery cable
8 P/N 32287-00 TSC1 data cable
9 TSC1 datalogger

Figure B.1 Cabling for the GPS Pathfinder Pro XR receiver

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 249

B Pro XR System

B.7 Equipment List

Table B.2 lists the equipment that you can use in the field when
operating a GPS Pathfinder Pro XR receiver in conjunction with the
Asset Surveyor software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table B.2 Equipment list

Part name Part number

Backpack Assembly for Pro XR System with TSC1 31446-27
Integrated GPS/MSK Beacon antenna 29653-00
3 x 1/16" antenna spacing plate 18375
1 foot range pole (x3) 31165
6 inch range pole 31166
GPS Pathfinder pouch belt for accessories 13274
Pro XR hard travel case 13000-50
RTCM output cable 32871
Unattended real-time base station power cable 32247
External sensor cable 14284

25 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

C
C Pro XL System
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to the GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
■ Cabling diagram
■ Equipment list
C Pro XL System

C.1 Introduction
The GPS Pathfinder Pro XL™ system is based around a
high-performance GPS receiver employing Trimble’s Maxwell
Technology. The Pro XL GPS receivers have either 8 or 12 channels,
and provide differentially corrected C/A code positions accurate to
better than one meter on a second-by-second basis.

C.2 Turning the Receiver On

When the receiver and TSC1 datalogger are connected as shown in the
cabling diagram later in this section, there is no need to explicitly turn
on the GPS Pathfinder Pro XL receiver; when the TSC1 datalogger is
turned on the Asset Surveyor software immediately turns on the
Pro XL and starts communicating with it.
Note – The TSC1 datalogger draws power from the receiver’s battery
when the receiver is turned on.

C.3 Turning the Receiver Off

When you turn off the TSC1 datalogger, or explicitly disconnect the
GPS receiver, the Pro XL receiver is automatically turned off. It
ceases drawing current from the system battery when turned off.

C.4 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
No special configuration of the Pro XL receiver is required to get the
Asset Surveyor software and Pro XL receiver to communicate beyond
the usual GPS rover options that you need to configure in the Asset
Surveyor software. The following section describes the settings
required to obtain submeter accuracy from your Pro XL receiver.

25 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XL System C

C.5 Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Pathfinder

Pro XL
The following sections outline the operational aspects specific to the
GPS Pathfinder Pro XL system.

C.5.1 Submeter Accuracy

To achieve accuracy with the Pro XL receiver of better than 1 meter
(RMS) +2 ppm times the distance between the base station and the
rover, you must use the following GPS rover options configuration
settings in the Asset Surveyor software.
You must also be using a base station which is logging or transmitting
(in RTCM messages) synchronized measurements, and which is
equipped with a Pro XL, Pro XR, Pro XRS, 4600LS, Site Surveyor
4400, GPS Total Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800 or Series 4000
GPS receiver. Your roving receivers must be within 200 km of your
base station. Table C.1 lists the recommended settings.
Table C.1 Recommended settings

Setting Recommended value

Position mode Overdet. 3D or Manual 3D
PDOP mask 4.0 or less
SNR mask 6 or more
Elevation mask 15 degrees or more

C.5.2 RTCM Input

The Pro XL receiver supports the RTCM input. Both RTCM version 1
and RTCM version 2 are supported. Connect your RTCM link directly
to the cable labeled ‘RTCM’.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 253

C Pro XL System

C.5.3 RTCM Output

The Pro XL receiver supports RTCM output as a non-standard
receiver firmware option. The Asset Surveyor software can configure
and control a real-time base station, provided the receiver is a Pro XL,
Pro XR, Pro XRS, Series 4000, Site Surveyor 4400, GPS Total Station
4700 or GPS Total Station 4800 and has the appropriate firmware
option installed. Connect your RTCM output link directly to the cable
labeled ‘RTCM’.

C.5.4 Overdetermined Positions

The Pro XL receiver supports the computation of overdetermined GPS
positions.

C.5.5 Carrier Phase Mode

The Pro XL receiver can be operated in carrier phase mode. You
enable carrier phase mode from GPS rover options / Logging options.

C.5.6 Receiver Outputs

The Pro XL receiver supports TSIP and (in firmware version 2.07 and
later) NMEA output. It also supports (without any need for
configuration of the Asset Surveyor software) 1 PPS output.

25 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Pro XL System C

C.6 Cabling Diagram

To use the Asset Surveyor software with a GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
receiver, connect the system as shown in Figure C.1.

6
3
2

1 P/N 16741-00 Compact Dome antenna

2 P/N 17466 Camcorder batteries x2
3 P/N 24333 Dual battery cable
4 P/N 17515-01 Antenna cable
5 P/N 17664-40 TSC1/Pro XL multiport cable
6 P/N 22850-00 12-channel Pro XL receiver or
P/N 22850-10 8-channel Pro XL receiver
7 P/N 32287-00 TSC1 Data/Power cable
8 TSC1 datalogger

Figure C.1 Cabling for the GPS Pathfinder Pro XL receiver

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 255

Figure 1: proxltdc.eps
C Pro XL System

C.7 Equipment List

Table C.2 lists the equipment that you can use in the field when
operating a GPS Pathfinder Pro XL receiver in conjunction with the
Asset Surveyor software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table C.2 Equipment list

Part name Part number

Compact dome antenna 16741-00
Magnetic mount 12920-00
3 x 1/16" antenna spacing plate 18375
2 foot range pole 24287
Quick release adapter 19847
Quick release 19493
Vehicle power to TA3-F (battery adapter) 12918-00
GPS Pathfinder pouch belt for accessories 13274
Pro XL hard travel case 13000-30

25 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Figure 1: proxlfs2.eps
 APPENDIX

D
D Series 4000
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to Series 4000 GPS receivers
■ Cabling diagram
■ Equipment list

4000gps.bmp
D Series 4000

D.1 Introduction
The Trimble Series 4000 family of high-precision GPS receivers are
designed primarily for land survey applications, where they can be
used to obtain very high accuracy (in the millimeter range) using
Control Survey and RTK techniques.
The Series 4000 GPS receivers also provide submeter accuracy when
used for GIS data collection. Using a Trimble GIS Surveyor system
(with EVEREST capable Series 4000 receivers as both the base
station and rover) you can achieve accuracies of less than 50
centimeters with just a few measurements.
The Series 4000 receivers have a different internal architecture to the
GPS Pathfinder receivers, as befits their optimization for land survey
applications. The picture below shows the front panel of the Series
4000 receivers:

When used in conjunction with an Asset Surveyor system, there are a

number of minor differences between the behavior of a Series 4000
receiver and that of a GPS Pathfinder receiver.
For Maxwell Technology Series 4000 GPS receivers with the
EVEREST firmware option installed (for example, the 4000SSE,
4000SE System Surveyor II and 4000SSi), the postprocessed
differentially corrected accuracy (CEP) is specified as 50 cm +1 ppm,
subject to the following conditions: at least five satellites, PDOP less
than four, a base station with the EVEREST firmware installed, and a
baseline length of less than 1,000 km.

25 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Series 4000 D

For Maxwell Technology Series 4000 GPS receivers (for example, the
4000SSE, 4000SE System Surveyor II and 4000SSi), the
postprocessed differentially corrected accuracy (CEP) is specified as
submeter, subject to the following conditions: at least five satellites,
PDOP less than four, a GIS Surveyor Base Station, and a baseline
length of less than 200 km.
For older non-Maxwell 4000SE receivers, the postprocessed
differentially corrected accuracy (CEP) is specified as one to three
meters.

D.2 Turning the Receiver On

The Asset Surveyor software cannot turn on a Series 4000 GPS
receiver; you must turn on the Series 4000 receiver by pressing the
[POWER] button in the lower-right corner of the receiver’s front panel.
When a Series 4000 receiver is turned on, it may first display one or
more messages describing how it was previously powered off (if it
suddenly lost power, or ran out of internal memory). For example:

To clear these messages, press the [CLEAR] button on the 4000

receiver’s front panel.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 259

4000on.bmp
D Series 4000

If, when the Series 4000 receiver was last turned off, it was in the
process of recording a survey to its internal memory, then it may
attempt to restart the survey when the receiver is turned back on.
Unless you want to continue recording a survey into the receiver’s
memory, stop the previous survey before proceeding.
Eventually, the Series 4000 receiver displays the following menu on
its screen:

Press the [CLEAR] button to avoid starting a survey logging in the

Series 4000 receiver’s memory and proceed to the receiver’s main
status screen:

Once you have connected the TSC1 datalogger and Series 4000
receiver as shown later in this section, you can turn on the TSC1
datalogger to start the Asset Surveyor software communicating with
the Series 4000 receiver.

26 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

4000strt.bmp

4000main.bmp
 Series 4000 D

If you have changed any of the Series 4000 receiver’s Control settings,
you may have to re-configure the receiver before it can communicate
with the Asset Surveyor software. For more information, see
Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset Surveyor Software,
page 261.
Note – The standard Series 4000 datalogger cabling provides power
to the TSC1 datalogger when it is communicating with the Series 4000
GPS receiver.

D.3 Turning the Receiver Off

When you turn off the TSC1 datalogger or select Disconnect from the
Utilities menu, the Asset Surveyor software turns off the Series 4000
GPS receiver to avoid depleting the receiver’s batteries. The TSC1
datalogger then runs on its own internal batteries.
Note – The TSC1 datalogger cannot turn the Series 4000 receiver
back on. You must turn the receiver on using the [POWER] button on the
receiver’s front panel.

D.4 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
The Asset Surveyor software configures most aspects of the Series
4000 receiver which concern it when communications between the
Asset Surveyor software and the receiver are established.
You usually do not need to configure any settings on the Series 4000
receiver’s front panel.
Note – The earliest version of the Series 4000 receiver navigation
firmware with which the Asset Surveyor software works is version
5.64. If you try to use the Asset Surveyor software with an earlier
version, the Asset Surveyor software displays the message 4000 Nav.
firmware needs updating. In this event, contact your Trimble dealer to
obtain an upgrade to the firmware in your Series 4000 GPS receiver.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 261

D Series 4000

If you have reconfigured the Series 4000 receiver’s serial ports,

input/outputs, and other settings, then the Asset Surveyor software
may be unable to establish communications with the Series 4000
receiver. If a failure to communicate occurs, check the cabling and
retry. If the Asset Surveyor software fails to communicate with the
Series 4000 a second time, use the following procedure to reset the
Series 4000 receiver to Default controls (that is, the default or factory
settings).
1. If necessary, get to the following screen on the Series 4000
receiver’s front panel:

B Tip – Press the [CLEAR] button repeatedly to return to this screen.

2. Press the [CONTROL] button. A screen similar to the following

appears:

26 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

4000frnt.bmp
 Series 4000 D

3. Page through the various control options by pressing MORE

until DEFAULT CONTROLS appears:

Note – The list of controls vary depending on the firmware

options installed in your Series 4000 receiver. The DEFAULT
CONTROLS entry is usually on the last page of controls.
4. Press DEFAULT CONTROLS.
The Series 4000 receiver asks you to confirm that you want to
reset all controls to the factory defaults:

5. Press YES. The Series 4000 receiver resets all controls to their
factory defaults and restarts.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 263

4000ctrl.bmp

4000def.bmp
D Series 4000

The Asset Surveyor software should now be able to

communicate with the Series 4000 receiver. If it cannot, the
most likely cause of the problem is incorrectly connected or
faulty cabling. Check that you have connected the receiver and
TSC1 datalogger as shown in the cabling diagram later in this
section. If the cabling is connected correctly and the Asset
Surveyor software still cannot communicate with the Series
4000 receiver, contact your Trimble Assistance Center to have
the cabling checked.
Note – Some versions of the Series 4000 GPS receiver firmware do not
reset the baud rate and serial parameters when you reset to DEFAULT
CONTROLS. You may have to manually reset the receiver’s Port 1 to
9600-8-ODD-1 before the Asset Surveyor software can communicate
with the GPS receiver.

D.5 Operational Aspects Specific to Series 4000 GPS

Receivers
There are a number of aspects in which the Series 4000 GPS receivers
differ from the GPS Pathfinder receivers.

D.5.1 Real-Time Input

The Series 4000 receiver with the Asset Surveyor software supports
the RTCM version 2.1 and CMR formats for RTK/RTCM input.

D.5.2 Real-Time Output

The Series 4000 receiver with the Asset Surveyor software supports
the RTCM version 2.1 and CMR formats for RTK/RTCM output.

26 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

4000init.bmp
 Series 4000 D

D.5.3 Overdetermined Positions

The Series 4000 receiver can compute overdetermined GPS positions.

D.5.4 Carrier Phase Mode

You cannot operate a Series 4000 receiver in carrier phase mode in
conjunction with the Asset Surveyor software. You can, however, use
a Series 4000 receiver to perform static surveys, provided your
receiver has the appropriate firmware options installed.

D.5.5 Base Station Operation

The Series 4000 GPS receiver may be operated as a real-time base
station in conjunction with the Asset Surveyor software on the TSC1
datalogger as described in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide.
Note – The Series 4000 receiver cannot be used to log a base station
file for the purpose of postprocessed differential correction. It can only
be used as a real-time base station emitting RTK/RTCM corrections.

D.5.6 2D Modes
The Series 4000 receivers operate in overdetermined 2D mode,
meaning that they can use 4 or more satellites to compute a 2D
position. In the Auto 2D/3D context, the receiver typically switches to
computation of 3D positions whenever 4 or more satellites are
available. It does, however, remain in 2D mode if the 3D PDOP
exceeds the configured PDOP mask, but the overdetermined 2D
PDOP is below the PDOP mask.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 265

D Series 4000

D.5.7 Other Configuration Options

Some options that can be configured on GPS Pathfinder receivers are
fixed to specific values by the Series 4000 receivers:
• The SNR mask is fixed at 4.0 by the Series 4000 receivers.
• The PDOP switch is fixed at the same value as the PDOP mask
by the Series 4000 receivers.
• The Dynamics code is fixed at Land by the Series 4000
receivers.
In the Position filters configuration form, these three fields have the
value ‘Unused’ when connected to a Series 4000 GPS receiver. In this
context they cannot be edited.
The maximum PDOP mask which can be set on a Series 4000 GPS
receiver by the Asset Surveyor software is 25.4. If you configure the
PDOP mask in the Asset Surveyor software to a greater value, Asset
Surveyor sets the Series 4000 receiver’s PDOP mask to 25.4.

D.5.8 Receiver Status

When the PDOP value exceeds the configured PDOP mask, the Series
4000 receiver stops supplying an up-to-date VDOP or HDOP value to
the Asset Surveyor software. In this case, these values are shown as
0.0 in the Receiver status form.

D.5.9 Almanacs
The Asset Surveyor software does not record an almanac when
connected to a Series 4000 receiver, and does not send an almanac to
the receiver on startup. The Series 4000 receivers maintain their own
internal almanac to make sure acquisition of satellites is rapid.
In order to obtain an almanac for use in Mission Planning, you can
start a survey on the Series 4000 receiver’s front panel and extract this
data from the receiver’s internal memory as described in RTK for
Mapping and GIS General Reference.

26 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Series 4000 D

D.5.10 Receiver Outputs

Provided the appropriate receiver firmware options have been
installed, a Series 4000 receiver can support ASCII, NMEA, and
1 PPS outputs. All of these are configured from the receiver’s front
panel, and not with the Asset Surveyor software.

D.5.11 Velocities
The velocity values that the Asset Surveyor software logs from a
Series 4000 receiver cannot be differentially corrected.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 267

D Series 4000

D.6 Cabling Diagram

In order to use the Asset Surveyor software with a Series 4000 GPS
receiver, connect the system as shown in Figure D.1.

4
8

7
6

1 P/N 22020-00 Compact L1/L2Antenna

2 P/N 14553-01 Antenna Cable
3 P/N 21000-51 Series 4000 receiver
4 P/N 18827 Radio link
5 P/N 21184 Battery Cable
6 P/N 17466 Camcorder Batteries
7 P/N 32901 TSC1 Data cable
8 TSC1 datalogger

Figure D.1 Cabling for the Series 4000 receiver

26 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Series 4000 D

D.7 Equipment List

Table D.1 lists the equipment that you can use in the field when
operating a 4000SE, 4000SSE, or 4000SSi in conjunction with the
Asset Surveyor software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table D.1 Equipment list

Part name Part number

4000SE, 4000SSE or 4000SSi Various
Backpack with rigid frame 20966
Range pole 18555
Battery cable assembly 21184
4 x 12 V Camcorder batteries 17466
Hard carry case 18607
TSC1 Data cable 32901

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 269

D Series 4000

27 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

E
E Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to the Site Surveyor 4400 receiver
■ Cabling diagram
■ Equipment list
E Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver

E.1 Introduction
The Trimble Site Surveyor 4400 receiver is a low latency, fast update
GPS engine designed to provide centimeter level positioning for
Real-Time Kinematic (RTK) surveys. The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver
features on-the-fly initialization for RTK mapping operations. The
Site Surveyor 4400 also provides differentially corrected C/A code
positions accurate to better than one meter on a second-by-second
basis.

E.2 Turning the Receiver On

Press the large green button on the Site Surveyor 4400 front panel.
After a second, the green LED labeled ‘ON’ turns on.

E.3 Turning the Receiver Off

Hold down the large green button on the Site Surveyor 4400 front
panel for a few seconds. The three LEDs turn off.

E.4 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
No special configuration of the Site Surveyor 4400 receiver is
required in order to use the Asset Surveyor software and Site Surveyor
4400 receiver together beyond the usual GPS rover options that you
need to configure in the Asset Surveyor software. The minimum Site
Surveyor 4400 receiver firmware should be version 2.31. The
minimum Asset Surveyor software should be version 4.00.
The following section describes the settings required to obtain
submeter accuracy from your Site Surveyor 4400 receiver.

27 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver E

E.5 Operational Aspects Specific to the Site Surveyor

4400 Receiver
The following sections outline the operational aspects specific to the
Site Surveyor 4400 receiver.

E.5.1 Submeter Accuracy

If order to achieve accuracy with the Site Surveyor 4400 receiver of
better than 1 meter (RMS) +2 ppm times the distance between the base
station and the rover, you must use the following GPS rover options
configuration settings in the Asset Surveyor software. Table E.1 lists
the recommended settings.
Table E.1 Recommended settings

Setting Recommended value

Position mode Overdet. 3D or Manual 3D
PDOP mask 4.0 or less
SNR mask 6 or more
Elevation mask 15 degrees or more

You must also be using a base station which is logging or transmitting

(in RTCM messages) synchronized measurements, and which is
equipped with a Pro XR, Pro XRS, Pro XL, 4600LS, Site Surveyor
4400, GPS Total Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800 or Series 4000
GPS receiver. Your roving receivers must be within 200 km of your
base station. Finally, if you are performing differential correction by
postprocessing your data, you must use the Differential Correction
utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software suite.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 273

E Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver

E.5.2 Real-Time Input

The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor supports
the RTCM version 2.1 and CMR formats for RTK/RTCM input.

E.5.3 Real-Time Output

The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver supports the RTCM version 2.1 and
CMR formats for RTK/RTCM output. The Asset Surveyor software
can configure and control a real-time base station provided the
receiver has the appropriate firmware option installed.

E.5.4 Overdetermined Positions

The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver supports the computation of
overdetermined 3D GPS positions.

E.5.5 Carrier Phase Mode

The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver receiver cannot be operated in carrier
phase mode.

E.5.6 Receiver Outputs

The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor supports
NMEA output. It also supports (without any need for configuration of
the Asset Surveyor software) 1 PPS output as a non-standard option.

27 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver E

E.5.7 Base Station Operation

The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver may be operated as a real-time base
station in conjunction with the Asset Surveyor software on the TSC1
datalogger as described in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide.
Note – The Site Surveyor 4400 receiver cannot be used to log a base
station file for the purpose of post-processed differential correction. It
can only be used as a real-time base station emitting RTK/RTCM
corrections.

E.5.8 External Sensors

You can use external sensors and laser rangefinders with the Site
Surveyor 4400 receiver and TSC1 datalogger.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 275

E Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver

E.6 Cabling Diagram

In order to use the Asset Surveyor software with a Site Surveyor 4400
receiver, connect the system as shown in Figure E.1.

4
8

7
6

1 P/N 22020-00 Compact L1/L2Antenna

2 P/N 14553-01 Antenna Cable
3 P/N 29887-11 Site Surveyor 4400 receiver
4 P/N 18827 Radio link
5 P/N 21184 Battery Cable
6 P/N 17466 Camcorder Batteries
7 P/N 32901 TSC1 Data cable
8 TSC1 datalogger

Figure E.1 Site Surveyor 4400 receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor

27 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver E

E.7 Equipment List

Table E.2 lists the equipment that you can use in the field when
operating a Site Surveyor 4400 receiver in conjunction with the Asset
Surveyor software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table E.2 Equipment list

Part name Part number

Site Surveyor 4400 29887-11
Backpack with rigid frame 20966
Range pole 18555
Battery cable assembly 21184
4 x 12 V Camcorder batteries 17466
Hard carry case 18607
TSC1 Data cable 32901

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 277

E Site Surveyor 4400 Receiver

27 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

F
F 4600LS Surveyor
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to the 4600LS Surveyor
■ Cabling diagrams
■ Equipment list
F 4600LS Surveyor

F.1 Introduction
The 4600LS Surveyor is based around a high-performance single
frequency GPS receiver. The 4600LS Surveyor provides differentially
corrected C/A code positions accurate to better than one meter, on a
second-by-second basis.

F.2 Turning the Receiver On

Press the large green button on the 4600LS Surveyor control panel.
After a second, the green LED above the light-bulb symbol turns on.

F.3 Turning the Receiver Off

Hold down the large green button on the 4600LS Surveyor control
panel for a few seconds. The three LEDs turn off.

F.4 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
No special configuration of the 4600LS Surveyor is required in order
to use the Asset Surveyor software and 4600LS Surveyor together
beyond the usual GPS rover options that you need to configure in the
Asset Surveyor software. The minimum 4600LS Surveyor firmware
should be version 1.10.
The following section describes the settings required to obtain
submeter accuracy from your 4600LS Surveyor.

28 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 4600LS Surveyor F

F.5 Operational Aspects Specific to the 4600LS

Surveyor
The following sections outline the operational aspects specific to the
4600LS Surveyor.

F.5.1 Submeter Accuracy

To achieve accuracy with the 4600LS Surveyor of better than 1 meter
(RMS) +2 ppm times the distance between the base station and the
rover, you must use the following GPS rover options configuration
settings in the Asset Surveyor software. Table F.1 lists the
recommended settings.
Table F.1 Recommended settings

Setting Recommended value

Position mode Overdetermined 3D or Manual 3D
PDOP mask 4.0 or less
SNR mask 6 or more
Elevation mask 15 degrees or more

You must also be using a base station that is logging or transmitting (in
RTCM messages) synchronized measurements, and that is equipped
with a Pro XR, Pro XRS, Pro XL, 4600LS, Site Surveyor 4400, GPS
Total Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800 or Series 4000 GPS
receiver. Your roving receivers must be within 200 km of your base
station. Finally, if you are performing differential correction by
postprocessing your data, you must use the Differential Correction
utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 281

F 4600LS Surveyor

F.5.2 RTCM Input

The 4600LS Surveyor receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor supports
the RTCM version 2.0 format only.

F.5.3 Overdetermined Positions

The 4600LS Surveyor receiver supports the computation of
overdetermined 3D GPS positions.

F.5.4 Carrier Phase Mode

The 4600LS Surveyor receiver can be operated in carrier phase mode.
You enable carrier phase mode from GPS rover options / Logging
options.
The antenna name must be selected from the Type field in the Antenna
options form, or the antenna part number selected from the Part
number field.

F.5.5 Receiver Outputs

The 4600LS Surveyor with Asset Surveyor does not transmit any
receiver output information.

28 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

No reference (WMF)
 4600LS Surveyor F

F.5.6 Base Station Operation

The 4600LS Surveyor receiver may be operated as a base station in
two different ways.
1. 4600LS Surveyor with TSC1 datalogger. This is operated in the
manner described in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User
Guide.
2. 4600LS Surveyor stand-alone base station. You can operate the
4600LS Surveyor as a stand-alone base station providing that:
– you use the Differential Correction utility in the GPS
Pathfinder Office software when differentially correcting
any rover files using this base data.
– you set the Elevation mask on the rover units to 20° (the
default elevation mask on the 4600LS is 15°).

F.5.7 External Sensors

You can use external sensors and laser rangefinders with the 4600LS
Surveyor receiver and TSC1 datalogger.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 283

No reference (WMF)
F 4600LS Surveyor

F.6 Cabling Diagrams

To use the Asset Surveyor software with a 4600LS Surveyor receiver,
connect the system as shown in Figure F.1, Figure F.2, and Figure F.3.

Figure F.1 4600LS Surveyor with TSC1 Asset Surveyor

28 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

smrr.wmf
 4600LS Surveyor F

Figure F.2 Two-port 4600LS Surveyor receiver with camcorder battery and
TSC1 Asset Surveyor

Note – The TSC1 datalogger always connects to Port 1 on the 4600LS

Surveyor receiver.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 285

sicr.wmf
F 4600LS Surveyor

Radio

Figure F.3 4600LS Surveyor RTCM input configuration with radio, TSC1,
and external power

28 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 4600LS Surveyor F

F.7 Equipment List

Table F.2 lists the equipment that you can use in the field when
operating a 4600LS Surveyor receiver in conjunction with the Asset
Surveyor software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table F.2 Equipment list

Part name Part number

8-Channel 4600LS Surveyor (Single Port) 28615-10
12-Channel 4600LS Surveyor (Single Port) 28615-15
8-Channel 4600LS Surveyor (Dual Port) 28615-20
12-Channel 4600LS Surveyor (Dual Port) 28615-25
TSC1 to 4600LS Y-Cable 32958
Radio to 4600LS Y-Cable 30119
Quick Release Adapter 19847
Quick Release 19493
Camcorder Battery Pouch Kit 28613-00

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 287

F 4600LS Surveyor

28 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

G
G GPS Total Station 4700
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Serial ports
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to the GPS Total Station 4700
■ Cabling diagram
■ Equipment list
G GPS Total Station 4700

G.1 Introduction
The GPS Total Station 4700 system is a fully integrated GPS receiver,
radio modem, radio antenna, and external GPS antenna. The 4700
GPS receiver is a low-latency, fast-update GPS engine designed to
provide centimeter-level positioning for Real-Time Kinematic (RTK)
surveys. It also features on-the-fly initialization for RTK mapping
operations and provides differentially corrected C/A code positions
accurate to better than one meter on a second-by-second basis.
The 4700 receiver tracks GPS satellites on both the L1 and L2
frequencies to provide precise position data for land survey and
mapping applications. The 4700 receiver records GPS data and makes
all raw and computed data available through bi-directional RS-232
ports.

G.2 Serial Ports

There are three serial ports on the GPS Total Station 4700 receiver:
• Port 1 is typically connected to the TSC1 datalogger. (Flow
control only on Port 1.)
• Port 2 is either connected to an external power source or to a
desktop computer.
• Port 3 is for connecting to an external RTK radio.

G.3 Turning the Receiver On

Press the large green button on the 4700 receiver. After a second, the
green LED turns on.

G.4 Turning the Receiver Off

Hold down the large green button on the 4700 receiver for a few
seconds. The LEDs turn off.

29 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 GPS Total Station 4700 G

G.5 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
No special configuration of the GPS Total Station 4700 receiver is
required in order to use the Asset Surveyor software and 4700 receiver
together beyond the usual GPS rover options that you need to
configure in the Asset Surveyor software. The minimum Asset
Surveyor software should be version 4.02.
The following section describes the settings required to obtain
submeter accuracy from your 4700 receiver.

G.6 Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Total

Station 4700
The following sections outline the operational aspects specific to the
4700 receiver.

G.6.1 Submeter Accuracy

To achieve accuracy with the 4700 receiver of better than 1 meter
(RMS) +2 ppm times the distance between the base station and the
rover, you must use the GPS rover options configuration settings in
the Asset Surveyor software listed in Table G.1.
Table G.1 Recommended settings

Setting Recommended value

Position mode Overdetermined 3D or Manual 3D
PDOP mask 4.0 or less
SNR mask 6 or more
Elevation mask 15 degrees or more

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 291

G GPS Total Station 4700

You must also be using a base station which is logging or transmitting

(in RTCM messages) synchronized measurements, and which is
equipped with a Pro XR, Pro XRS, Pro XL, 4600LS, GPS Total
Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800, Site Surveyor 4400 or Series
4000 GPS receiver. Your roving receivers must be within 200 km of
your base station. Finally, if you are performing differential correction
by postprocessing your data, you must use the Differential Correction
utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software suite.

G.6.2 Real-Time Input

The 4700 receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor supports the RTCM
version 2.1 and CMR formats for RTK/RTCM input.

G.6.3 Real-Time Output

The 4700 receiver supports the RTCM version 2.1 and CMR formats
for RTK/RTCM output. The Asset Surveyor software can configure
and control a real-time base station provided the receiver has the
appropriate firmware option installed.

G.6.4 Overdetermined Positions

The 4700 receiver supports the computation of overdetermined 3D
GPS positions.

G.6.5 Carrier Phase Mode

The 4700 receiver cannot be operated in carrier phase mode with the
Asset Surveyor software.

29 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 GPS Total Station 4700 G

G.6.6 Receiver Outputs

The 4700 receiver with Asset Surveyor supports NMEA output. It also
supports (without any need for configuration of the Asset Surveyor
software) 1 PPS output as a non-standard option.

G.6.7 Base Station Operation

The 4700 receiver may be operated as a real-time base station in
conjunction with the Asset Surveyor software on the TSC1 datalogger
as described in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.
Note – The 4700 receiver cannot be used with the Asset Surveyor
software to log a base station file for the purpose of postprocessed
differential correction. When used with the Asset Surveyor software, it
can only be used as a real-time base station emitting RTK/RTCM
corrections.

G.6.8 External Sensors

You can use external sensors and laser rangefinders with the 4700
receiver and TSC1 datalogger.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 293

G GPS Total Station 4700

G.7 Cabling Diagram

To use the Asset Surveyor software with a 4700 receiver, connect the
system as shown in Figure G.1.

Antenna

TSC1 GPS Total Station

4700 receiver

1 2 3 ­
­ 2 3

1 2 3
to external radio

Power supply

Figure G.1 4700 receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor

29 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 GPS Total Station 4700 G

G.8 Equipment List

Table G.2 lists the equipment that you can use in the field when
operating a GPS Total Station 4700 receiver in conjunction with the
Asset Surveyor software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table G.2 Equipment list

Part name Part number

4700 Unit 35846-xx
Rangepole varies
Backpack 35474-00
Antenna cable 14553-01
Micro-centered antenna 33429-00
Radio antenna varies
TSC1 data cable 31288
6 Ah battery 32364-00

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 295

G GPS Total Station 4700

29 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

H
H GPS Total Station 4800
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Switches and indicator LEDs
■ Serial ports
■ Turning the receiver on
■ Turning the receiver off
■ Configuring the receiver to work with the Asset Surveyor software
■ Operational aspects specific to the GPS Total Station 4800
■ Cabling diagram
■ Equipment list
H GPS Total Station 4800

H.1 Introduction
The GPS Total Station 4800 system is a fully integrated GPS receiver,
GPS antenna, radio modem, and radio antenna. The 4800 receiver is a
low-latency, fast-update GPS engine designed to provide
centimeter-level positioning for Real-Time Kinematic (RTK) surveys.
It also features on-the-fly initialization for RTK mapping operations
and provides differentially corrected C/A code positions accurate to
better than one meter on a second-by-second basis.

Figure H.1 4800 receiver

The 4800 unit tracks GPS satellites on both the L1 and L2 frequencies
to provide precise position data for land survey and mapping
applications. The 4800 unit records GPS data and makes all raw and
computed data available through bi-directional RS-232 ports.

29 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 GPS Total Station 4800 H

H.2 Switches and Indicator LEDs

The only operating controls on the 4800 unit are the power ON/OFF
button and three LEDs, as shown in Figure H.2.

Satellite Tracking LED/Low Power Indicator (red)

Data Logging/Memory LED (yellow)

Power LED (green)

On/Off button

Figure H.2 4800 control panel

During typical operation, slow-blinking LEDs indicate normal

operation. Fast-blinking LEDs indicate a condition that may have a
negative effect on the survey or mapping job and may require your
attention. A solid red LED indicates low battery power. LEDs that are
off indicate that no operation is occurring.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 299

H GPS Total Station 4800

H.3 Serial Ports

Figure H.3 shows the ports on the 4800 unit.

Handheld port

External radio
modem port

Power in from lithium ion

PowerLiTE battery

Data transfer and/or Power In

Figure H.3 4800 ports

There are three serial ports:

• Port 1 is typically connected to the TSC1 datalogger. (Flow
control only on Port 1.)
• Port 2 is either connected to an external power source or to a
desktop computer.
• Port 3 is for connecting to an external RTK radio.

30 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 GPS Total Station 4800 H

H.4 Turning the Receiver On

Press the large green button on the 4800 unit. After a second, the green
LED turns on.

H.5 Turning the Receiver Off

Hold down the large green button on the 4800 unit for a few seconds.
The three LEDs turn off.

H.6 Configuring the Receiver to Work with the Asset

Surveyor Software
No special configuration of the GPS Total Station receiver is required
in order to use the Asset Surveyor software and 4800 receiver together
beyond the usual GPS rover options that you need to configure in the
Asset Surveyor software. The minimum Asset Surveyor software
should be version 4.01.
The following section describes the settings required to obtain
submeter accuracy from your 4800 receiver.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 301

H GPS Total Station 4800

H.7 Operational Aspects Specific to the GPS Total

Station 4800
The following sections outline the operational aspects specific to the
4800 receiver.

H.7.1 Submeter Accuracy

To achieve accuracy with the 4800 receiver of better than 1 meter
(RMS) +2 ppm times the distance between the base station and the
rover, you must use the following GPS rover options configuration
settings in the Asset Surveyor software, as shown in Table H.1.
Table H.1 Recommended settings

Setting Recommended value

Position mode Overdetermined 3D or Manual 3D
PDOP mask 4.0 or less
SNR mask 6 or more
Elevation mask 15 degrees or more

You must also be using a base station which is logging or transmitting

(in RTCM messages) synchronized measurements, and which is
equipped with a Pro XR, Pro XRS, Pro XL, 4600LS, GPS Total
Station 4700, GPS Total Station 4800, Site Surveyor 4400 or Series
4000 GPS receiver. Your roving receivers must be within 200 km of
your base station. Finally, if you are performing differential correction
by postprocessing your data, you must use the Differential Correction
utility from the GPS Pathfinder Office software suite.

H.7.2 Real-Time Input

The 4800 receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor supports the RTCM
version 2.1 and CMR formats for RTK/RTCM input.

30 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 GPS Total Station 4800 H

H.7.3 Real-Time Output

The 4800 receiver supports the RTCM version 2.1 and CMR formats
for RTK/RTCM output. The Asset Surveyor software can configure
and control a real-time base station provided the receiver has the
appropriate firmware option installed.

H.7.4 Overdetermined Positions

The 4800 receiver supports the computation of overdetermined 3D
GPS positions.

H.7.5 Carrier Phase Mode

The 4800 receiver cannot be operated in carrier phase mode.

H.7.6 Receiver Outputs

The 4800 receiver with Asset Surveyor supports NMEA output. It also
supports (without any need for configuration of the Asset Surveyor
software) 1 PPS output as a non-standard option.

H.7.7 Base Station Operation

The 4800 receiver may be operated as a real-time base station in
conjunction with Asset Surveyor on the TSC1 datalogger as described
in the TSC1 Asset Surveyor Software User Guide.
Note – The 4800 receiver cannot be used to log a base station file for
the purpose of postprocessed differential correction. It can only be
used as a real-time base station emitting RTK/RTCM corrections.

H.7.8 External Sensors

You can use external sensors and laser rangefinders with the 4800
receiver and TSC1 datalogger.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 303

H GPS Total Station 4800

H.8 Cabling Diagram

To use the Asset Surveyor software with a 4800 receiver, connect the
system as shown in Figure H.4.

1 3

1 4800 receiver P/N varies, depending on options

2 TSC1 Data cable P/N 32901
3 TSC1 datalogger

Figure H.4 4800 receiver with TSC1 Asset Surveyor

30 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 GPS Total Station 4800 H

H.9 Equipment List

Table H.2 lists the equipment that you can use in the field when
operating a 4800 receiver in conjunction with the Asset Surveyor
software running on your TSC1 datalogger.
Table H.2 Equipment list

Part name Part number

4800 Unit Varies, depending on options
4800 Soft case 33849-00
6 Ah battery 32364-00
PowerLiTE pole w/ Composite bipod 34111-00
TSC1 data cable 32901

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 305

H GPS Total Station 4800

30 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

I
I Laser Rangefinders
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Laser Technology Criterion 300 and 400
■ Laser Atlanta ProSurvey 1000
■ Laser Atlanta Advantage
■ LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars
■ MDL LaserAce 300
■ LaserCraft Contour XLR
I Laser Rangefinders

I.1 Introduction
This appendix describes the supported laser rangefinders that can be
used with the Asset Surveyor software.

I.2 Laser Technology Criterion 300 and 400

The Criterion 300 and 400 are both suitable for use with the Asset
Surveyor software as automated offset recording devices. The
Criterion 400 differs from the 300 in that it contains specialized
software for common forestry mensuration operations.

I.2.1 Hardware Specifications

The Criterion 300 and 400 hardware specifications are identical.

Dimensions
The laser itself measures 9 cm × 17 cm × 22 cm (3.5" × 6.5" × 8.5"). It
weighs 2.72 kg (6.0 lbs). The optional yoke (for fitting to a unipod or
tripod) weighs an additional 0.45 kg (1.0 lb). The rechargeable battery
pack weighs 0.91 kg (2.0 lbs), and is typically clipped to a belt or
carried in a backpack.

Laser details
The laser can typically take measurements up to 450 m (1,500 ft) to
most surfaces, and up to 12 km (40,000 ft) if used in conjunction with
a retro-reflector. A foliage filter is available to enhance performance
when shooting through light foliage and undergrowth, up to
approximately 200 m.
The minimum range of the laser is 3 m (10 ft).
The laser is accurate to ±9.1 cm (0.3 ft).

30 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Compass details
An electronic fluxgate compass is used to obtain magnetic azimuth
measurements. This compass works when the unit is tilted at up to 15°
to the horizontal. The compass is rated at ±0.5° under laboratory
conditions. In typical GIS data collection conditions, compass
accuracy is typically around ±1–2°. In environments where magnetic
interference is high (for example, in a vehicle), the compass can be
considerably less accurate.

Inclinometer details
A fluid tilt sensor measures vertical angles, which are used to calculate
the elevation of target points. The sensor is of a damped resistance
fluid type, and can take measurements up to ±60°, accurate to 0.1°.

Powering
The Criterion 300 and 400 rangefinders are powered by a rechargeable
9.6 V NiCd battery. This battery takes approximately 12–14 hours to
charge fully, and the rangefinder can be run for 7.5 hours or more on a
fully-charged battery.

Environmental limitations
The Criterion rangefinder can be used at temperatures ranging
between –30°C and +50°C (–22°F to +122°F). The laser casing is
resistant to light rain (but not immersion) and dust.
The Criterion rangefinder should be treated as precision optical
equipment, and should be handled with care. It withstands reasonable
drop shock, but alignment of the sighting scope should be checked
after dropping.
The rangefinder should always be transported in its hard carry-case.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 309

I Laser Rangefinders

I.2.2 Accessories
The Criterion 300 and 400 laser rangefinders can be used in four
ways:
• As a handheld instrument
• As a handheld instrument with a shoulder rest (stock)
• With the optional yoke and unipod. The unipod includes a
bracket onto which your datalogger may be clipped
• With the optional yoke and a tripod
For most GIS data collection applications, the Criterion rangefinders
are a little too heavy to be carried in one hand, and it is difficult to
operate both a datalogger and handheld laser together. It can also be
difficult to accurately sight on distant objects when supporting the
laser by hand. The best compromise between portability and
operability is usually the yoke/unipod.

I.2.3 Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

The Criterion 300 and 400 laser rangefinders can be purchased with an
optional download cable. The download cable connects to the
Criterion’s battery, and leads to a 7-pin connector.
The 7-pin connector is cabled as shown in Table I.1.
Table I.1 Cable connections

Criterion laser (5-pin Lemo) (7-pin female D type)

5 Ground 5 Ground
4 Transmit 2 Receive
3 Receive 3 Transmit

The 7-pin connector is then plugged into the data cable (P/N 32287),
which can be plugged directly into one of the ports on your TSC1
datalogger.

31 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XRS receiver

If you have a Pro XRS GPS receiver, connect the Criterion laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.1.

Figure I.1 Criterion laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XRS with
TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 311

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XR receiver

If you have a Pro XR GPS receiver, connect the Criterion laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.2.

Figure I.2 Criterion laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XR with
TSC1

31 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XL receiver

If you have a Pro XL GPS receiver, connect the Criterion laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.3.

ESP

Figure I.3 Criterion laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XL with
TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 313

I Laser Rangefinders

I.2.4 Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section provides instructions for configuring the Criterion laser
rangefinder itself. For more information on configuring the Asset
Surveyor software to work with the Criterion laser rangefinder, see
page 321.

Entering Survey mode

The Criterion 300 and 400 laser rangefinders both support a SURVEY
mode of operation. In this mode they take range, azimuth and
inclination measurements and can export these to your TSC1
datalogger.
The following instructions describe the procedure to enter SURVEY
mode.
Note – Each time you turn the Criterion laser rangefinder on, you
must re-enter SURVEY mode.
1. Turn on the Criterion by pressing the POWER button (the
bottom-left button on the back of the unit).
If you have a Criterion 400, the main menu appears with the
TREE entry visible:

TREE

If you have a Criterion 300, the main menu appears with the
HEIGHT entry visible:

HEIGHT

31 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

2. Press the ↑ or ↓ arrow buttons until the SURVEY menu

appears:

SURVEY

3. Press the ENTER button to select the SURVEY menu.

The first entry in the SURVEY menu is the BASIC
MEASUREMENTS operation:

BASIC
MEASUREMENTS

4. Press ENTER again to select BASIC MEASUREMENTS.

The following screen appears:

HD:-------.-- FT
AZ:------.- DEG

Your Criterion is now ready to be used in conjunction with a

datalogger running the Asset Surveyor software, as described
later in this chapter.
Note – To return to the Criterion’s main menu, press the EXIT button
repeatedly.
The following sections—Specifying Units, Enabling Measurement
Errors, Entering a Compass Offset, and Ensuring Accurate Heights—
describe further configuration that may make the Criterion laser
rangefinder easier to use and/or obtain better results. They may,
however, be skipped if you want to immediately proceed to test the
laser rangefinder with your Trimble GPS system.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 315

I Laser Rangefinders

Specifying units
The Criterion laser rangefinder lets you select the units in which
distances and angles are displayed on its LCD.
Note – The units displayed on the rangefinder's LCD do not affect the
interpretation of data by the Asset Surveyor software. They simply let
you view distances and angles in whatever units are most suitable for
your application.
You can change the Criterion’s units as follows:
1. Return to the rangefinder’s main menu (by pressing the EXIT
button repeatedly).
2. Press the ↑ or ↓ arrow buttons until the SYSTEM configuration
menu appears:

SYSTEM

3. Press the ENTER button to select the SYSTEM menu.

The first entry in the SYSTEM menu is the UNITS
DEC.PRECISION category:

UNITS
DEC. PRECISION

4. Press ENTER again to select UNITS DEC. PRECISION.

The following screen appears:

LINEAR UNITS:
**ENG** METRIC

The Criterion supports ENG (that is, English) and METRIC

linear distance units (that is, feet or meters).

31 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

5. Use the ← or → arrow buttons to select ENG or METRIC and

then press ENTER.
6. Now press the ↓ arrow button to move on to the ANGULAR
UNITS screen:

ANGULAR UNITS:
**DEG** GRAD

The Criterion supports DEG (that is, degrees) and GRAD

(gradians) as angular units.
7. Use the ← or → arrow buttons to select DEG or GRAD and
then press ENTER.
8. Press the EXIT button twice to return to the Criterion’s main
menu.

Enabling measurement error messages

Laser Technology Inc. recommends that new users of the Criterion
enable measurement error messages. By default, these messages are
disabled. Once measurement error messages are enabled, the
rangefinder informs you whenever a measurement is invalid for some
reason.
Once you become experienced with the Criterion rangefinder, you can
disable measurement errors if you want.
To enable or change the measurement errors setting:
1. Select the top-level SYSTEM menu from the Criterion’s main
menu.
2. Press the ↓ arrow button to scroll down to the
MEASUREMENT ERRORS entry:

MEASUREMENT
ERRORS

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 317

I Laser Rangefinders

3. Press the ENTER button.

The following screen is displayed:

DISPLAY ERRORS?
**YES** NO

4. Use the ← or → buttons to enable or disable the display of

measurement error messages and then press ENTER.
5. Press EXIT twice to return to the Criterion’s main menu.
When a measurement error is detected, the Criterion displays an error
code on its LCD. The meaning of each code is indicated in Table I.2.
Table I.2 Error messages

Message Cause and actions

Error 1 The laser rangefinder failed to lock onto its target.
Either the target was too close or it was out of
range. Alternatively, the laser was not held
steadily enough.
Error 2 The laser did not receive the minimum required
pulses back to determine the range to the target.
Hold the instrument steady and on target.
Error 3 The laser was moved off target while taking a
reading. Keep the laser steady and on target.
Error 4 The tilt sensor is out of range. The maximum tilt
angle permitted is ±60°.
Error 5 The fluxgate compass is outside its level range.
When taking a compass reading, you must keep
the instrument's tilt within a range of ±15°.

Press the CLEAR button to clear the error message.

31 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Entering a compass offset

The Criterion laser rangefinders let you specify two compass offsets:
• A Declination Offset, which can be used to specify the local
difference between magnetic North and true North
• A Fixed Offset, that can be used to make sure the alignment of
the compass with the laser unit is accurate.
Your Criterion laser rangefinder has an accompanying Certificate of
Calibration, which lists the preconfigured fixed compass offset, if any.
It is safest not to modify this value.
You can, however, modify the declination offset to take account of
local magnetic field variations. Only do this if you are operating in an
area where a local phenomenon such as large mineral deposit or
mountain range has a substantial and stable influence on the earth’s
magnetic field.
Use the following procedure to modify the declination offset:
1. Select the top-level SYSTEM menu from the Criterion’s main
menu.
2. Press the ↑ or ↓ arrow buttons to scroll down to the COMPASS
OFFSETS entry:

COMPASS
OFFSETS

3. Press the ENTER button.

The following screen appears:

DECLINATION DEG
0

4. Use the numeric buttons on the right-hand side of the

Criterion’s control panel to enter the local magnetic declination
offset (in degrees or gradians, as previously configured).

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 319

I Laser Rangefinders

The maximum declination permitted by the Criterion laser

rangefinder is 30°.
5. Press ENTER to finish entering the declination.
6. Press EXIT twice to return to the Criterion’s main menu.

C Warning – You probably want to use the Criterion laser rangefinder

separately from your TSC1 datalogger. If so, you probably want to
configure the laser’s DECLINATION so that the bearings displayed by the
Criterion are relative to true north. If you do so, you must set the Asset
Surveyor software’s Magnetic declination field to 0°, to avoid the
declination being applied twice. If you use your Criterion laser rangefinder
exclusively with the TSC1 datalogger, it is best to leave the laser’s
DECLINATION set to 0 and modify the Asset Surveyor software’s
Magnetic declination field; this enables the Asset Surveyor software to
correctly convert other magnetic bearings to true north (for example, when
navigating, checking the positions of satellites, and so forth).

C Warning – If you specify a local declination offset, you must make sure
that you clear or re-specify this offset when you move to a new location.

Ensuring accurate heights

When you take a shot to a target point with the Criterion laser
rangefinder, the rangefinder generates a three-dimensional offset to
that target. This is used, in conjunction with a three-dimensional GPS
position, to compute the position of the target in three dimensions. In
order to obtain an accurate height for the target point, your configured
antenna height must take account of the difference between the height
of the GPS antenna and the height of the laser rangefinder.

32 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Figure 1 crxrtdc1.wmf
 Laser Rangefinders I

I.2.5 Using the Criterion with the Asset Surveyor Software

As mentioned previously, the practical accuracy of the fluxgate
compass in typical field trials is around ±1–2°. This yields a steady
reduction in accuracy as the distance between the laser and a target
point increases. At a distance of 100–200 m, the average positional
error when using the Criterion rangefinder is approximately 2 m (in
addition to the error of your GPS measurement).

Testing
When you first connect the Criterion 300 or 400 to your Trimble GPS
system, test that it is correctly configured and that all components are
working correctly.
The best way to achieve this is using the External sensors entry in the
Asset Surveyor software’s Configuration menu:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 321

Figure 1 crxrtdc2.wmf
I Laser Rangefinders

Select External sensors and the menu of available sensors appears:

Configuring the Asset Surveyor software

S
Configure the special Laser sensor to work with the Criterion 300 or
400. To do this, highlight Laser from the Select sensor menu, and
press the softkey. The Laser range-finder configuration form
appears:

32 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Set the Type field to either ‘Criterion 300’ or ‘Criterion 400’. If you
generally use a Criterion rangefinder when collecting data, and if you
typically do not use any other type of external sensor, then set the
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘On’ to display the Offset form for the
currently open feature whenever you send an offset from a laser
rangefinder.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘Off’ to automatically record offset
values to the open feature when you fire the rangefinder. The Offset
form does not appear unless an entry is required, when it will appear

O
automatically. The message Offset received appears briefly in the status
line, but no other notification appears unless an entry is required. You
can press in the attribute entry form to open the Offset form if
you want to confirm offset values.
Set the Serial port according to the port you connect the Criterion to,
either ‘Top’ or ‘Bottom’.

C Warning – The RS232 protocols used by the Criterion 300 and 400
rangefinders are different. You must specify the correct rangefinder in the
Type field, otherwise the Asset Surveyor software fails to communicate

\
with your rangefinder.

Press to save these settings and return to the Select sensor menu.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 323

Figure 2 centtdc1.eps
I Laser Rangefinders

Activating the laser interface

You can specify that you want the Asset Surveyor software to accept
input from the laser rangefinder, by selecting the Laser entry from the
Select sensor menu. When you do this, a check mark appears beside
the Laser entry to indicate that the rangefinder interface has been
activated:

Laser entry in the menu is highlighted), theZ

Once the rangefinder interface has been activated (and provided the
softkey appears.
Once the rangefinder interface has been activated, the Asset Surveyor
software accepts communications from it. You can configure the Asset
Surveyor software to automatically activate the laser rangefinder
interface when you start data collection by setting the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’, as described above.

32 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Figure 2 centtdc2.eps
 Laser Rangefinders I

If you attempt to activate the laser rangefinder interface and the serial
port is already in use by another sensor, the Asset Surveyor software
displays a message similar to the following:

The Asset Surveyor software does not activate the rangefinder

interface.

Z
Checking the laser interface
When the laser rangefinder is active (and highlighted in the list of
external sensors), you can press to display a status form for the
rangefinder:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 325

 f
I Laser Rangefinders

You can press to toggle between displaying slope

distance/inclination and horizontal/vertical distance.
This form shows the most recent offset received from the laser
rangefinder. If you take further readings using the rangefinder, these
appear on the status form, replacing the previous reading.
You can take a reading with the Criterion rangefinder and transmit it to
the Asset Surveyor software as follows:
1. Follow the instruction sequence described earlier in this chapter
to set the Criterion into SURVEY mode.
2. Aim at a suitable target point at least 7 m (20 ft) away.
3. Keeping a steady hold on the instrument, aim through its scope
and carefully pull the trigger, releasing it when you hear the
laser acquiring lock on the target.

B Tip – Readings from the Criterion’s compass and inclinometer are

continually averaged as long as you hold the trigger. To maximize the
accuracy of these measurements, pull and hold the trigger for up to 10
seconds.

4. Hold the instrument completely still and on target until all

sounds end.
The distance and azimuth to the target point are displayed on
the Criterion’s LCD, for example:

HD: 40.89 M
AZ: 330.3 DEG

C Warning – You can press the ↑ and ↓ arrow buttons to view other values
such as the vertical angle and slope distance. You must return to the
screen showing HD and AZ before performing step 5 (below), otherwise
the Criterion does not send the full measurement details to the Asset
Surveyor software.

32 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

5. Press the ENTER button on the Criterion to transmit this

measurement to the Asset Surveyor software.
If you were viewing the laser rangefinder status form, you
would see the measurement arrive on the TSC1 datalogger’s
screen:

The Asset Surveyor software displays the distance measurement in the

currently configured Distance units. The magnetic laser azimuth
(bearing) is converted to a true North azimuth. If the configured North
reference is ‘True’, it is immediately displayed as a true North bearing
(with a ‘T’ suffix); otherwise it is displayed as a magnetic North
bearing (with a ‘M’ suffix).
Note – If the configured Magnetic declination is ‘Auto’, the Asset
Surveyor software’s internal magnetic declination model is used to
convert the magnetic laser bearing to a true north bearing. Otherwise,
the manually entered declination is used for this conversion.

B Tip – You can press the Criterion’s ENTER button multiple times to send
the same measurement to the Asset Surveyor software repeatedly. Use
this technique to resend a measurement if you discover that you had not
connected all equipment or configured the Asset Surveyor software
before taking the measurement with the laser.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 327

I Laser Rangefinders

I.2.6 Collecting Data

The following sections outline data collection.

Activating the laser interface

Within Data collection, the laser rangefinder interface can be activated
in one of two ways:

X
• Automatically, if you preconfigured the Laser sensor’s
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
• Manually, using the softkey when logging data to a file.

You can also use X

Checking the laser interface
softkey to access the Select sensor menu to
reconfigure the laser rangefinder interface, or to check that the laser
and the Asset Surveyor software are communicating correctly, as
described above.

Recording an offset
Whenever you are collecting a point feature, you can use the Criterion

O
laser rangefinder to record an offset to the feature. You can record an
offset to a line, area, or quickmark feature only when you have pressed
the softkey to display the offset entry form for that feature.

B Tip – You can turn off the Criterion when it is not being used to save its
battery (for example, when walking between features or when entering
attributes). The rangefinder can be used within seconds of turning it back
on.

32 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.3 Laser Atlanta ProSurvey 1000

The ProSurvey 1000 produced by Laser Atlanta is a lightweight,
handheld laser device, suitable for use with the Asset Surveyor
software for the automated recording of offsets.

I.3.1 Hardware Specifications

The following sections detail the hardware specifications of the Laser
Atlanta ProSurvey 1000.

Dimensions
The laser itself measures 8.4 cm × 25.4 cm × 27.9 cm (3.3" × 10" ×
11"). It weighs 1.9 kg (4.25 lbs), excluding the power cord. The casing
is made from cast aluminum.

Laser details
The laser can typically take measurements from 1.5 m to 760 m (5 ft
to 2,500 ft) to uncooperative surfaces. For cooperative targets (for
example, a reflector), the range of the laser is extended to 3,050 m
(10,000 ft).
The laser is accurate to ±15.2 cm (6").

Compass details
A magnetic fluxgate compass is used to obtain azimuth measurements.
The compass is rated at ±0.5° under laboratory conditions. In typical
GIS data collection conditions, the compass tends to be accurate to
around ±1–2°. In environments where magnetic interference is high
(for example, in a vehicle), the compass can be considerably less
accurate.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 329

I Laser Rangefinders

Inclinometer details
A built-in inclinometer measures vertical angles, which are used to
calculate the elevation of target points. The inclinometer is accurate to
0.3°.

Powering
The ProSurvey 1000 rangefinder can be powered by either a
rechargeable 12 V NiCd battery or a 12 V DC power source at
0.4 amps.
The standard ProSurvey 1000 battery charger takes approximately
15 hours to fully charge a battery (that is, overnight).

Environmental limitations
The ProSurvey 1000 rangefinder can be used at temperatures ranging
between –30°C and +60°C (–22°F to +140°F). Relative humidity
should not exceed 95%, non-condensing.
The ProSurvey should be stored at between –40°C and +80°C (–40°F
to +176°F).
The rangefinder should always be transported in its hard carry-case.

I.3.2 Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

The ProSurvey 1000 laser rangefinder can be purchased with an
optional download cable. This cable provides a 9-pin connector which
can be plugged directly into the ESP port of a Pro XL. For use with the
Pro XR or Pro XRS, a second data cable (P/N 32287) is required as an
adaptor to connect to the optional 9-pin adaptor.
Connect the ProSurvey 1000 to its battery pack, and plug the 9-pin
connector into the adaptor cable and then into the TSC1 datalogger’s
serial port.

33 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XRS receiver

If you have a Pro XRS GPS receiver, connect the ProSurvey 1000
laser rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in
Figure I.4.

Figure I.4 ProSurvey 1000 laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XRS
with TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 331

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XR receiver

If you have a Pro XR GPS receiver, connect the ProSurvey 1000 laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.5.

Figure I.5 ProSurvey 1000 laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XR
with TSC1

33 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XL receiver

If you have a Pro XL GPS receiver, connect the ProSurvey 1000 laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.6.

Figure I.6 ProSurvey 1000 laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XL
with TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 333

I Laser Rangefinders

I.3.3 Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section provides instructions for configuring the ProSurvey 1000
laser rangefinder itself. For more information on configuring the Asset
Surveyor software to work with the ProSurvey 1000 laser rangefinder,
see Using the ProSurvey 1000 with the Asset Surveyor Software,
page 336.

EEPROM configuration
The ProSurvey 1000 contains an electrically erasable and
programmable ROM chip (or EEPROM), which is used to hold a
wealth of configurable settings. You can view and modify these
settings using the LAEEPROM program, which can be obtained from
Laser Atlanta.
For operation with the Asset Surveyor software, it is critical that three
of the EEPROM settings be correctly configured. These are:
• range_mode, which must be set to Range (averaged)
• rs232_output_mode, which must be set to ASCII
range output (on trig release)
• range_opcode, which must be set to New ProSurvey
format
If any of these settings is incorrect, the ProSurvey 1000 does not
output information about each laser shot in a form that can be
interpreted by the Asset Surveyor software. The most likely symptom
of this is that the Asset Surveyor software emits a warning beep each
time the laser’s trigger is released.
In addition, Trimble recommends that you set the hud_mode
EEPROM setting to Bearing, so that you can watch the laser’s
compass bearing stabilize in the head-up display before taking each
shot.

33 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Calibration of the ProSurvey 1000

Whenever you use the ProSurvey 1000 after storing it for a period, or
in a new environment, calibrate the ProSurvey’s compass. This is
particularly important if you feel that the site in which you are
working is ‘hostile’ in the sense of there being local magnetic field
distortions (for example, a vehicle, pipeline, overhead or underground
power cable, and so forth). The purpose of calibration is to distribute
compass error smoothly through a 360° circle.
Note – The calibration procedure does not modify the compass’s idea
of where magnetic north is. It simply distributes local distortion of the
earth’s magnetic field evenly through a 360° circle. This is important
as it ensures that compass readings are locally consistent. If you want
to account for an error in the compass’s determination of magnetic
north, do this by entering a new value for the Magnetic declination
field in the Asset Surveyor software’s Units and display configuration
form.
Calibration of the compass is quick and extremely simple. Follow the
instructions below:
1. Press the compass calibration control on the side of the
ProSurvey 1000.
This control is a black indented button on the right side of the
unit (looking from the back), above and in front of the laser
trigger.
You are prompted in the head-up display to point the ProSurvey
1000 in approximate directions starting at 0° (due North), then
turning clockwise to 45° (North East) and working around to
315° (North West) in increments of 45°.
2. Point in the indicated direction, wait for a few seconds to allow
the compass to stabilize, and squeeze the laser’s trigger.
After each squeeze of the trigger, the head-up display indicates
the next point of the compass.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 335

I Laser Rangefinders

3. After aiming in the 315° direction and squeezing the trigger, the
rear panel of the ProSurvey 1000 indicates a Noise value,
ranging from 0 to 9.
The higher the value, the better the calibration. If the Noise
value is below 5, perform the calibration again.

I.3.4 Using the ProSurvey 1000 with the Asset Surveyor

Software
As mentioned previously, the practical accuracy of the fluxgate
compass in typical field use is around ±1–2°. This yields a steady
reduction in accuracy as the distance between the laser and a target
point increases. At a distance of 100–200 m, the average positional
error when using the ProSurvey 1000 is approximately 2 m (in
addition to the error of your GPS measurement).

Testing
When you first connect the ProSurvey 1000 to your Trimble GPS
system, test that it is correctly configured and that all components are
working correctly.
Select the Configuration entry from the Asset Surveyor software’s
Main menu:

33 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Select External sensors from the Configuration menu. The menu of

available sensors appears:

S
Configuring the Asset Surveyor software
Configure the special Laser sensor to work with the ProSurvey 1000.
To do this, press the softkey. The Laser range-finder
configuration form appears:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 337

I Laser Rangefinders

Set the Type field to ‘ProSurvey 1000’. If you generally use the
ProSurvey 1000 rangefinder when collecting data, and if you typically
do not use any other type of external sensor, then set the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘On’ to display the Offset form for the
currently open feature whenever you send an offset from a laser
rangefinder.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘Off’ to automatically record offset
values to the open feature when you fire the rangefinder. The Offset
form does not appear unless an entry is required, when it will appear

O
automatically. The message Offset received appears briefly in the status
line, but no other notification appears unless an entry is required. You
can press in the attribute entry form to open the Offset form if
you want to confirm offset values.
Set the Serial port according to the port you connect the ProSurvey

\
1000 to, either ‘Top’ or ‘Bottom’.
Press to save these settings and return to the Select sensor menu.

33 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Figure 3 psxrtdc1.eps
 Laser Rangefinders I

Activating the laser interface

You can specify that you want the Asset Surveyor software to accept
input from the laser rangefinder, by selecting the Laser entry from the
Select sensor menu. When you do this, a check mark appears beside
the Laser entry to indicate that the rangefinder interface has been
activated:

Laser entry in the menu is highlighted), theZ

Once the rangefinder interface has been activated (and provided the
softkey appears.
Once the rangefinder interface has been activated, the Asset Surveyor
software accepts communications from it. You can configure the Asset
Surveyor software to automatically activate the laser rangefinder
interface when you start data collection by setting the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’, as described above.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 339

Figure 3 psxrtdc2.eps
I Laser Rangefinders

If you attempt to activate the laser rangefinder interface and the serial
port is already in use by another sensor, the Asset Surveyor software
displays a message similar to the following:

The Asset Surveyor software does not activate the rangefinder

interface.

34 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Z
Checking the laser interface
When the laser rangefinder is active (and highlighted in the list of
external sensors), press to open a status form for the rangefinder:

You can press the f softkey to toggle between displaying slope

distance/inclination and horizontal/vertical distance.
This form shows the most recent offset received from the laser
rangefinder. If you take further readings using the rangefinder, these
appear on the status form, replacing the previous reading.
You can take a reading with the ProSurvey 1000 and transmit it to the
Asset Surveyor software as follows:
1. Turn on the ProSurvey 1000, and optionally calibrate it (as
described earlier).
2. Aim at a suitable target point. Wait for the bearing in the
head-up display to stabilize.

C Warning – If you do not wait until the bearing in the head-up display
settles down before pulling the laser’s trigger, then the compass
measurement may be seriously inaccurate.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 341

Figure 4: pro1000.eps
I Laser Rangefinders

3. Keeping a steady hold on the instrument, aim through its scope

and carefully pull the trigger.
The distance to the target point is now displayed on the
ProSurvey 1000’s head-up display. The bearing and inclination
are displayed on the LED.

Z
4. Release the trigger. When you do this, the ProSurvey 1000
sends its measurement to the TSC1 datalogger.
If you were viewing the laser rangefinder form, you
would see the measurement arrive on the TSC1 screen:

The Asset Surveyor software displays the distance measurement in the

currently configured Distance units. The laser azimuth (bearing) is
converted to a true North azimuth. If the configured North reference is
‘True’, it is immediately displayed as a true North bearing (with a ‘T’
suffix); otherwise it is displayed as a magnetic North bearing (with an
‘M’ suffix).
Note – If the configured Magnetic declination is ‘Auto’, the Asset
Surveyor software’s internal magnetic declination model is used to
convert the magnetic laser bearing to a true north bearing. Otherwise,
the manually entered declination is used for this conversion.

34 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Figure 4 No reference (OLE)

 Laser Rangefinders I

C Warning – The ProSurvey 1000 always emits compass bearings relative

to magnetic north. You must either specify your local magnetic declination
or set the Magnetic declination field to ‘Auto’, otherwise the Asset
Surveyor software does not correctly convert the magnetic compass
bearings to true north.

The ProSurvey 1000 takes a few seconds to take a laser distance

reading (although the bearing and inclination can be read almost
immediately). If the Asset Surveyor software receives a message from
the ProSurvey 1000 that lacks a distance measurement, the following
warning message is displayed:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 343

I Laser Rangefinders

I.3.5 Collecting Data

The following sections outline data collection.

Activating the laser interface

Within Data collection, the laser rangefinder interface can be activated
in one of two ways:

X
• Automatically, if you preconfigured the Laser sensor’s
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
• Manually, using the softkey when logging data to a file.

You can also use the X

Checking the laser interface
softkey to access the Select sensor menu to
reconfigure the laser rangefinder interface, or to check that the laser
and the Asset Surveyor software are communicating correctly, as
described above.

Recording an offset
Whenever you are collecting a point feature, you can use the

O
ProSurvey 1000 laser rangefinder to record an offset to the feature.
You can record an offset to a line, area, or quickmark feature only
when you have pressed the softkey to open the offset entry form
for that feature.

34 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.4 Laser Atlanta Advantage

The Laser Atlanta Advantage is a lightweight, handheld laser device,
suitable for use with the Asset Surveyor software for the automated
recording of offsets.

I.4.1 Hardware Specifications

The following sections detail the hardware specifications of the Laser
Atlanta Advantage.

Dimensions
The laser itself measures 25.4 cm (including grip) × 8.4 cm × 27.9 cm
(10" × 3.3" × 11"). It weighs 1.9 kg (4.25 lbs), excluding the power
cord. The casing is made from polycarbonate ABS.

Laser details
The laser can typically take measurements from 1.5 m to 760 m (5 ft
to 2,500 ft) to uncooperative surfaces. For cooperative targets (for
example, a reflector), the range of the laser is extended to 12,190 m
(40,000 ft).
The laser is accurate to ±15.2 cm (6").

Compass details
A magnetic fluxgate compass is used to obtain azimuth measurements.
The compass is rated at ±0.5° under laboratory conditions. In typical
GIS data collection conditions, the compass tends to be accurate to
around ±1°. In environments where magnetic interference is high (for
example, in a vehicle), the compass can be considerably less accurate.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 345

I Laser Rangefinders

Inclinometer details
A built-in inclinometer measures vertical angles, which are used to
calculate the elevation of target points. The inclinometer is accurate to
0.2°.

Powering
The Advantage rangefinder is powered by a self-contained 6.3 V
rechargeable Ni-Cd battery, located in the handle grip.

Environmental limitations
The Advantage rangefinder can be used at temperatures ranging
between –30°C and +60°C (–22°F to +140°F). Relative humidity
should not exceed 95%, non-condensing.
The Advantage should be stored at between –40°C and +80°C (–40°F
to +176°F).
The rangefinder should always be transported in its hard carry-case.

I.4.2 Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

The Advantage laser rangefinder can be purchased with an optional
download cable. This cable provides a 9-pin connector which can be
plugged directly into the ESP port of a Pro XL. For use with the
Pro XR or Pro XRS, a second data cable (P/N 32287) is required as an
adaptor to connect to the optional 9-pin adaptor.
Connect the Advantage to its battery pack, and plug the 9-pin
connector into the GPS receiver's ESP port.

34 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XRS receiver

If you have a Pro XRS GPS receiver, connect the Advantage laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.7.

Figure I.7 Advantage laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XRS with
TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 347

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XR receiver

If you have a Pro XR GPS receiver, connect the Advantage laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.8.

Figure I.8 Advantage laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XR with
TSC1

34 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XL receiver

If you have a Pro XL GPS receiver, connect the Advantage laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.9.

Figure I.9 Advantage laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XL with
TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 349

I Laser Rangefinders

I.4.3 Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section provides instructions for configuring the Advantage laser
rangefinder itself. For more information on configuring the Asset
Surveyor software to work with the Advantage laser rangefinder, see
Using the Advantage with the Asset Surveyor Software, page 351.

EEPROM configuration
The Atlanta Advantage contains an electrically erasable and
programmable ROM chip (or EEPROM), which is used to hold a
wealth of configurable settings. You can view and modify these
settings using the LAEEPROM program, which can be obtained from
Laser Atlanta.
For operation with the Asset Surveyor software, two of the EEPROM
settings must be correctly configured. These are:
• range_mode, which must be set to Standard
(averaged)
• Serial Format, which must be set to Trimble Pro XL
If any of these settings is incorrect, the Advantage does not output
information about each laser shot in a form that can be interpreted by
the Asset Surveyor software. The most likely symptom of this is that
the Asset Surveyor software emits a warning beep each time the
laser’s trigger is released.

Calibration of the Advantage

Whenever you use the Advantage after storing it for a period, or in a
new environment, calibrate the Advantage’s compass. This is
particularly important if you feel that the site in which you are
working is “hostile” in that there are local magnetic field distortions
(for example, a vehicle, pipe-line, or overhead or underground power
cable). The purpose of calibration is to distribute compass error
smoothly through a 360° circle.

35 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Calibration of the compass is quick and extremely simple. Follow the

instructions below:
1. Press the compass calibration control option on the HUD
(Heads Up Display).
You are prompted in the head-up display to point the Advantage
in approximate directions starting at 0° (due North),
2. Press Start.
3. In a clockwise direction moving in a 360° turn, adjust the pitch
and roll of the Advantage for 60 seconds. After this, a number
should appear (from 0 to 9) in the display. The higher the
number, the better the calibration. If this value is below 5,
perform the calibration again.
Note – The calibration procedure does not modify the compass’s idea
of where magnetic north is. It simply distributes local distortion of the
earth’s magnetic field evenly through a 360° circle. This is important
as it makes sure that compass readings are locally consistent. If you
want to account for an error in the compass’s determination of
magnetic north, do this by entering a new value for the Magnetic
declination field in the Asset Surveyor software’s Units and display
configuration form.

I.4.4 Using the Advantage with the Asset Surveyor Software

As mentioned previously, the practical accuracy of the fluxgate
compass in typical field use is around ±1°. This yields a steady
reduction in accuracy as the distance between the laser and a target
point increases. At a distance of 100–200 m, the average positional
error when using the Advantage is approximately 1 m (in addition to
the error of your GPS measurement).

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 351

I Laser Rangefinders

Testing
When you first connect the Advantage to your Trimble GPS system,
test that it is correctly configured and that all components are working
correctly.
Select the Configuration entry from the Asset Surveyor software’s
Main menu:

Select External sensors from the Configuration menu. The menu of

available sensors appears:

35 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

S
Configuring the Asset Surveyor software
Configure the special Laser sensor to work with the Laser Atlanta
Advantage. To do this, press the softkey. The Laser range-finder
configuration form appears:

Set the Type field to ‘Atlanta Advantage’. If you generally use the
Advantage rangefinder when collecting data, and if you typically do
not use any other type of external sensor, then set the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘On’ to display the Offset form for the
currently open feature whenever you send an offset from a laser
rangefinder.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘Off’ to automatically record offset
values to the open feature when you fire the rangefinder. The Offset
form does not appear unless an entry is required, when it will appear

O
automatically. The message Offset received appears briefly in the status
line, but no other notification appears unless an entry is required. You
can press in the attribute entry form to open the Offset form if
you want to confirm offset values.
Set the Serial port according to the port you connect the Atlanta

\
Advantage to, either ‘Top’ or ‘Bottom’.
Press to save these settings and return to the Select sensor menu.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 353

I Laser Rangefinders

Activating the laser interface

You can specify that you want the Asset Surveyor software to accept
input from the laser rangefinder, by selecting the Laser entry from the
Select sensor menu. When you do this, a check mark appears beside
the Laser entry to indicate that the rangefinder interface has been
activated:

Laser entry in the menu is highlighted), theZ

Once the rangefinder interface has been activated (and provided the
softkey appears.
Once the rangefinder interface has been activated, the Asset Surveyor
software accepts communications from it. You can configure the Asset
Surveyor software to automatically activate the laser rangefinder
interface when you start data collection by setting the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’, as described above.

35 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

If you attempt to activate the laser rangefinder interface and the serial
port is already in use by another sensor, the Asset Surveyor software
displays a message similar to the following:

The Asset Surveyor software does not activate the rangefinder

interface.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 355

I Laser Rangefinders

Z
Checking the laser interface
When the laser rangefinder is active (and highlighted in the list of
external sensors), press to open a status form for the rangefinder:

You can press the f softkey to toggle between displaying slope

distance/inclination and horizontal/vertical distance.
This form shows the most recent offset received from the laser
rangefinder. If you take further readings using the rangefinder, these
appear on the status form, replacing the previous reading.
You can take a reading with the Advantage and transmit it to the Asset
Surveyor software as follows:
1. Turn on the Advantage, and optionally calibrate it (as described
earlier).
2. Aim at a suitable target point. Wait for the bearing in the
head-up display to stabilize.

C Warning – If you do not wait until the bearing in the head-up display
settles down before pulling the laser’s trigger, then the compass
measurement may be seriously inaccurate.

35 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

3. Keeping a steady hold on the instrument, aim through its scope

and carefully pull the trigger.
The distance to the target point is now displayed on the
Advantage’s head-up display. The bearing and inclination are
displayed on the LED.

Z
4. Release the trigger. When you do this, the Advantage sends its
measurement to the TSC1 datalogger.
If you were viewing the laser rangefinder form, you
would see the measurement arrive on the TSC1 datalogger’s
screen:

The Asset Surveyor software displays the distance measurement in the

currently configured Distance units. The laser azimuth (bearing) is
converted to a true North azimuth. If the configured North reference is
‘True’, it is immediately displayed as a true North bearing (with a ‘T’
suffix); otherwise it is displayed as a magnetic North bearing (with an
‘M’ suffix).
Note – If the configured Magnetic declination is ‘Auto’, the Asset
Surveyor software’s internal magnetic declination model is used to
convert the magnetic laser bearing to a true north bearing. Otherwise,
the manually entered declination is used for this conversion.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 357

I Laser Rangefinders

C Warning – The Advantage always emits compass bearings relative to

magnetic north. You must either specify your local magnetic declination or
set the Magnetic declination field to ‘Auto’, otherwise the Asset Surveyor
software does not correctly convert the magnetic compass bearings to
true north.

The Advantage takes a few seconds to take a laser distance reading

(although the bearing and inclination can be read almost immediately).
If the Asset Surveyor software receives a message from the Advantage
which lacks a distance measurement, the following warning message
is displayed:

35 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.4.5 Collecting Data

The following sections outline data collection.

Activating the laser interface

Within Data collection, the laser rangefinder interface can be activated
in one of two ways:

X
• Automatically, if you had preconfigured the Laser sensor’s
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
• Manually, using the softkey.

You can also use the X

Checking the laser interface
softkey to access the Select sensor menu to
reconfigure the laser rangefinder interface, or to check that the laser
and the Asset Surveyor software are communicating correctly, as
described above.

Recording an offset
Whenever you are collecting a point feature, you can use the

O
Advantage laser rangefinder to record an offset to the feature. You can
record an offset to a line, area, or quickmark feature only when you
have pressed the softkey to display the offset entry form for that
feature.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 359

I Laser Rangefinders

I.5 LEDHA-GEO Laser Binoculars

The LEDHA-GEO produced by Jenoptik is a handheld laser device
used very much like a pair of binoculars. The LEDHA-GEO is
suitable for use with the Asset Surveyor software for the automated
recording of offsets.

I.5.1 Hardware Specifications

The following sections detail the hardware specifications of the
LEDHA-GEO Laser Binoculars.

Dimension
The LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars measure 25 cm x 20.5 cm x 9 cm
(9.8" x 8.1" x 3.5"). They weigh 2.2 kg (4.88 lb) without the battery
and 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) with the battery. The casing is made from rugged
aluminum.

Laser details
The laser can typically take measurements up to 300 m (985 ft) to
uncooperative surfaces. For cooperative targets (for example, a
reflector), the range of the laser is extended to 3,000 m (9,840 ft). The
laser is accurate to ±10 cm (3.9").

Compass details
An internal electronic compass is used to obtain azimuth
measurements. In typical GIS data collection conditions, this compass
tends to be accurate to around ±0.5 cm. In environments where
magnetic interference is high (for example, in a vehicle), the compass
can be considerably less accurate.

36 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Powering
The LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars are powered by a self-contained
12 V battery. For recharging the battery, use only the charger (Pb
charger) provided with the instrument. On average, recharging of a
discharged battery takes approximately 5 to 7 hours.

Environmental limitations
The LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars can be used at temperatures
ranging between –20°C and +50°C (–4°F and 122°F). When the
temperature exceeds these limitations, the LEDHA-GEO
automatically turns off.

I.5.2 Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

The LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars can be purchased with an optional
download cable. This cable provides a 9-pin connector which can be
plugged directly into the ESP port of a Pro XL. For use with the
Pro XR or Pro XRS, a second data cable (P/N 32287) is required as an
adaptor to connect to the optional 9-pin adaptor.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 361

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XRS receiver

If you have a Pro XRS GPS receiver, connect the LEDHA-GEO laser
binoculars to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.10.

Figure I.10 LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars cabling diagram for Pro XRS with
TSC1

36 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XR receiver

If you have a Pro XR GPS receiver, connect the LEDHA-GEO laser
binoculars to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.11.

Figure I.11 LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars cabling diagram for Pro XR with
TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 363

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XL receiver

If you have a Pro XL GPS receiver, connect the LEDHA-GEO laser
binoculars to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.12.

Figure I.12 LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars cabling diagram for Pro XL with
TSC1

36 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.5.3 Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section provides instructions for configuring the LEDHA-GEO
laser binoculars for use with the Asset Surveyor software.
1. In the Asset Surveyor software’s External Sensors
configuration, select Laser and choose LEDHA-GEO as the
type.
2. Connect the cable from the LEDHA to the datalogger.
3. Turn on the LEDHA and press the MODE button until B is
selected.
4. Press PROGR until 1 is selected.
5. Turn the LEDHA off.
6. While holding down the LEDHA’s Memory button, press
MODE or PROGR to turn it on. Continue holding down the
Memory button until the display appears in the LEDHA’s
viewer.
7. The configured baud rate should appear in the display, for
example, baud 9k6. Using the ‘+’ and ‘-’ keys, change the baud
rate to 4k8.
8. Press the Memory key to move to the next option.
9. When the Frame settings appear, change the setting to 8N1,
again using the ‘+’ and ‘-’ keys to change the value and
Memory to move to the next setting.
10. When Display appears, use ‘+’ and ‘-’ to set the brightness of
the display.
11. The next option is the units to display for distance. Select
whichever units you would like to see. This setting has no effect
on the units displayed or stored by the Asset Surveyor software
(this can be configured within the datalogger).
12. The next option is the Velocity units. This doesn’t need to be
changed because angles are not displayed within the LEDHA
when taking measurements for the Asset Surveyor software.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 365

I Laser Rangefinders

13. Now the measurement program selection appears. You should

see something like B 1 08. If the first two characters are not B 1,
turn the LEDHA off and repeat from Step 3.
14. Use ‘+’ and ‘-’ to change the last two digits to 19.
15. To save the configuration turn the LEDHA off then press
PROGR or MODE to turn it back on. It is now ready for
operation with the Asset Surveyor software.

I.5.4 Using the LEDHA-GEO with the Asset Surveyor Software

The following sections outline how to use the LEDHA-GEO with the
Asset Surveyor software.

Testing
When you first connect the LEDHA-GEO to your Trimble GPS
system, test that it is correctly configured and that all components are
working correctly.
Select the Configuration entry from the Asset Surveyor software’s
Main menu:

36 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Select External sensors from the Configuration menu. The menu of

available sensors appears:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 367

I Laser Rangefinders

S
Configuring the Asset Surveyor software
Configure the special Laser sensor to work with the LEDHA-GEO. To
do this, press the softkey. The Laser range-finder configuration
form appears:

Set the Type field to ‘LEDHA-GEO’. If you generally use the

LEDHA-GEO laser binoculars when collecting data, and if you
typically do not use any other type of external sensor, then set the
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘On’ to display the Offset form for the
currently open feature whenever you send an offset from a laser
rangefinder.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘Off’ to automatically record offset
values to the open feature when you fire the rangefinder. The Offset
form does not appear unless an entry is required, when it will appear

O
automatically. The message Offset received appears briefly in the status
line, but no other notification appears unless an entry is required. You
can press in the attribute entry form to open the Offset form if
you want to confirm offset values.
Set the Serial port according to the port you connect the

\
LEDHA-GEO to, either ‘Top’ or ‘Bottom’.
Press to save these settings and return to the Select sensor menu.

36 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Activating the laser interface

You can specify that you want the Asset Surveyor software to accept
input from the laser rangefinder, by selecting the Laser entry from the
Select sensor menu. When you do this, a check mark appears beside
the Laser entry to indicate that the rangefinder interface has been
activated:

Laser entry in the menu is highlighted), theZ

Once the rangefinder interface has been activated (and provided the
softkey appears.
Once the rangefinder interface has been activated, the Asset Surveyor
software accepts communications from it. You can configure the Asset
Surveyor software to automatically activate the laser rangefinder
interface when you start data collection, by setting the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’, as described above.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 369

I Laser Rangefinders

If you attempt to activate the laser rangefinder interface and the serial
port is already in use by another sensor, the Asset Surveyor software
displays a message similar to the following:

The Asset Surveyor software does not activate the rangefinder

interface.

Z
Checking the laser interface
When the laser rangefinder is active (and highlighted in the list of
external sensors), press to open a status form for the rangefinder:

37 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 f
Laser Rangefinders I

You can press the softkey to toggle between displaying slope

distance/inclination and horizontal/vertical distance.
This form shows the most recent offset received from the laser
rangefinder. If you take further readings using the rangefinder, these
appear on the status form, replacing the previous reading.
You can take a reading with the LEDHA-GEO and transmit it to the
Asset Surveyor software as follows:
1. Turn on the LEDHA-GEO, and optionally configure it (as
described earlier).
2. Aim at a suitable target point.
3. Keeping a steady hold on the instrument, aim through its scope
and carefully press the Meas button.
When the Meas button is pressed, the LEDHA-GEO sends its
measurement to the TSC1 datalogger. (There is a delay of about
2 seconds between the time you press the Meas button to when
the measurement is received by the TSC1 datalogger.)
If you were viewing the laser rangefinder status form, you
would see the measurement arrive on the TSC1 screen:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 371

I Laser Rangefinders

The Asset Surveyor software displays the distance measurement in the

currently configured Distance units. The laser azimuth (bearing) is
converted to a true North azimuth. If the configured North reference is
‘True’, it is immediately displayed as a true North bearing (with a ‘T’
suffix); otherwise it is displayed as a magnetic North bearing (with a
‘M’ suffix).
Note – If the configured Magnetic declination is ‘Auto’, the Asset
Surveyor software’s internal magnetic declination model is used to
convert the magnetic laser bearing to a true north bearing. Otherwise,
the manually entered declination is used for this conversion.

C Warning – The LEDHA-GEO always emits compass bearings relative to

magnetic north. You must either specify your local magnetic declination or
set the Magnetic declination field to ‘Auto’, otherwise the Asset Surveyor
software does not correctly convert the magnetic compass bearings to
true north.

The LEDHA-GEO takes a few seconds to take a laser distance reading

(although the bearing and inclination can be read almost immediately).
If the Asset Surveyor software receives a message from the
LEDHA-GEO which lacks a distance measurement, the following
warning message is displayed:

37 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.5.5 Collecting Data

The following sections outline data collection using the LEDHA-GEO
with the Asset Surveyor software.

Activating the laser interface

Within data collection, the laser rangefinder interface can be activated
in one of two ways:

X
• Automatically, if you preconfigured the Laser sensor’s
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
• Manually, using the softkey.

You can also use the X

Checking the laser interface
softkey to access the Select sensor menu to
reconfigure the laser rangefinder interface, or to check that the laser
and the Asset Surveyor software are communicating correctly.

Recording an offset
Whenever you are collecting a point feature, you can use the

O
LEDHA-GEO laser rangefinder to record an offset to the feature. You
can record an offset to a line, area, or quickmark feature only when
you have pressed the softkey to open the offset entry form for
that feature.
To take a laser measurement for the Asset Surveyor software, aim the
LEDHA at the target and press the Meas button. There is a short delay
(1–2 seconds) and then the measurement appears in the Asset
Surveyor software. When taking a measurement, hold the laser as
steady as possible.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 373

I Laser Rangefinders

I.6 MDL LaserAce 300

The MDL LaserAce 300 is a lightweight, handheld laser device,
suitable for use with the Asset Surveyor software for the automated
recording of offsets.

I.6.1 Hardware Specifications

The following sections detail the hardware specifications of the MDL
LaserAce 300.

Dimensions
The laser itself measures 17.5 cm × 10.6 cm × 5.6 cm (6.89" × 4.17" ×
2.20"). It weighs 600 g (1.37 lbs). The casing is made from reinforced
polycarbonate.

Laser details
The laser can typically take measurements of up to 300 m (985 ft) to
uncooperative surfaces. For cooperative targets (for example, a
reflector), the range of the laser is extended to 5,000 m (16,667 ft).
The laser is accurate to ±10.0 cm (3.9").

Compass details
A magnetic fluxgate compass is used to obtain azimuth measurements.
The compass is accurate to less than ±1°. In environments where
magnetic interference is high (for example, in a vehicle), the compass
can be considerably less accurate.

Inclinometer details
A built-in inclinometer measures vertical angles, which are used to
calculate the elevation of target points. The inclinometer is accurate to
0.3°.

37 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Powering
The LaserAce 300 rangefinder is powered by two AA cell alkaline
batteries.

Environmental limitations
The LaserAce 300 rangefinder can be used at temperatures ranging
between –10°C and +45°C (+14°F to +113°F).

I.6.2 Accessories
The LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder can be used in four ways:
• As a handheld instrument.
• With a survey pole.
• With the optional monopod. The monopod includes an encoder
module for high accuracy horizontal angle readings, a slot for a
datalogger bracket, and a screw thread at the top of the
monopod pole for attaching a GPS receiver or antenna.
• With the optional tripod. The laser rangefinder can be mounted
on the tripod, using either a bracket or the MDL encoder
module.

I.6.3 Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

The LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder can be purchased with an optional
download cable. This cable provides a 9-pin connector which can be
plugged directly into the ESP port of a Pro XL. For use with the GPS
Pathfinder Pro XR or Pro XRS, a second data cable (P/N 32287) is
required as an adaptor to connect to the optional 9-pin adaptor.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 375

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XRS receiver

If you have a Pro XRS GPS receiver, connect the LaserAce 300 laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.13.

Figure I.13 LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XRS
with TSC1

37 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XR receiver

If you have a Pro XR GPS receiver, connect the LaserAce 300 laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.14.

Figure I.14 LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XR with
TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 377

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XL receiver

If you have a Pro XL GPS receiver, connect the LaserAce 300 laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.15.

Figure I.15 LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XL with
TSC1

37 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.6.4 Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section provides instructions for configuring the LaserAce 300
laser rangefinder itself. For more information on configuring the Asset
Surveyor software to work with the LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder,
see Using the LaserAce 300 with the Asset Surveyor Software,
page 380.

Calibration of the LaserAce 300

Whenever you use the LaserAce 300 after storing it for a period, or in
a new environment, calibrate the LaserAce 300’s compass. This is
particularly important if you feel that the site in which you are
working is hostile in the sense of there being local magnetic field
distortions (for example, a vehicle, pipeline, or overhead or
underground power cable). The purpose of calibration is to distribute
compass error smoothly through a 360° circle.
Note – The calibration procedure does not modify the compass’s idea
of where magnetic north is. It simply distributes local distortion of the
earth’s magnetic field evenly through a 360° circle. This is important
as it ensures that compass readings are locally consistent. If you want
to account for an error in the compass’s determination of magnetic
north, do this by entering a new value for the Magnetic declination
field in the Asset Surveyor software’s Units and display configuration
form.
Calibration of the compass is quick and simple. Follow the
instructions below:
1. Press the FIRE button to turn on the LaserAce.
2. Press the
button until the display shows Mode 3.
3. Press the FIRE button.
When the compass is ready for calibration, the display prompts
you to point the LaserAce 300 in a sequence of directions
starting at 0° (due North).

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 379

I Laser Rangefinders

4. Follow the instructions on the screen to calibrate the instrument.

5. Press any button to exit Mode 3.

I.6.5 Using the LaserAce 300 with the Asset Surveyor Software
As mentioned previously, the practical accuracy of the fluxgate
compass in typical field use is around ±1°. This yields a steady
reduction in accuracy as the distance between the laser and a target
point increases. At a distance of 100–200 m, the average positional
error when using the LaserAce 300 is approximately 1 m (in addition
to the error of your GPS measurement).

Testing
When you first connect the LaserAce 300 to your Trimble GPS
system, test that it is correctly configured and that all components are
working correctly.
Select the Configuration entry from the Asset Surveyor software’s
Main menu:

38 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Select External sensors from the Configuration menu. The menu of

available sensors appears:

S
Configuring the Asset Surveyor software
Configure the special Laser sensor to work with the MDL LaserAce
300. To do this, press the softkey. The Laser range-finder
configuration form appears:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 381

I Laser Rangefinders

Set the Type field to ‘MDL LaserAce 300’. If you generally use the
LaserAce 300 rangefinder when collecting data, and if you typically
do not use any other type of external sensor, then set the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘On’ to display the Offset form for the
currently open feature whenever you send an offset from a laser
rangefinder.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘Off’ to automatically record offset
values to the open feature when you fire the rangefinder. The Offset

O
form does not appear unless an entry is required. The message Offset
received appears briefly in the status line, but no other notification
appears unless an entry is required. You can press in the attribute
entry form to open the Offset form if you want to confirm offset
values.
Set the Serial port according to the port you connect the MDL

\
LaserAce 300 to, either ‘Top’ or ‘Bottom’.
Press to save these settings and return to the Select sensor menu.

38 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Activating the laser interface

You can specify that you want the Asset Surveyor software to accept
input from the laser rangefinder, by selecting the Laser entry from the
Select sensor menu. When you do this, a check mark appears beside
the Laser entry to indicate that the rangefinder interface has been
activated:

Laser entry in the menu is highlighted), theZ

Once the rangefinder interface has been activated (and provided the
softkey appears.
Once the rangefinder interface has been activated, the Asset Surveyor
software accepts communications from it. You can configure the Asset
Surveyor software to automatically activate the laser rangefinder
interface when you start data collection by setting the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’, as described above.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 383

I Laser Rangefinders

If you attempt to activate the laser rangefinder interface and the serial
port is already in use by another sensor, the Asset Surveyor software
displays a message similar to the following:

The Asset Surveyor software does not activate the rangefinder

interface.

Z
Checking the laser interface
When the laser rangefinder is active (and highlighted in the list of
external sensors), press to open a status form for the rangefinder:

38 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 f
Laser Rangefinders I

You can press the softkey to toggle between displaying slope

distance/inclination and horizontal/vertical distance.
This form shows the most recent offset received from the laser
rangefinder. If you take further readings using the rangefinder, these
appear on the status form, replacing the previous reading.
You can take a reading with the LaserAce 300 and transmit it to the
Asset Surveyor software as follows:
1. Turn on the LaserAce 300, and optionally calibrate it (as
described earlier).
2. Aim at a suitable target point.
3. Keeping a steady hold on the instrument, aim through its scope
and carefully press FIRE.
The bearing, inclination, and distance to the target point are
now displayed on the LaserAce 300’s LED display. At the same
time, the LaserAce 300 sends its measurement to the TSC1
datalogger.
If you were viewing the laser rangefinder status form, you
would see the measurement arrive on the TSC1 screen:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 385

I Laser Rangefinders

The Asset Surveyor software displays the distance measurement in the

currently configured Distance units. The laser azimuth (bearing) is
converted to a true North azimuth. If the configured North reference is
‘True’, it is immediately displayed as a true North bearing (with a ‘T’
suffix); otherwise it is displayed as a magnetic North bearing (with an
‘M’ suffix).
Note – If the configured Magnetic declination is ‘Auto’, the Asset
Surveyor software’s internal magnetic declination model is used to
convert the magnetic laser bearing to a true north bearing. Otherwise,
the manually entered declination is used for this conversion.

C Warning – The LaserAce 300 always emits compass bearings relative to

magnetic north. You must either specify your local magnetic declination or
set the Magnetic declination field to ‘Auto’, otherwise the Asset Surveyor
software does not correctly convert the magnetic compass bearings to
true north.

The LaserAce 300 takes a few seconds to take a laser distance reading
(although the bearing and inclination can be read almost immediately).
If the Asset Surveyor software receives a message from the LaserAce
300 which lacks a distance measurement, the following warning
message is displayed:

38 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.6.6 Collecting Data

The following sections outline data collection.

Activating the laser interface

Within Data collection, the laser rangefinder interface can be activated
in one of two ways:

X
• Automatically, if you preconfigured the Laser sensor’s
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
• Manually, using the softkey.

You can also use the X

Checking the laser interface
softkey to access the Select sensor menu to
reconfigure the laser rangefinder interface, or to check that the laser
and the Asset Surveyor software are communicating correctly, as
described above.

Recording an offset
Whenever you are collecting a point feature, you can use the LaserAce

O
300 laser rangefinder to record an offset to the feature. You can record
an offset to a line, area, or quickmark feature only when you have
pressed the softkey to display the offset entry form for that
feature.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 387

I Laser Rangefinders

I.7 LaserCraft Contour XLR

The LaserCraft Contour XLR is a lightweight, handheld laser device,
suitable for use with the Asset Surveyor software for the automated
recording of offsets.

I.7.1 Hardware Specifications

The following sections detail the hardware specifications of the
LaserCraft Contour XLR.

Dimensions
The laser itself measures 18.8 cm × 10.8 cm × 25.4 cm (7.4" × 4.25" ×
10"). It weighs 1.36 kg (3 lbs). The casing is made from reinforced
polycarbonate.

Laser details
The laser can typically take measurements of up to 400 m (1312 ft) to
uncooperative surfaces. For cooperative targets (for example, a
reflector), the range of the laser is extended to 1,850 m (62,000 ft).
The laser is accurate to ±15.0 cm (6").

Compass details
A magnetic fluxgate compass is used to obtain azimuth measurements.
The compass is accurate to less than ±0.5°. In environments where
magnetic interference is high (for example, in a vehicle), the compass
can be considerably less accurate.

Inclinometer details
A built-in inclinometer measures vertical angles, which are used to
calculate the elevation of target points. The inclinometer is accurate to
0.3°.

38 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Powering
The Contour XLR rangefinder is powered by an internal 9.6 V NiMH
battery.

Environmental limitations
The Contour XLR rangefinder can be used at temperatures ranging
between –10°C and +45°C (+14°F to +113°F).

I.7.2 Accessories
The Contour XLR laser rangefinder can be used in four ways:
• As a handheld instrument.
• With a survey pole.
• With the optional monopod. The monopod includes an encoder
module for high accuracy horizontal angle readings, a slot for a
datalogger bracket, and a screw thread at the top of the
monopod pole for attaching a GPS receiver or antenna.
• With the optional tripod. The laser rangefinder can be mounted
on the tripod, using either a bracket or the MDL encoder
module.

I.7.3 Cabling for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

The Contour XLR laser rangefinder can be purchased with an optional
download cable. This cable provides a 9-pin connector which can be
plugged directly into the ESP port of a Pro XL. For use with the GPS
Pathfinder Pro XR or Pro XRS, a second data cable (P/N 32287) is
required as an adaptor to connect to the optional 9-pin adaptor.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 389

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XRS receiver

If you have a Pro XRS GPS receiver, connect the Contour XLR laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.16.

Figure I.16 Contour XLR laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XRS
with TSC1

39 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Cabling for the Pro XR receiver

If you have a Pro XR GPS receiver, connect the Contour XLR laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.17.

Figure I.17 Contour XLR laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XR with
TSC1

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 391

I Laser Rangefinders

Cabling for the Pro XL receiver

If you have a Pro XL GPS receiver, connect the Contour XLR laser
rangefinder to your receiver and datalogger as shown in Figure I.18.

Figure I.18 Contour XLR laser rangefinder cabling diagram for Pro XL with
TSC1

39 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.7.4 Configuration for Use with the Asset Surveyor Software

This section provides instructions for configuring the Contour XLR
laser rangefinder itself. For more information on configuring the Asset
Surveyor software to work with the Contour XLR laser rangefinder,
see Using the Contour XLR with the Asset Surveyor Software,
page 394.

Calibration of the Contour XLR

Whenever you use the Contour XLR after storing it for a period, or in
a new environment, calibrate the Contour XLR’s compass. This is
particularly important if you feel that the site in which you are
working is hostile in the sense of there being local magnetic field
distortions (for example, a vehicle, pipeline, or overhead or
underground power cable). The purpose of calibration is to distribute
compass error smoothly through a 360° circle.
Note – The calibration procedure does not modify the compass’s idea
of where magnetic north is. It simply distributes local distortion of the
earth’s magnetic field evenly through a 360° circle. This is important
as it ensures that compass readings are locally consistent. If you want
to account for an error in the compass’s determination of magnetic
north, do this by entering a new value for the Magnetic declination
field in the Asset Surveyor software’s Units and display configuration
form.
Calibration of the compass is quick and simple. Follow the
instructions below:
1. Turn on the Contour XLR.
2. Press the Menu key.
3. Press the Down arrow key until the entry Comp appears in
brackets, and then press Enter.
4. Press the Down key until CAL is selected, and then press Enter.
The display shows the message Initializing – please wait.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 393

I Laser Rangefinders

5. When the display shows the message Rotate unit for calibration, pull
and hold the trigger.
6. Slowly rotate through 360° twice, taking 1–2 minutes per
revolution. While turning, slowly pitch and roll the unit up and
down and side to side.
As the Contour XLR is rotated, the data point count on the
display increases. When the count reaches 275, calibration is
complete.
7. Release the trigger.
The Contour XLR returns to the previous operating mode.

I.7.5 Using the Contour XLR with the Asset Surveyor Software
As mentioned previously, the practical accuracy of the fluxgate
compass in typical field use is around ±0.5°. This yields a steady
reduction in accuracy as the distance between the laser and a target
point increases. At a distance of 100–200 m, the average positional
error when using the Contour XLR is approximately 1 m (in addition
to the error of your GPS measurement).

39 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Testing
When you first connect the Contour XLR to your Trimble GPS
system, test that it is correctly configured and that all components are
working correctly.
Select the Configuration entry from the Asset Surveyor software’s
Main menu:

Select External sensors from the Configuration menu. The menu of

available sensors appears:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 395

I Laser Rangefinders

S
Configuring the Asset Surveyor software
Configure the special Laser sensor to work with the LaserCraft
Contour XLR. To do this, press the softkey. The Laser
range-finder configuration form appears:

Set the Type field to ‘Contour XLR’. If you generally use the Contour
XLR rangefinder when collecting data, and if you typically do not use
any other type of external sensor, then set the Auto-connect field to
‘Yes’.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘On’ to display the Offset form for the
currently open feature whenever you send an offset from a laser
rangefinder.
Set the Confirm offsets field to ‘Off’ to automatically record offset
values to the open feature when you fire the rangefinder. The Offset

O
form does not appear unless an entry is required. The message Offset
received appears briefly in the status line, but no other notification
appears unless an entry is required. You can press in the attribute
entry form to open the Offset form if you want to confirm offset
values.
Set the Serial port according to the port you connect the LaserCraft

\
Contour XLR to, either ‘Top’ or ‘Bottom’.
Press to save these settings and return to the Select sensor menu.

39 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

Activating the laser interface

You can specify that you want the Asset Surveyor software to accept
input from the laser rangefinder, by selecting the Laser entry from the
Select sensor menu. When you do this, a check mark appears beside
the Laser entry to indicate that the rangefinder interface has been
activated:

Laser entry in the menu is highlighted), theZ

Once the rangefinder interface has been activated (and provided the
softkey appears.
Once the rangefinder interface has been activated, the Asset Surveyor
software accepts communications from it. You can configure the Asset
Surveyor software to automatically activate the laser rangefinder
interface when you start data collection by setting the Auto-connect
field to ‘Yes’, as described above.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 397

I Laser Rangefinders

If you attempt to activate the laser rangefinder interface and the serial
port is already in use by another sensor, the Asset Surveyor software
displays a message similar to the following:

The Asset Surveyor software does not activate the rangefinder

interface.

Z
Checking the laser interface
When the laser rangefinder is active (and highlighted in the list of
external sensors), press to open a status form for the rangefinder:

39 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 f
Laser Rangefinders I

You can press the softkey to toggle between displaying slope

distance/inclination and horizontal/vertical distance.
This form shows the most recent offset received from the laser
rangefinder. If you take further readings using the rangefinder, these
appear on the status form, replacing the previous reading.
You can take a reading with the Contour XLR and transmit it to the
Asset Surveyor software as follows:
1. Turn on the Contour XLR, and optionally calibrate it (as
described earlier).
2. Aim at a suitable target point.
3. Keeping a steady hold on the instrument, aim through its scope
and carefully press FIRE.
The bearing, inclination, and distance to the target point are
now displayed on the Contour XLR’s LED display. At the same
time, the Contour XLR sends its measurement to the TSC1
datalogger.
If you were viewing the laser rangefinder status form, you
would see the measurement arrive on the TSC1 screen:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 399

I Laser Rangefinders

The Asset Surveyor software displays the distance measurement in the

currently configured Distance units. The laser azimuth (bearing) is
converted to a true North azimuth. If the configured North reference is
‘True’, it is immediately displayed as a true North bearing (with a ‘T’
suffix); otherwise it is displayed as a magnetic North bearing (with an
‘M’ suffix).
Note – If the configured Magnetic declination is ‘Auto’, the Asset
Surveyor software’s internal magnetic declination model is used to
convert the magnetic laser bearing to a true north bearing. Otherwise,
the manually entered declination is used for this conversion.

C Warning – The Contour XLR always emits compass bearings relative to

magnetic north. You must either specify your local magnetic declination or
set the Magnetic declination field to ‘Auto’, otherwise the Asset Surveyor
software does not correctly convert the magnetic compass bearings to
true north.

The Contour XLR takes a few seconds to take a laser distance reading
(although the bearing and inclination can be read almost immediately).
If the Asset Surveyor software receives a message from the Contour
XLR which lacks a distance measurement, the following warning
message is displayed:

40 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Laser Rangefinders I

I.7.6 Collecting Data

The following sections outline data collection.

Activating the laser interface

Within Data collection, the laser rangefinder interface can be activated
in one of two ways:

X
• Automatically, if you preconfigured the Laser sensor’s
Auto-connect field to ‘Yes’.
• Manually, using the softkey.

You can also use the X

Checking the laser interface
softkey to access the Select sensor menu to
reconfigure the laser rangefinder interface, or to check that the laser
and the Asset Surveyor software are communicating correctly, as
described above.

Recording an offset
Whenever you are collecting a point feature, you can use the Contour

O
XLR laser rangefinder to record an offset to the feature. You can
record an offset to a line, area, or quickmark feature only when you
have pressed the softkey to display the offset entry form for that
feature.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 401

I Laser Rangefinders

40 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

J
J External Sensors
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Criterion laser rangefinder (used for measuring heights)
■ Digital cameras
■ Echo sounders
J External Sensors

J.1 Introduction
This appendix provides examples of how to configure and use a
variety of external sensors. Some of these examples refer to real
sensors while others use hypothetical sensors to illustrate different
aspects of the Asset Surveyor software’s external sensor capability.
Note – Trimble provides no specific endorsement of the products
named in the following sections. Additionally, Trimble provides no
warranty or guarantee as to the ongoing performance of the named
sensors with any Trimble GPS system. The named sensors have each
been tested by Trimble, but as we have no control over different
hardware or software versions, we cannot accept any responsibility
for ensuring that these sensors continue to work with Trimble
equipment.

J.2 Criterion Laser Rangefinder (used for Measuring

Heights)
The Criterion 300 and 400 laser rangefinders can be used to
automatically record offsets for features. They can also be used as
external sensors for measuring the heights of geographical features
(for example, trees, buildings, and so forth).
When operating in HEIGHT mode, the Criterion 300 rangefinder
emits data messages of the following form:
$PLTIC3,HT,<height>,<units>*<checksum>
CR
LF
For example, a height of 16.68 meters is transmitted as:
$PLTIC3,HT,16.68,M*2B
CR
LF

40 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 External Sensors J

You can configure an Asset Surveyor external sensor interface to

recognize these messages and to strip off the message packaging. It is
not possible for the Asset Surveyor software to actually verify the
checksum (2B in the example above), as these vary from message to
message.
Note – You can configure the Criterion to display and transmit heights
in feet, in which case ‘F’ would appear in the RS232 message example
above in place of the letter ‘M’.
Note – The data messages emitted by the Criterion 400 differ slightly
from those emitted by the Criterion 300 in that they begin with the
prefix $PLTIT instead of $PLTIC3. If you are using a Criterion 400,
be sure to substitute $PLTIT for $PLTIC3 when configuring your
external sensor interface. The following examples refer specifically to
the Criterion 300.

J.2.1 Data Dictionary Configuration

In order to make the best use of the heights transmitted by the
Criterion rangefinders, set up a data dictionary with a Height attribute
in each feature whose height concerns you. The Height attribute
should be a numeric attribute with two decimal places and appropriate
maximum and minimum values.
Note – The attribute’s name does not have to be Height. It is, however,
good practice for each attribute’s name to reflect the nature of the data
that you plan to record into it. The attribute name must be the same for
each type of feature whose height you want to record using your
rangefinder.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 405

J External Sensors

J.2.2 Asset Surveyor Configuration

Now configure an external sensor interface to receive height data from
the Criterion.
1. From the Asset Surveyor Configuration menu, select External
sensors:

2.
pressingS
Select Sensor 1 from this menu by highlighting Sensor 1 and
. The configuration form for external sensor
number 1 appears:

40 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 External Sensors J

3. Change the fields in this form as shown below:

Note – By using a prefix of $PLTIC3,HT, and a suffix of ,M*,

you cause the Asset Surveyor software to remove the packaging
characters which surround the actual height measurement. The
checksum, carriage-return and linefeed characters are then
ignored by the Asset Surveyor software.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 407

 m
J External Sensors

4. Press to open the configuration form for serial

communications (RS232) parameters, and enter the following
values:

5. Press \ to save the communications settings, then press

to save the sensor configuration details. The Asset Surveyor
\
software returns you to the Select sensor configuration menu,
and renames the first entry to the name that you specified for the
sensor:

40 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 External Sensors J

B
Z \
Tip – After configuring an external sensor interface, it is recommended
that you always test this interface. Select the external sensor from the list
by pressing the key. A check mark appears beside the sensor name.
Press to test this interface.

J.2.3 Using the Criterion to Record Heights

You can use the configured external sensor interface together with a
Criterion 300 to record heights as attributes, by following this
procedure:
1. Create a new rover data file.
When the Asset Surveyor software opens this file, it
automatically activates the pre-configured external sensor
interface (as the Auto-connect field was set to ‘Yes’ in the
previous section).
The Asset Surveyor software can now communicate with the
Criterion 300 rangefinder and you can begin to record heights.
2. Start a feature.
One of your feature’s attributes has the name Height, and it is
this attribute which is used to store heights recorded by the
Criterion 300.
3. Enter attribute values for the feature while the Asset Surveyor
software logs GPS positions.
It is usually easiest to manually enter attributes before taking a
recording with an external sensor. By following a set procedure
like this you are less likely to forget to record or enter a
particular piece of information.
4. Follow the procedure described in the Criterion 300/400
Operator’s Guide for recording a height with the Criterion 300.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 409

J External Sensors

The procedure essentially involves taking a distance

measurement to the object in question, then taking an angle
measurement to the base and top of the object.
5. Press the ENTER button on the Criterion’s keypad to send the
height to your TSC1 datalogger.
Provided you have configured your external sensor interface
correctly, and have connected and operated the Criterion 300
correctly, a value like 15.4 appears as the Height attribute for

\
your feature.
6. Press to save the feature.
From this point on, the Asset Surveyor software treats the
Height attribute as if it had been entered manually. It has no
special properties.

J.2.4 Switching between Recording Laser Offsets and Heights

You can use a Criterion laser rangefinder both for measuring offsets
and for measuring the heights of objects. However, in order for the
Asset Surveyor software to process these different types of data, you
must indicate whether the Criterion is being used as an offset sensor or

X
as a height sensor. You do this by alternately activating and
deactivating the Height sensor and Laser entries in the Select sensor
menu (accessible under the softkey when collecting data).

B Tip – Do not configure both the Height sensor and the Laser to
auto-connect; if you do this, only the Height sensor is activated and an
error message appears when the Asset Surveyor software attempts to
automatically activate the Laser interface.

41 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 External Sensors J

J.3 Digital Cameras

Certain digital cameras can be controlled through an RS232 port. A
message can be sent to the camera to trigger the taking of a
photograph, and the camera may respond with a message that can be
used subsequently to identify the photographic image that was
recorded by the camera.
A hypothetical camera communicates at 9600 baud with 8 data bits,
1 stop bit and odd parity. It is triggered either by pressing a button on
the camera itself or by sending the ASCII character ‘*’ to the camera.
When the camera is mounted on a vehicle it is typically easier to
trigger the camera with an RS232 message. Each time the camera
takes a photograph (whether triggered manually or with an RS232
message), it stores the digital image to its internal memory and emits
the following message to its RS232 port:
$PIC,nn
CR
LF
where nn indicates the number of the stored image (1 to 64).

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 411

J External Sensors

taking of a photograph whenever you press the r

You can configure an Asset Surveyor external sensor to trigger the
softkey, and to
store the number of the digital image as an attribute called Photo as
follows:
1. From the Asset Surveyor Configuration menu, select External
sensors:

2.
pressing S
Select Sensor 1 from this menu by highlighting Sensor 1 and
. The configuration form for external sensor
number 1 appears:

41 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

barcode.bmp
 External Sensors J

3. Change the fields in this form as shown below:

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 413

 m
J External Sensors

4. Press to display the configuration form for serial

communications (RS232) parameters, and enter the following
values:

5. Press\ to save the communications settings, then press

to save the sensor configuration details.
\
The Asset Surveyor software returns you to the Select sensor
configuration menu, and renames the first entry to the name that you
specified for the sensor:

41 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 External Sensors J

J.4 Echo Sounders

Echo-sounders are widely used to measure the depth of a body of
water at a particular point, together with such phenomena as the level
of sedimentation and the biomass (quantity of marine life). Most echo
sounders emit measurements as they are taken (typically one or more
per second).
The most common mapping application for an echo sounder is to map
the seabed, and in this case you configure the Asset Surveyor software
to log each message from the echo sounder as an
UNINTERPRETED_SENSOR_DATA record (which is not associated
with a feature).
A hypothetical echo sounder might measure the sea’s depth and
transmit this information once per second at 4800 baud, with 8 data
bits, 2 stop bits and no parity. Each measurement is emitted as a
message with the following format:
XXXX.X
where XXXX.X is the depth of the sea at the point the measurement
was taken. There are no delimiting characters that identify the start or
end of each message, so the Asset Surveyor software must rely on
timing information and the maximum length of 6 characters to isolate
each message.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 415

J External Sensors

You can configure an Asset Surveyor external sensor interface to log a

depth message from this hypothetical echo sounder every 5 seconds as
follows:
1. From the Asset Surveyor Configuration menu, select External
sensors:

2.
pressingS
Select Sensor 1 from this menu by highlighting Sensor 1 and
. The configuration form for external sensor
number 1 appears:

41 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 External Sensors J

3. Change the fields in this form as shown below:

Note – By configuring the Asset Surveyor software to log a

measurement every 5 seconds, it is able to discard any
intervening messages and is more likely to be able to keep pace
with the echo sounder.

B Tip – When logging sensor data for mapping as independent

UNINTERPRETED_SENSOR_DATA records, it is often convenient to
configure the sensor interface to display a status line. This assures you
that data is being logged continuously from the sensor.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 417

J External Sensors

B Tip – You can maximize the TSC1 datalogger’s ability to process external
sensor data by disabling the optional Audible click and the Status line, and
by minimizing the amount of additional GPS information which is logged at

m
the same time.

4. Press to display the configuration form for serial

communications (RS232) parameters, and enter the following
values:

5. Press \ to save the communications settings, then press

to save the sensor configuration details.
\

41 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 External Sensors J

The Asset Surveyor software returns you to the Select sensor

configuration menu, and renames the first entry to the name that
you specified for the sensor:

B Tip – Configure and activate the Asset Surveyor software’s external

sensor interface before turning on the echo sounder. If you turn on the
echo sounder before activating the software’s sensor interface, the first
measurement from the sensor may be interpreted incorrectly. This is
because the Asset Surveyor software has no way to distinguish a partial
message from a complete one due to the lack of a prefix or suffix on each
message.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 419

J External Sensors

42 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 APPENDIX

K
K NMEA Output Messages
In this chapter:

■ Introduction
■ Common message elements
■ Messages
K NMEA Output Messages

K.1 Introduction
NMEA output is available from some Trimble GPS receivers. This
appendix describes the NMEA messages that are available from the
Pro XL, Pro XR, and Pro XRS receivers.
All messages conform to the NMEA-0183 Version 2.0 format. All
begin with $ and end with a carriage return and a line feed. Data fields
follow comma (,) delimiters and are variable in length. Null fields still
follow a comma (,) delimiter but contain no information.
The optional checksum field is the last field in a message and follows
the asterisk (*) delimiter. The checksum is the 8-bit exclusive OR of
all characters in the message, including the commas, between but not
including the $ and asterisk delimiters. The hexadecimal result is
converted to two ASCII characters (0–9, A–F). The most significant
character appears first.
The supported messages include:
• ALM: GPS week number, SV health, and complete almanac
data for one SV. One message per SV, up to a maximum of 32.
• GGA: Time, position, and fix related data.
• GLL: Position fix, time of position fix, and status.
• GSA: GPS receiver operating mode, SVs used for navigation
and DOP values.
• GSV: Number of visible SVs, PRN numbers, elevation,
azimuth, and SNR values.
• RMC: Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data.
• VTG: Actual track made good and speed over ground.
• ZDA: UTC day, month, year, and local time zone offset.

42 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 NMEA Output Messages K

K.2 Common Message Elements

Each message consists of:
• A message ID consisting of $GP followed by the message type.
For example, the message ID of the ALM message is $GPALM.
• A comma.
• A number of fields that depends on the message type, separated
by commas.
• An asterisk.
• A checksum.
Here is an example of a simple message with six fields plus the
message ID and checksum:
$GPZDA,004405.25,30,09,1994,00,00*6B

K.2.1 Latitude and Longitude

Latitude is represented as ddmm.mmmm and longitude is represented
as dddmm.mmmm, where:
• dd or ddd is degrees
• mm.mmmm is minutes and decimal fractions of minutes

K.2.2 Direction
Direction; north, south, east, or west; is represented by a single
character: N, S, E, or W.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 423

K NMEA Output Messages

K.2.3 Time
Time values are presented in Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) and
are represented as hhmmss, where:
• hh is hours, from 00 to 23
• mm is minutes
• ss is seconds

K.3 Messages
When NMEA-0183 output is enabled, the following messages can be
produced to aid integration with other sensors.

K.3.1 ALM: GPS Week, SV Health, and Almanac for One SV

$GPALM,1,1,21,768,00,5d94,08,08b7,fd4f,
a10d2e,747f49,57ab38,c0b629,ffa,000*43
The fields include:
• Total number of ALM messages for this cycle
• Message sequence number
• SV PRN number, 01 to 32
• GPS week number
• SV health status
• Eccentricity
• Almanac reference time
• Inclination angle
• Rate of right ascension
• Root of semimajor axis
• Argument of perigee

42 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 NMEA Output Messages K

• Longitude of ascension node

• Mean anomaly
• af0, clock parameter
• af1, clock parameter

K.3.2 GGA: Time, Position, and Fix Related Data

$GPGGA,004407.00,3723.477595,N,12202.251222,
W,2,07,1.2,19.1,M,-25.7,M,3,0003*55
The fields include:
• UTC of position fix
• Latitude
• Direction of latitude (N or S)
• Longitude
• Direction of longitude (E or W)
• GPS quality indicator:
– 0 = fix not valid
– 1 = GPS fix
– 2 = Differential GPS fix
• Number of SVs in use, 00 to 12
• HDOP
• Antenna height, MSL reference
• M is fixed text indicating that the unit of measure for altitude is
meters
• Geoidal separation
• M is fixed text indicating that the unit of measure for geoidal
separation is meters

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 425

K NMEA Output Messages

• Age of differential GPS data record, Type 1 or Type 9, null

when DGPS not used
• Differential reference station ID, 0000 to 1023, null when any
reference station ID is selected and no corrections have been
received

K.3.3 GLL: Position Fix, Time of Position Fix, and Status

$GPGLL,3723.477595,N,12202.251222,W,004407.00,A*1E
The fields include:
• Latitude
• Direction of latitude (N or S)
• Longitude
• Direction of longitude, (E or W)
• UTC of position
• Status: Fixed text A, indicates that data is valid

K.3.4 GSA: GPS Receiver Operating Mode, SVs used for

Navigation, and DOP Values
$GPGSA,A,3,25,15,01,14,29,21,20,,,,,,1.9,1.2,1.5*30
The fields include:
• Fix Mode:
– M = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D
– A = Automatic, 3D/2D
• Fix Status:
– 1 = Fix not available
– 2 = 2D
– 3 = 3D

42 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 NMEA Output Messages K

• Fields 3 to 14 = PRNs of SVs used in position fix (null for

unused fields)
• Field 15 = PDOP
• Field 16 = HDOP
• Field 17 = VDOP

K.3.5 GSV: Number of Visible SVs, PRN Numbers, Elevation,

Azimuth, and SNR Values
$GPGSV,2,1,08,01,32,054,47,14,33,308,45,15,61,261,
52,20,07,054,41*7F
The fields include:
• Total number of messages of this type in this cycle
• Message number
• Total number of visible satellites
• SV PRN number
• Elevation in degrees, 90
• Azimuth, degrees from true north, 000
• SNR (C/N0) 00 to 99 dB, null when not tracking
• 8 to 11 = Information about second SV, same format as fields 4
to 7
• 12 to 15 = Information about third SV, same format as fields 4
to 7
• 16 to 19 = Information about fourth SV, same format as fields 4
to 7

K.3.6 RMC: Recommended Minimum Specific GPS/TRANSIT Data

$GPRMC,004407.00,A,3723.477595,N,12202.251222,W,1.2,7.4,071
196,2.0,E*hh

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 427

K NMEA Output Messages

The fields include:

• UTC of position
• Status: Fixed text A, indicates that data is valid
• Latitude
• Direction of latitude (N or S)
• Longitude
• Direction of longitude (E or W)
• Speed over ground in knots
• Track made good in degrees True
• UT date
• Magnetic variation degrees (Easterly var. subtracts from true
course)
• E or W
• Checksum

K.3.7 VTG: Actual Track Made Good and Speed Over Ground
$GPVTG,7.4,T,,,000.1,N,000.1,K*2E
The fields include:
• Track made good
• Fixed text T indicates that track made good is relative to true
north
• Fields 3 and 4 are null, not used
• Speed over ground in knots
• Fixed text N indicates that speed over ground is in knots
• Speed over ground in kilometers/hour (km/h)
• Fixed text K indicates that speed over ground is in km/h

42 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 NMEA Output Messages K

K.3.8 ZDA: UTC Day, Month, Year, and Local Time Zone Offset
$GPZDA,004405.25,30,09,1994,00,00*6B
The fields include:
• Time, in UTC
• Day, 01 to 31
• Month, 01 to 12
• Year
• Local time zone offset from GMT, 00 to 23
• Local time zone offset from GMT in minutes
Fields 5 and 6, together, yield the total offset. For example, if field 5 is
–5 and field 6 is –15, local time is 5 hours and 15 minutes earlier than
GMT.

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 429

K NMEA Output Messages

43 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

Index
Symbols carrier phase mode 292
configuring 291
.ddf files 42
external sensors 293
importing from GIS 46
output 293
.eph files 40
real-time input 292
.ssf files 45
real-time output 292
almanac 40
serial ports 290
exporting to GIS 156
turning on and off 290
importing from GIS 46
4800 receiver 297, 298
.wpt files 44
accuracy 302
base station operation 303
cabling 304
Numerics
carrier phase 303
4000 Series. See Series 4000 receiver configuring 301
4600LS Surveyor receiver control panel 299
accuracy 281 equipment list 305
base station operation 283 external sensors 303
cabling 284 operating controls 299
carrier phase mode 282 output 303
configuring 280 power ON/OFF button 299
equipment 287 real-time input 302
external sensors 283 real-time output 303
output 282 serial ports 300
RTCM input 282 switches and indicator lights 299
turning on and off 280 turning on and off 301
4700 receiver 289
accuracy 291
base station operation 293
cabling 294

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 431

Index

A almanac
Series 4000 receiver 266
abandoning features 92
updating 40
accuracy
almanac files 40
4600LS Surveyor receiver 281
alternate keys 23
4700 receiver 291
altitude 133
4800 receiver 302
Altitude Info panel 133
C/A code submeter 60
ambiguity search 190
critical settings 54
Antenna Phase Center 204
GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
antenna setup 210, 213
receiver 253
area features 75, 76, 79
GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
averaged vertices 90
receiver 245
repeating 83
GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
symbol 97
receiver 233
Asset Surveyor software
of TSC1 clock 71
base station configuration 8
RTK 192
coordinate systems 13
Series 4000 receiver 258
data collection 12
Site Surveyor 4400 receiver 273
data maintenance 13
submeter 152
external sensors 13
activating
languages 13
GPS 64
map 13
OmniSTAR Satellite Differential
navigation 13
service 239
rover configuration 5
Racal-LandStar Satellite
waypoints 13
Differential service 241
attributes 405, 412
adding notes 92
entering 91
Advantage laser rangefinder
filtering by 105
cabling 346
updating 108
calibration 350
using as feature labels 98
compass 345
attributes, using values as feature
EEPROM configuration 350
labels 98
powering 346
averaged vertices 90
range 345
alarm, proximity 130
All softkey 139, 140
ALM message 424

43 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Index

B Advantage laser rangefinder

with a Pro XL 349
back in the office 4, 141, 226
with a Pro XR 348
backlight 26
with a Pro XRS 347
base data
Contour XLR laser rangefinder
collecting 9–10
with a Pro XL 392
transferring 143
with a Pro XR 391
base station
with a Pro XRS 390
collecting data 9–10
Criterion 300/400 laser
configuration 8
rangefinder
getting data 60
with a Pro XL 313
moving 199
with a Pro XR 312
using RTK and non-RTK
with a Pro XRS 311
rovers 226
for data transfer 50
baseline, what it is 188
GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
batch processing 159
receiver 255
Batch Processor utility 159
GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
battery 207
receiver 249
recharging 32
GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
status 31
receiver 237
warnings 32
LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder
bearing to go 133
with a Pro XL 378
Bearing to Go Info panel 133
with a Pro XR 377
bearing to offset feature 88
with a Pro XRS 376
blocks of data 166
LEDHA-GEO laser rangefinder
bottom port 34
with a Pro XL 364
with a Pro XR 363
with a Pro XRS 362
C
ProSurvey 1000 laser rangefinder
C/A code 189 with a Pro XL 333
cabling with a Pro XR 332
4600LS Surveyor receiver 284 with a Pro XRS 331
RTCM input Series 4000 receiver 268
configuration 286 Site Surveyor 4400 receiver 276
two-port 285
4700 receiver 294
4800 receiver 304

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 433

Index

calibrating 194 collecting

Advantage laser rangefinder 350 base station data 9–10
Contour XLR laser new features 4, 74
rangefinder 393 rover data 7
LaserAce 300 laser Comms softkey 408, 418
rangefinder 379 communication settings 214
local site 194 compass offset 319, 320
ProSurvey 1000 335 configuration
to existing control points 193 for carrier phase data
carrier notes 182 collection 172–174
carrier phase 82, 162–183 of base station 8
4600LS Surveyor receiver 282 of rover 5–7
4700 receiver 292 system 53
4800 receiver 303 Configuration module 14
blocks of data 166 Contour XLR laser rangefinder
configuration 172–174 cabling 389
GPS Pathfinder Pro XL calibration 393
receiver 254 compass 388
GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS powering 389
receiver 236 range 388
logging data 179 unipod 389
minimum number of satellites 163 contrast 25
minimum time 164 control points 195
postprocessing 171 coordinate systems 13, 44
recording features 168 transferring files to TSC1 3
Series 4000 receiver 265 copying files 139
Site Surveyor 4400 receiver 274 Create softkey
carrier waves 189 Map module 136
centimeter processing option 183 Navigation module 126, 136
checking equipment 3 Utilities module 136
CMR 191 creating
Coarse Acquisition code 189 data files 4
code and phase measurements 189 data files from GIS 46
cold boot 28 new data file 73
project in GPS Pathfinder
Office 41

43 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Index

waypoints 68, 101, 135 data files

in GPS Pathfinder Office 44 creating 4, 7, 73
Criterion 300/400 laser rangefinder displaying as a map 154
cabling 310 exporting to a GIS 156
Pro XL 313 importing from GIS 48
Pro XR 312 opening 4
Pro XRS 311 preparing 3
measuring heights 404 reviewing 96
powering 328 transferring 3, 4, 142, 143, 148
unipod 310 updating 13, 45, 94–115
critical settings 54 data maintenance 4, 13
cross-track error 132, 133 data transfer 49, 142
Cross-Track Info panel 133 Data Transfer utility 49, 142
current position 67 connecting the TSC1
cursor datalogger 50
GPS 121 datalogger 142
map 121 deactivating GPS 69
declination, magnetic 320, 342, 357,
372, 386, 400
D Del softkey
data features 114
importing from GIS 3 waypoints 136
logging to file 72–93 DelAll softkey
data capacity files 137
TSC1 29 waypoints 136
data collection 12 deleting
carrier phase 82, 162–183 features 114
planning 38 files 137
RTK 186–229 deletion status, filtering by 106
static 197 differential correction 4, 153
Data collection module 14, 45 getting base stations data 60
data dictionaries 12, 42 postprocessed 152
importing from GIS 47 re-running 154
preparing 3 troubleshooting 154
transferring to TSC1 3 Differential Correction utility 153
digital cameras, as external sensors 411
Direction Dial screen 128

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 435

Index

direction of travel 134 external sensors 13, 404–419

direction to offset feature 88 attribute 405, 412
discarding features 92 automatic activation 409
disconnecting from the receiver 26 digital cameras 411
display options 58 echo sounders 415
Map module 118 status line 417
displaying data 154
distance to go 126
dual-frequency receivers, what they F
observe 189 factory defaults, resetting to 27
features
area 75, 76, 79
E
averaged vertices 90
echo sounders, as external sensors 415 collecting 74
Edit softkey 136 configuring labels 120
editing waypoints 136 creating waypoints from 101
ellipsoid 193 deleting 114
entering discarding 92
attributes 91 filtering by 104, 105
notes 92 icons 97
ephemeris files 40 information 102
equipment, checking 3 labels 98
erasing memory 28 line 75, 76, 78
estimated time of arrival (ETA) 133 marking as updated 110
ETA 133 nesting 78, 84
ETA Info panel 133 point 75, 76, 77
existing files 94 quickmarking 78, 85
Export utility 228 recording in carrier phase
exporting mode 168
data to a GIS 156 repeating 83
RTK data 228 reviewing 81
RTK positions 228 saving 92
RTK precision estimates 229 searching for 107
EXT softkey 77, 328, 344, 359, 373, sorting 103
387, 401, 410 undeleting 114
extending base station coverage 200 updating 108
file management 137–140

43 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Index

File manager module 14, 137–140 GIS

filenames 175 importing data dictionary from 47
local time 73 importing data from 3, 46, 94
UTC time 73 GIS output format
files ARC/INFO 158
copying 139 AutoCAD 158
deleting 137 ERDAS 158
existing 94 MGAL- Intergraph 158
moving 140 GLL message 426
opening 94 Go Up/Go Down Info panel 134
renaming 138 GPS
reviewing 94–115 how it works 188
statistics 138 activating 64
filtering deactivating 69
by attribute 105 status line 65
by deletion status 106 GPS cursor 121
by feature 104, 105 GPS Pathfinder Office software 3, 12,
by RTK precision 228 16, 95
by time 106 centimeter processing option 183
by update status 106 creating a local site 194
Filters softkey 104 Data Transfer utility 49, 142
Data collection module 120 differential correction 152
Map module 119, 120 Import utility 94
fixed versus float solutions 190 importing data files 46
flash memory 26 projects 40
Format softkey 88, 101 creating 41
offsets 89 GPS Pathfinder Pro XL receiver 251
FTP site xv accuracy 253
cabling 255, 313, 333, 349, 364,
378, 392
G carrier phase mode 254
geoid 193 configuring 252
geoid models 196 equipment list 256
geoid-ellipsoid separation 194 output 254
GGA message 425 RTCM input 253
RTCM output 254
turning on and off 252

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 437

Index

GPS Pathfinder Pro XR receiver 243 GPS receivers 15, 189

accuracy 245 supported types 15
cabling 249, 312, 332, 348, 363, GPS time 134
377, 391 GPS Total Station 4700. See 4700
carrier phase mode 247 receiver
centimeter processing option 183 GPS Total Station 4800. See 4800
configuring 245 receiver
equipment list 250 graphical map 13
output 248 graphical mode, Map module 68, 116
Postprocessed Real-time ground plane 206
(PPRT) 248 GSA message 426
RTCM input 246 GSV message 427
RTCM output 246
turning on and off 244
Unattended Real-time Base H
Station 246 hard key, what it is 23
GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS receiver 231 heading 127, 134
accuracy 233 locked 127
cabling 237, 311, 331, 347, 362, Heading Info panel 134
376, 390 height measurements for Compact L1/L2
carrier phase mode 236 on range pole 205
centimeter processing option 183 Help key 25
configuring 233 Here softkey
equipment list 238 Configuration module 10
output 236 Map module 136
Postprocessed Real-time Navigation module 136
(PPRT) 236 Utilities module 136
RTCM input 234 Hide BG softkey 120
RTCM output 235 HideAll softkey 105
turning on and off 232 highlighting features in the map 122
Unattended Real-time Base horizontal distance, to offset feature 89
Station 235
GPS position 100
current 67
updating 108
GPS receiver status 68

43 8 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Index

I L
icons 97 L1 and L2 frequencies 290, 298
update status 98 what they are 189
Import utility 94 L1/L2 geodetic antennas 204
Imported update status 95 labels 98
importing configuring 120
data dictionary from GIS 47 Labels softkey 98, 120
data files from GIS 46, 48, 94 land survey applications 290, 298
in the field 61 languages 13
collecting carrier phase data 175– Laser Atlanta Advantage laser
182 rangefinder 345
inclination, to offset feature 88 Laser Atlanta ProSurvey 1000 laser
including RTK positions for export 228 rangefinder 329
Info panels 133 laser rangefinders 308–401
Altitude 133 Advantage 345
Bearing to Go 133 Contour XLR 388
Cross-Track 133 Criterion 300/400 308
ETA 133 LaserAce 300 374
Go N/Go E 134 LEDHA-GEO 360
Go Up/Go Down 134 ProSurvey 1000 329
Heading 134 Laser Technology Criterion 300/400
Time 134 laser rangefinder 308
Time to Go 134 LaserAce 300 laser rangefinder
Turn 134 cabling 375
Velocity 134 calibration 379
Info softkey 102 compass 374
integer ambiguity search 190 powering 375
range 374
unipod 375
K LaserCraft Contour XLR laser
known points 195 rangefinder 388
LEDHA-GEO laser rangefinder 360
line features 75, 76, 78
averaged vertices 90
repeating 83

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 439

Index

segmenting 79 masks 192

symbol 97 maximum possible accuracy 193
local site, calibration schematic 194 MDL LaserAce 300 laser
local time 71 rangefinder 374
in filenames 73, 175 Measure softkey 136
locked heading 127 measuring height of Compact L1/L2
Log softkey 110, 198 antenna with ground plane 206
logging 82 memory 26
carrier phase data 179 erasing 28
data to file 72–93 Menu key 25
pausing 82 minimum time, for carrier phase
logging interval 29 data 164
low battery warnings 32 Mode softkey
Map module 67, 117
Navigation module 125, 131
M Satellite information module 69
magnetic declination 320, 342, 357, monopod 375, 389
372, 386, 400 moving
Main menu 63 base station 199
managing files 137–140 files 140
map 13
map cursor 104, 121
N
Map module 14, 116–124
display options 118 navigating 13, 125–136
graphical mode 68, 116 Start 125
panning 122 Target 125
text mode 116 using the map 121
Map screen Navigation module 14, 125–136
highlighting features 122 altitude 133
navigating 121 bearing to go 133
selecting features 122 cross-track 133
start and target points 124 Direction Dial screen 128
zooming 118 ETA 133
Map window in GPS Pathfinder go N/Go E 134
Office 154 go up/down 134
Mark softkey 99, 110 GPS time 134
marking features as updated 110 heading 127, 134

44 0 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Index

Info panels 133 opening existing files 4, 94

proximity alarm 130 Options softkey
Road screen 131 Map module 97, 98, 118, 121
time to go 134 Navigation module 127, 128, 130,
turn 134 132, 134
velocity 134 outputs
Nest softkey 78, 80, 84 4600LS Surveyor receiver 282
nesting 78, 84 4700 receiver 293
New softkey 77, 79, 80, 81, 84, 99, 113, 4800 receiver 303
115 GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
Next key 25 receiver 254
NMEA output GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
ALM message 424 receiver 248
GGA message 425 GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
GLL message 426 receiver 236
GSA message 426 Series 4000 receiver 267
GSV message 427 Site Surveyor 4400 receiver 274
RMC message 427 overdetermined 3D mode 39
VTG message 428 overdetermined positions 55
ZDA message 429
non-critical settings 56
Not Transferred update status 95 P
notes 92 P code 189
carrier 182 panning 122
Now softkey 106 Pause softkey 77, 82, 110
null string 77 pausing logging 82
number PC card
of satellites tracked 12 copying files to and from 139
number of satellites for carrier phase moving files to and from 140
data 163 PC card softkey 138
PC cards 26
supported types 27
O
PDOP. See Position Dilution of Precision
Offset softkey 77, 79, 80, 87, 101, 109, planning data collection 38, 200
328, 344, 359, 373, 387, 401 point features 75, 76, 77
offsets 86 nesting 84
format 89 quickmarking 85

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 441

Index

repeating 83 Q
symbols 97
querying
ports on the TSC1 34
positions 155
Pos softkey 100, 109, 136
RTK position 227
position 100
Quick Plan software 16, 38
current 67
quick setup 1
querying 155
base station 8
Position Dilution of Precision
rover configuration 5
(PDOP) 12, 38
Quick softkey 78, 80, 85
position interval 29
quickmarking 76, 78, 85
Postprocessed Real-time (PPRT)
in carrier phase data
GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
collection 178
receiver 248
GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
receiver 236
R
postprocessing 4, 152, 188
power sources for the TSC1 30 radio 203
power status 31 setup 210, 213
PPRT. See Postprocessed Real-time radio repeaters 200
Precise code 189 options 203
precision range, to offset feature 88
estimates 192 rangefinders 308–401
tolerances 192 Readme.txt file xiv
preparation for RTK data collection 199 real-time input
preparing 4700 receiver 292
data dictionaries 3 4800 receiver 302
data files 3 Series 4000 receiver 264
ProSurvey 1000 329 Site Surveyor 4400 receiver 274
cabling 330 Real-Time Kinematic (RTK) data
calibration 335 collection 186–229
compass 329 real-time output
EEPROM configuration 334 4700 receiver 292
powering 330 4800 receiver 303
range 329 Series 4000 receiver 264
proximity alarm 130 Site Surveyor 4400 receiver 274
rebooting the TSC1 27
Receiver status module 14

44 2 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Index

recharging the TSC1 battery 32 RTCM input

recommended RTK settings 216 4600LS Surveyor receiver 282
recording GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
averaged vertices 90 receiver 253
new features 74 GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
non-RTK data files 225 receiver 246
relative measurement between base and GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
rover 188 receiver 234
release notes xiv RTCM output
renaming files 138 GPS Pathfinder Pro XL
Repeat softkey 83, 84 receiver 254
repeating features 83 GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
resetting to factory defaults 27 receiver 246
Resume softkey 82 GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
resuming logging 82 receiver 235
Review softkey 77, 79, 80, 81, 84, 96, RTK 186–229
99, 113, 115 overview 186
reviewing accuracy 192
adding new features 113 base station setup 209, 212
data files 4, 13, 45, 94–115 correction messages 190
features 81 CMR 191
filtering 104 RTCM 191
searching 107 data collection 187, 188, 193, 197
sorting 103 positions 228
waypoints 136 precision estimates 229
RMC message 427 status modes 224
Road screen 131 using with non-RTK 226
rover RTK softkey 193, 215, 217, 226
collecting data 7
configuration 5–7
file transfer 143, 148 S
rover files Satellite information module 14, 68–69
creating 73 satellites
data transfer 143 information 68–69
roving data collection 198 minimum number for carrier phase
RS-232 ports 290, 298 data 163
RTCM 2.1 191

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 443

Index

number tracked 12 Setup softkey 105

signals 189 laser rangefinders 322, 337, 353,
saving features 92 368, 381, 396
screen 25 Show BG softkey 120
Search softkey 107 ShowAll softkey 105
searching for features 107 single-frequency receivers, what they
second function keys. See alternate keys observe 189
Seg softkey 24, 79 Site Surveyor 4400 receiver 271
segmenting line features 79 accuracy 273
selecting base station operation 275
features in the map 122 cabling 276
site for base station 201 carrier phase mode 274
Start 124 configuring 272
Target 124 equipment list 277
serial ports, 4800 receiver 300 external sensors 275
Series 4000 receiver 257 output 274
2D mode 265 real-time input 274
accuracy 258 real-time output 274
almanac 265, 266 turning on and off 272
base station operation 265 slope distance, to offset feature 88
cabling 268 softkeys 24
carrier phase mode 265 software
configuring 261 Asset Surveyor 12
output 267 GPS Pathfinder Office 3, 16, 51
real-time input 264 QuickPlan 38
real-time output 264 Sort softkey 103
turning off 261 sorting features 103
turning on 259 Start
velocities 267 navigating from 125
servicing the TSC1 35 selecting 124
setting up a base station 60 Start softkey
settings Map module 124, 136
critical 3, 54 Navigation module 125, 136
display 3, 58 starting
non-critical 3, 56 base station 218
rover 221
static data collection 197

44 4 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Index

statistics, on files 138 transferring

status data dictionary 50
battery 31 data files 4, 49, 142
GPS receiver 68 files 3
status line 12, 65, 417 Trimble Support Module (TSM),
Status softkey 409 recharging TSC1 battery with 33
laser rangefinders 324 Trimble Survey Controller software 35
submeter accuracy 152 TSC1 2
Survey Controller. See Trimble Survey back view of 22
Controller software clock accuracy 71
symbols 97 data capacity 29
update status 98 disconnecting from the
Symbols softkey 97 receiver 26
Map module 97, 120 front view of 21
introduction to 20
memory 26
T physical specifications 30
Target ports 34
navigating to 125 power sources 30
proximity alarm 130 rebooting 27
selecting 124 screen 25
Target softkey backlight 26
Data collection module 108 contrast 25
Map module 124, 136 servicing 35
Navigation module 125, 136 turning on and off 23
text mode, Map module 67, 116 TSM. See Trimble Support Module
time 134 Turn Info panel 134
accuracy 71 turning on the TSC1 23
filtering by 106
Time Info panel 134
U
Time softkey 73, 175
Time to Go Info panel 134 Unattended Real-Time Base Station
Today softkey 106 GPS Pathfinder Pro XR
top port 34 receiver 246
Transferred update status 95 GPS Pathfinder Pro XRS
receiver 235
Undel softkey 114

TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual 445

Index

undeleting features 114 waypoints 13, 135

UNINTERPRETED_SENSOR_DATA creating 68, 101, 135
415, 417 creating in GPS Pathfinder
unipod 310 Office 44
Unmark softkey 111 editing 136
unmarking features 110 WayPt softkey
update notes xiv Configuration module 10
Update softkey 85 Data collection module 136
update status 95 Map module 68, 101, 117
filtering by 106 world wide web site xiii
icons 98
updating
adding new features 113 Z
data files 4, 45, 94–115 ZDA message 429
data files from GIS 46 Zoom– softkey 118
features 108 Zoom+ softkey 118
using a ground plane 206 Zoom= softkey 118
UTC time 71, 424 zooming 118
in filenames 73, 175
Utilities module 14

V
velocity 134
Velocity Info panel 134
Vertex softkey 80, 90
vertical distance, to offset feature 89
vertices, averaged 90
VTG message 428

W
warm boot 27
waypoint files 44
transferring to TSC1 3

44 6 TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual

 Reader Comment Form
TSC1 Asset Surveyor Operation Manual March 2001
P/N: 34182-20-ENG Revision A

We appreciate your comments and suggestions for improving this publication.

Contributors of particularly helpful evaluations will receive a thank-you gift.
I use the following Trimble product_______________________________________________
for __________________________________
_______________________________________
Please circle a response for each of the statements below:
1 = Strongly Agree 2 = Agree 3 = Neutral 4 = Disagree 5 = Strongly Disagree
The manual is well organized. 1 2 3 4 5
I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5
The information in the manual is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5
I can easily understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual contains enough examples. 1 2 3 4 5
The examples are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The layout and format are attractive and useful. 1 2 3 4 5
The illustrations are clear and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual is: too long just right too short
Please answer the following questions:
Which sections do you use the most? ______
_______________________________________
What do you like best about the manual? ___
_______________________________________
____________________________________
_______________________________________
What do you like least about the manual? ___
_______________________________________
____________________________________
_______________________________________
Optional
Name ______________________________________________________________________
Company ____________________________
_______________________________________
Address_____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________
_______________________________________
Telephone ____________________________ Fax __________________________________
Please mail to the local office listed on the back cover, or to Trimble Navigation
Limited, Mapping & GIS Systems, 645 North Mary Avenue, P.O. Box 3642,
Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642. All comments and suggestions become the
property of Trimble Navigation Limited.